Inventors list

Assignees list

Classification tree browser

Top 100 Inventors

Top 100 Assignees


Handoff

Subclass of:

455 - Telecommunications

455403000 - RADIOTELEPHONE SYSTEM

455422100 - Zoned or cellular telephone system

Patent class list (only not empty are listed)

Deeper subclasses:

Class / Patent application numberDescriptionNumber of patent applications / Date published
455437000 Mobile assisted or initiated 229
455438000 Serving site initiated 103
455442000 Soft handoff 76
455440000 Based upon unit location 57
455444000 Between macro and micro cells 57
455439000 Handoff initiated by another source (e.g., target, user initiated, mobile switching center (MSC), or mobile telephone switching office (MTSO), etc.) 29
455443000 Overlapping cells 21
455441000 Based upon unit velocity 10
Entries
DocumentTitleDate
20100151862METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR HANDOVER IN WIMAX NETWORKS - This application provides techniques for robust handover to a target base station, based on performing initial ranging with the target base station. The techniques might generally include scanning neighboring base stations (BSs), selecting a target BS for a handover at least based on results of the scanning, performing initial ranging with the target BS, and sending a Handover Request to the target BS.06-17-2010
20130183972METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING HANDOVER INFORMATION - The present invention discloses method, system and equipment for transmitting handover information. The method comprises: source eNB sends handover request to target eNB, and distinguished the carried primary cell (Pcell) candidate set and secondary cell (Scell) candidate set through the identification information carried by said handover request. That carrying indication information of target eNB is used for selecting Pcell and Scell through handover request information during multicarrier handover is realized through the embodiments of the present invention.07-18-2013
20110177817SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INDEPENDENT SETTING OF CELL CHANGE NETWORK CONTROL MODE AND NOTIFICATION OF CELL CHANGE MODE FOR UNCONTROLLED CELLS - Systems and Methods for Independent Setting of Cell Change Network Control Mode and Notification of Cell Change Mode for Uncontrolled Cells are provided. In some cases, separate behaviour is specified for mobile stations in respect of uncontrolled cells. In some cases, behaviour is signalled by the signalling used for normal cells, but different meaning is attributed to the signalling. In some cases, at least one further criterion is combined with the signalling for controlled cells to determine the behaviour for controlled cells. In some cases, additional signalling is employed.07-21-2011
20110177815APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING RADIO LINK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING PRIVATE NETWORK CELL - Disclosed is a method of connecting a radio link of a UE in a wireless communication system including a first cell and a second cell partially or completely overlapping the first cell, the method including the steps of, when the UE fails in connecting a radio link to the first cell for a given time, performing measurement for the second cell by using prestored radio link connection information for the second cell; and if a result of the measurement satisfies given cell selection conditions, selecting the second cell.07-21-2011
20080261599Fast Serving Cell Change - In a wireless communication system in which a user using a mobile equipment requests a serving cell handoff from a source cell to a target cell, the mobile equipment monitors authorization for the handoff from the target cell. At the same time, the mobile equipment can decode data from either the source cell or the target cell. Upon receipt of authorization for the handoff, the mobile equipment sends confirmation of the handoff to the target cell.10-23-2008
20080261598METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFER OF SESSION REFERENCE NETWORK CONTROLLER - Systems and methods of decoupling session management from connection management of a wireless network by enabling transfer of a session between session controllers. A session transfer component transfers ownership of a session from a source session controller to a target session controller, wherein the session transfer does not necessarily require moving the associated connections therewith. Such transfer employs a Unicast Access Terminal Identifier (UATI) that is updated to inform the related base stations regarding transfer of the session.10-23-2008
20080261596Method and Apparatus for Establishing Transport Channels for a Femtocell - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first wireless communication system and a second wireless communication system that includes a Femtocell access point (FAP) and a network controller that can communicatively couple the FAP to the first wireless communication system. In some embodiments, the network controller can communicatively couple to the first wireless communication system through a UTRAN Iu interface. Some embodiments provide a resource management method that determines that a user equipment (UE) has roved in a region serviced by the FAP. The FAP includes a generic access resource control (GA-RC) protocol sub-layer. The method creates a separate GA-RC state dedicated to the UE in the GA-RC protocol sub-layer. The method also sets the GA-RC state dedicated to the UE to a deregistered state to indicate that the UE is not registered to use the services of the second wireless communication system.10-23-2008
20080293417Method and System for Implementing Subscriber Terminal Handover Accounting in Broadband Wireless Access System - The present invention relates to a method and system for implementing subscriber terminal handover accounting in broadband wireless access system. The present invention mainly includes: first, in a broadband wireless access system, an accounting client entity before handover reports handover accounting information to an accounting server after a subscriber terminal handover; then an accounting client entity after handover reports an accounting handover start message to the accounting server, and an end accounting client entity is responsible for accounting handling of the subscriber terminal. The present invention presents an accounting solution of the handover between the ASN accounting clients in a broadband wireless access network such as WiMAX, and thus guarantees the moving subscriber to collect and report the accounting data continuously, in other words, guarantees the continuity of the accounting handling procedure in the system. The present invention is simple and easy to be realized.11-27-2008
20100056156METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NEGOTIATING SECURITY DURING HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A method and apparatus of security negotiation for handover between different radio access technologies are provided. The method includes: transmitting the security information of the NAS and AS selected by the target system to the UE when the UE hands over between different radio access technologies. Therefore, the UE can perform security negotiation with the target system according to the security information of the NAS and AS. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the UE may obtain the key parameter information of the NAS and AS selected by the LTE system and perform security negotiation with the LTE system when the UE hands over from a different system, such as a UTRAN, to an LTE system.03-04-2010
20080299975METHOD OF RESELECTING A CELL BY A MOBILE TERMINAL IN IDLE MODE IN A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of reselecting a cell by a mobile terminal in idle mode in a cellular telecommunication network in which the network sends to the terminal a list containing information with regard to the UMTS cells to be identified, and in which the mobile terminal periodically performs a series of procedures of identifying the cells and a series of intersystem measurements on the identified cells. Between two successive procedures of identification, the mobile terminal performs a series of procedures of measurement whose duration is fixed so that the total duration for performing a procedure of identification and the subsequent series of procedures of measurement is less than 25 seconds.12-04-2008
20110189994HANDOFFS BETWEEN DIFFERENT VOICE ENCODER SYSTEMS - Provided are methods and systems of managing handoffs in a wireless communication system having different types of vocoders. Some embodiments include translating state memory of a first vocoder to a second vocoder using a state memory transcoder. The state memory may be delayed to align differences in algorithmic delays between the first vocoder and the second vocoder. In one embodiment, a speech signal may be decoded from the first vocoder, delayed, and encoded to the second vocoder. Furthermore, for a period of time during and/or adjacent to the handoff, the first vocoder may output with decreasing amplitude while the second vocoder outputs with increasing amplitude. Such techniques may be used alone or in combination.08-04-2011
20120184276Method, Apparatus and System for Preventing the Initiation of a Handover for a Time Period After the End of a Service - Preventing initiation of a handover of a communication device back to a first radio access technology from a second radio access technology before the expiry of a predetermined length of time after the end of a service provided via the second radio access technology.07-19-2012
20090131054METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING DUAL STANDBY STATE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A system and method having a multimode wireless communication terminal with at least two SIM card slots for use with at least two phone numbers simultaneously online (dual standby). The system includes a main controller, a primary mode module, a secondary mode module, and an inter-system measurement module. The main controller operates the multimode wireless communication terminal in single standby or dual standby state. The primary mode module enables the primary mode of operation for the multimode wireless communication terminal. The primary mode of operation is a default mode of operation. The secondary mode module enables the secondary mode of operation for the multimode wireless communication terminal. Paging information for the primary mode of operation and the secondary mode of operation are monitored at their respective monitoring rates using a TDM method. Switching between the primary and secondary modes of operation is executed by an inter-system handover module. During the dual standby state, both the inter-system measurement and handover are initiated by the terminal itself. The multimode wireless communication terminal is used in a multimode wireless communication system.05-21-2009
20130045743HANDOVER - An improvements to Handover is provided. User equipment capable of participating in the handover of communications instances from a first radio access network to a second radio access network, the first radio access network being capable of supporting packet switched communications and the second radio access network being capable of supporting circuit switched communications is adapted to participate in a first voice-and-multimedia communications session in said first radio access network, as part of a communications instance, during handover of said communications instance from said first radio access network to said second radio access network, transfer a voice communications session, to continue said communications instance, and responsive to said handover, send a first message to a node of said second radio access network to provide a second voice-and-multimedia communications session in said second radio access network, to further continue said communications instance.02-21-2013
20090191874SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING RADIO LINK FAILURES - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) (07-30-2009
20090191875RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL PREAMBLE DETECTION - The present invention provides a method of and a network entity for processing a random access preamble. The network entity comprises a transceiver for receiving an random access preamble; and a processor for determining if the random access preamble is successfully detected, and for determining, in the case where the random access preamble is not successfully detected, if a combined preamble resulting from a combination of the random access preamble with a previous random access preamble received at the network entity prior to reception of the random access preamble and having an identical signature to the signature of the random access preamble, is successfully detected.07-30-2009
20110195716HANDOVER METHOD AND RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS - Disclosed is a handover method that comprises a step wherein a radio access network apparatus on a first mobile communication system acquires and stores service identification information which specifies the services offered to a mobile station, and a step wherein the radio access network apparatus on the first mobile communication system, in the procedure to perform a hard handover, determines, based on the service identification information, whether to forward downlink data received from a upper node to a radio access network apparatus on a second mobile communication system that is not equipped with a re-ordering function for incoming downlink data.08-11-2011
20110195715METHODS AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING PROXIMITY INDICATION AND DETECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system to configure proximity detection and reporting in a wireless device during a transition of the wireless device from one cell state to another cell state in a third generation (3G) wireless communication system. In a first cell state, the wireless device is configured for proximity indication. The wireless device is transitioned from using the first cell state to using a second cell state. Upon the transition from the first cell state, the wireless device receives information from a base transceiver to reconfigure the proximity indication configuration based on the second cell state. The reconfiguration allows the mobile device to retain the existing proximity indication configuration, remove the proximity indication configuration, or stop reporting proximity indication. Additionally, the base transceiver also adjusts proximity configuration stored at the base station based on the second cell state.08-11-2011
20130029666MEASUREMENT METHOD FOR GENERATING CELL COVERAGE MAP AND DEVICE FOR THE SAME - The present invention relates to a measurement control method for MDT and a terminal device for the same. An MDT measurement control method of the present invention comprises a step of receiving measured frequency information for cell reselection and measured frequencies for MDT (MDT frequencies); a step of measuring a quality of a serving cell; a step of performing a first quality measurement on a neighboring cell; a step of performing a second quality measurement on the neighboring cell; and a step of storing results of the first and second quality measurements, wherein the step of performing the first quality measurement includes performing an intra-frequency measurement for the MDT on the neighbor cell when the frequency of the serving cell is included in the MDT frequencies, and performing the intra-frequency measurement for the neighbor cell only in the event where the quality of the serving cell in a first threshold value or less when the frequency of the serving cell is not included in the MDT frequencies, and the step of performing a second quality measurement includes performing an intra-frequency measurement for the MDT on the neighbor cell when an inter-frequency in the measured frequency information for the cell reselection is the MDT measurement frequency, and performing an intra-frequency measurement on the neighbor cell only in a case where the quality of the serving cell is a second threshold value or less when the inter-frequency in the measured frequency information for the cell reselection is not the MDT measurement frequency. The present invention also relates to terminal device for the MDT measurement control method.01-31-2013
20090253433METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR TRANSFERRING A FLOW OF DATA BY A FIRST TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICE TO A SECOND TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present invention concerns a method for transferring a flow of data by a first telecommunication device to a second telecommunication device in a wireless cellular telecommunication network, the first and second telecommunication devices being linked through a radio channel, characterized in that the method comprises the steps executed by the first telecommunication device of: 10-08-2009
20100113026Efficient Reselections in the Presence of Closed Subscriber Group Cells - A method in a mobile station for avoiding interference to restricted access cells, including detecting presence of a restricted access cell, determining that a measured path-loss is larger than a path-loss threshold, determining that the mobile station is not allowed to access the restricted access cell, and barring a carrier frequency on which the restricted access cell is deployed when the measured path-loss is larger than the path-loss threshold and when the mobile station is not allowed access to the restricted access cell.05-06-2010
20100113025METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORCING INTER-RAT HANDOVER - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for forcing a mobile device to handover from a first cellular network radio access technology (RAT) to a second radio access technology (RAT) different from the first cellular network radio access technology. The method comprises: establishing a connection with the mobile device using the first cellular network radio access technology; sending a handover command to the device using the first cellular network radio access technology, the handover command including details of radio resources of the second cellular network radio access technology; and establishing a connection with the mobile device using the radio resources of the second cellular network radio access technology which were specified in the handover command. These steps are each performed by a separately introduced base station which is not under the control of a cellular network.05-06-2010
20130084866Prioritizing Radio Access Technologies - A prioritized measurement list is stored in a memory, and each entry in the prioritized measurement list defines a unique combination of frequency layer and radio access technology for a serving cell and for neighbor cells. Based on at least signal strength of the serving cell, there is selected, from a neighbor list according to the prioritized measurement list, a set of entries for measuring according to a selection rule. The selection rule provides: for the case in which the signal strength of the serving cell is relatively high, the selected set is a first set and represents higher priority ones of the prioritized measurement list; and for the case in which the signal strength of the serving cell is relatively low, the selected set is a second set and represents lower priority ones of the prioritized measurement list.04-04-2013
20100075677METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SELECTING A TARGET BS WITH THE BEST SERVICE SUPPORTED IN WIMAX HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus for notifying a mobile station (MS) of service flow parameters supported by neighbor base stations, such that the MS may select a suitable neighbor base station (BS) candidate (i.e., a target BS) for performing a handover are provided. The notification may occur via handover messages, such as a BS Handover Request (MOB_BSHO-REQ) message or a BS Handover Response (MOB_BSHO-RSP) message, with a Service Level Supported field added, indicating the service flow parameters supported by the neighbor BSs. In this manner, service quality levels of data exchanges may be maintained as an MS is handed over from one BS to another.03-25-2010
20100075681METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PHYSICAL CELL IDENTIFIER ALLOCATION - A method and apparatus of allocating a Physical Cell Identifier (PCI) is disclosed in an embodiment of the present invention allowing different cells to operate on different frequencies while eliminating or reducing risk of PCI conflicts. Thereby PCI allocation is provided that is effective also in a multi-frequency environment.03-25-2010
20100075678METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR STRESS TESTING MOBILE NETWORK EQUIPMENT USING A COMMON PUBLIC RADIO INTERFACE (CPRI) - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for stress testing mobile network equipment using CPRI are disclosed. According to one method, a plurality of messages is generated for simulating a plurality of user equipment (UE) devices. The plurality of messages is transmitted over a common public radio interface (CPRI) link to a radio equipment controller (REC) in order to stress test the REC component.03-25-2010
20100075676Method and System for Wireless Handoffs - A device includes a first wireless transceiver initiating a communication session; and a second wireless transceiver. The device shifts the communication session to the second wireless transceiver if a signal strength of the first wireless transceiver is below a predetermined level and the signal strength is not expected to increase above the predetermined level.03-25-2010
20100075679BEARER COUNT ALIGNMENT DURING INTER-RAT HANDOVER - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide a method for bearer count alignment during handover of a user equipment (UE) from a first radio access technology (RAT) to a second RAT. The UE establishes radio resource control (RRC) connections with the second RAT and transmits data radio bearer (DRB) capability of the UE to the second network. The second network utilizes this information to set up the DRBs with the UE.03-25-2010
20120244864MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND RADIO FREQUENCY CHANGE METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a first base station which defines a first cell and a second base station which defines a second cell. In this mobile communication system, when communication conditions of a first mobile station currently radio-linked to the first or second base station have degraded, then the first base station stores identification information of a second mobile station currently radio-linked to the first base station and causes the second mobile station to hand over to the second cell, and thereafter changes a first radio frequency currently used in the first cell to a second radio frequency and sends the second base station a message that carries identification information of the second mobile station and information indicating the second radio frequency. When the message is received, the second base station causes the second mobile station to hand over to the first cell.09-27-2012
20130084869Methods of UE Providing Speed Information to Network - A method of user equipment (UE) providing speed information to network is provided. The method supports obtaining speed information of the UE, detecting a trigger event and providing the speed information to the network by one or more predefined means. The speed information is taken from the group consisting of a physical speed, a physical speed mapped on a pre-defined speed group, and a virtual speed. The virtual speed comprises a cell change count or a number cells that the UE has requested RRC connection during a certain period. The UE can send the speed information to an eNB via RRC connection establishment, RRC connection re-establishment, a new IE in RRC measure report or a new RRC message.04-04-2013
20130084867METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM OF MEMBERSHIP VERIFICATION - Devices, systems and methods of membership verification during handover to a target cell are presented. The target cell triggers membership verification (MV) process during handover, accepting user equipment (UE) as a non-member and upgrading it to a full member, e.g., if the membership verification process is successful.04-04-2013
20130084870METHOD FOR HANDLING HANDOVER IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present solution relates to a method in a first network node (04-04-2013
20130084871RADIO BASE STATION AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A radio base station eNB#04-04-2013
20130084868SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-HIERARCHICAL CELL CONFIGURATION - Provided is a system and method for configuring a multi-hierarchical cell in which a large-scale mobile backhaul technology and a small cell technology are combined. A mobile backhaul may increase a transmission capacity of a wireless backhaul using a super high frequency (SHF)/extremely high frequency (EHF) band, rather than a cellular band having a limitation in extending frequency resources, and a small group cell to be formed at a final end of the mobile backhaul may be configured by fixed group cells or mobile group cells depending on a radio environment, using a moving relay, wireless fidelity (WiFi), femto-cells, and the like, whereby cells may be miniaturized effectively, and a relatively great capacity of a wireless system may be provided to a subscriber.04-04-2013
20130084863METHOD TO SELECT MS IN OVERLOAD CONTROL TRIGGERED BASE STATION INITIATED HANDOVER IN WIMAX SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus that may help alleviate load conditions by taking action to select one or more mobile stations (MSs) for handover to a neighbor base station are provided.04-04-2013
20130084865Methods And Apparatus For Interference Management - Systems and techniques for managing the use of almost blank subframes in wireless communication systems. Base stations in a wireless network monitor load information affecting network nodes. Load information may be in the form of load metric information. The load information may be exchanged between system elements, and an almost blank subframe proportioning may be updated by one or more of the base stations, and information relating to the updated proportioning. The updated almost blank subframe proportioning may be used in scheduling and load metric calculation, as well as almost blank subframe patterning. Updating of almost blank subframe information and load metric information may be performed iteratively.04-04-2013
20130084864Methods And Apparatus For Handover Management - Systems and techniques for handover management in wireless communication networks. An apparatus, such as a base station, receives information relating to load conditions and computes handover threshold information based on the information relating to the load conditions. The information relating to the load conditions may comprise information received from other base stations, and the base station may in turn share its own information. Information may be shared through direct communication between base stations, or may be managed by a controller. Handover thresholds may be set for user devices based on the load metric information.04-04-2013
20130084862Method Of Estimating Mobility Of User Equipment And A Wireless Device - One embodiment of the method of estimating mobility of a user equipment includes obtaining location information of at least one base station that participated in a handover of the user equipment, and estimating a mobility of the user equipment based on the obtained location information.04-04-2013
20130079011TRAFFIC LOAD MANAGEMENT METHOD, NETWORK AND DEVICE - A radiocommunication network includes a core network including primary and secondary nodes and a radio access network including radio controllers. Each primary node connects at least one secondary node, and each secondary node connects at least one radio controller via respective links. In relation to a given primary node, at least one entity in the radiocommunication network calculates respective target load reduction values for the links connecting the given primary node and secondary nodes, depending on an excess value between a current load of the given primary node and a primary node load threshold, and calculates respective target load reduction values for the links connecting said secondary nodes connected to the given primary node and radio controllers, depending on calculated target load reduction values. Actions are taken for changing traffic distribution by taking account of calculated target load reduction values.03-28-2013
20130079010MOBILITY-BASED RESELECTION SCAN SCHEDULING - An architecture is described that can determine a scanning schedule for reselection scanning in connection with a wireless communication network or service. The architecture can monitor various indicia relating to recent movement of user equipment (UE) such as a wireless device, and, based upon such recent movement indicia, construct a mobility pattern for the UE. In addition, based upon the mobility pattern, the architecture can generate a reselection scanning schedule for the UE designed to optimize tradeoffs between battery life and network awareness.03-28-2013
20130210438CELL-BASED INTER-FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT EVENTS FOR DETECTED OR MONITORED SET CELLS - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to permit a neighbor list to be updated, such as by removing a monitored cell or adding a detected cell. The method determines that a monitored cell that is on the neighbor list or a detected cell that is not on the neighbor list satisfies predetermined criteria defining an event. The method also causes information to be provided regarding the monitored cell or detected cell in response to the event, and then receives a message adding the detected cell to the neighbor list or removing the monitored cell from the neighbor list. Once a detected cell is added to the neighbor list, the method may use the detected cell to determine a frequency quality estimate, use the detected cell for inter-frequency measurements or consider the detected cell for inclusion in a virtual active set.08-15-2013
20130210434METHODS AND DEVICES FOR ADJUSTING RESOURCE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES IN HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Devices and methods for adjusting resource management procedures in heterogeneous communication networks are disclosed. In one aspect, a method for adjusting radio resource management procedures in a mobile device communicating with a node operating in a cell in a heterogeneous communication network includes transmitting a first message to the node, the first message including a request for cell information, receiving a second message transmitted from the node, the second message including the requested cell information, measuring signal reception information, processing the received cell information and measured signal reception information to determine an adjustment to a radio resource management procedure, and adjusting the radio resource management procedure based on the determined adjustment. The first and second messages may be radio resource control (RRC) messages, such as RRC connection request and response messages.08-15-2013
20130035100RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - An LTE base station (02-07-2013
20130079009Dynamic Frerquency Refarming - A Network entity of a communication network and a network node are disclosed. The network entity includes a control unit, wherein the control unit is configured for receiving network status information and providing a refarming control signal to a network node on the basis of the network status information. The refarming control signal is related to a reuse of a frequency resource of a first communication technology by a second communication technology. For evaluation of frequency refarming, a concept of a figure of merit is disclosed which allows for an easy employment of a frequency refarming policy.03-28-2013
20130079008BASE STATION - A base station, including a memory which stores data to be transmitted to a mobile device, which complies with multiple communication methods and performs a data communication with the base station, and a processor which switches, during transmission of the data stored in the memory with one communication method of the multiple communication methods, when a communication request with another communication method of the multiple communication methods is transmitted to the mobile device, a communication partner to another base station complying with the other communication method, and determines whether to transfer an unsent data to the other base station based on a size relationship between a data transmission time to transmit the unsent data stored in the memory to the other base station and a communication time predicted based on a past communication history regarding a communication destination which transmits the communication request.03-28-2013
20130079007NEIGHBOR CELL LIST BASED ON HANDOVER MESSAGE - A neighbor cell list for a cell is maintained based on a received handover message that identifies at least one physical layer identifier. For example, the handover message may include measurement report messages (MRMs) generated by the access terminal being handed over. As another example, the handover message may include a neighbor cell list that is associated with the access terminal. The measurement report messages and the neighbor cell list associated with the access terminal will identify physical layer identifiers of cells in the vicinity of the source cell and, in some cases, in the vicinity of the access terminal being handed over. Upon receipt of the handover message, the neighbor cell list for the target cell is updated based on the physical layer identifiers identified by the handover message.03-28-2013
20130040646SYSTEM, METHOD AND BASE STATION SUBSYSTEM FOR REALIZING HANDOVER IN LOCAL SWITCH - The present invention discloses a method for implementing a handover in a local switch, and the method includes: a core network transmitting indication information to a source base station subsystem during any terminal of communication parties which carries out a local switch is performing a base station subsystem handover, and the source base station subsystem determining whether to transmit user-plane speech data received from a media gateway to the terminal which has not performed the base station subsystem handover, or to transmit the user-plane speech data received from an internal link to the terminal which has not performed the base station subsystem handover, according to the indication information. The present invention also discloses a system for implementing a handover in a local switch as well as a base station subsystem.02-14-2013
20130040645MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting an “Extended Service Request” from a mobile station UE in Idle mode to a mobility management node MME via a radio base station eNodeB; transmitting an “Initial UE Context Setup Request” from the mobile station UE to the radio base station eNodeB, the “Initial UE Context Setup Request containing priority call information; and preferentially allocating resources to the E-RAB for the mobile station UE by the radio base station eNodeB based on the priority call information contained in the received “Initial UE Context Setup Request.”02-14-2013
20130040644MOVEMENT PREDICTING METHOD - A movement predicting method is disclosed. The method utilizes at least one phone communicating in and moving between neighboring cells of base stations to predict population movement in a prediction interval. Firstly, obtain the traffic volumes in the cells generated by the phone and the handover information generated by the phone moving between the cells in a day. Next, calculate the traffic volumes and the handover information to obtain a movement probability for the population moving between the cells and an average residence time that the population stays in the region of each cell in the different periods of the day. Finally, according to the data obtained, predict an appearance probability that the population appears in each region at the end point of the prediction interval.02-14-2013
20100151860PARALLEL TRANSMISSION OF HANDOVER MESSAGE - In a method and system handover commands to a mobile station supporting simultaneous reception on two different channels is transmitted both on the regular channel and on an additional channel. By supporting decoding of both handover commands in the mobile station the likelihood of a successful handover is greatly increased.06-17-2010
20120208539Method and Arrangement for Saving Radio Resources - The present invention relates to an arrangement, a communication network node and a method of saving radio resources during handover in a communication network system comprising a plurality of communication network nodes (08-16-2012
20100130206HANDOVER TECHNIQUE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ENABLED DEVICES - A method of triggering a network handover controlled by a communications device in a communications system comprising a plurality of networks with which the communications device can perform a handover operation to, the method comprising the steps of: determining a signal characteristic of each available candidate network in said communications system; forecasting a future value of said signal characteristic; determining a future handover margin for said signal characteristic of the network connection established by said communications device; determining if another available candidate network signal characteristic exceeds said handover margin at a future time, and if so, performing a handover operation to said other available candidate network, wherein said future handover margin for said signal characteristic is varied dynamically in dependence on said forecasted signal characteristic.05-27-2010
20100041404HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS BASED ON HISTORY INFORMATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A handover method in a plurality of wireless networks includes selecting one or more candidate networks from the plurality of wireless networks available to a mobile terminal of a user; calculating the latest connection time with a serving network currently serving the mobile terminal; deriving a history utility function based on the latest connection time; deriving system utility functions of the candidate networks in consideration of user and system environments; deriving selection functions for the candidate networks using the history utility function and the system utility functions; and selecting one of the candidate networks as a target network for handover using the selection functions. A target network for handover is selected using not only a system utility function reflecting user and system parameters but also a history utility function reflecting history information, thereby reducing the number of handovers and enhancing service quality.02-18-2010
20090156214Preamble design method for reducing overhead during handover in hierarchical cellular system - Provided is a handover method of a wireless communication system using a hierarchical cellular scheme. In the method, signal quality of a serving node is measured, so that whether to start scanning for a handover is determined. When the scanning for the handover starts, signal qualities of a serving cell including the serving node and one or more neighbor cells are measured through a first preamble including a first identifier for distinguishing a cell. An intra-cell handover or an inter-cell handover is selected using the signal qualities of the serving cell and the neighbor cells. Therefore, a terminal can easily distinguish between the inter-cell handover and the intra-cell handover, and an overhead during a handover can be reduced because an intra-cell handover procedure is simplified.06-18-2009
20090156213INTERWORKING GATEWAY FOR MOBILE NODES - Systems and methods are provided that allow inter-working between communication networks for the delivery of service to mobile nodes. A gateway is provided that communicates with a femto cell to extend service to an area that otherwise does not receive coverage from a service provider. The femto cell is a small scale base station used to provide coverage over a small area (such as a home or business), and connect to a home or enterprise network. The femto cell provides service for a mobile node and a gateway permits communication over a broadband network. The gateway integrates the mobile nodes connecting via a femto cell into the service provider's network. The gateway also allows provisioning of services and applications, control of service levels, and provides seamless handoffs to macro base stations and other types of access technologies such as Wi-Fi.06-18-2009
20090156212DATA TRANSFER METHOD AND BASE STATION - A data transfer method according to the present invention transfers user data of a mobile station from a handover source base station to a handover target base station through a transmission path, when the mobile station performs a handover. The data transfer method according to the present invention includes: determining, at the handover source base station, a priority order of the user data; determining, at the handover source base station, a transfer speed of the user data based on the priority order; and transferring, at the handover source base station, the user data to the handover target base station based on the determined transfer speed.06-18-2009
20090156211Methods and Apparatus for Making a Handoff Determination as a Function of Service Level Indicating Metrics - Method and apparatus for an access terminal which makes handoff decisions between a number of potential alternative attachment points based on service level indicating metrics are described. The access terminal computes a service level indicating metric differently for a current connection than for a potential alternative connection. A service level indicating metric is a function of loading information and received signal strength. A selection may be made by selecting between attachment points by selecting the attachment point having the highest service level indicating metric from among a plurality of attachment points, one per possible carrier where the attachment point which is considered for a given carrier is the one having the best connection for the given carrier. The access terminal handoff decision approach provides handoff decisions which are nearly as optimal as those which can be achieved using a centralized control node but without the requirement for centralized handoff decisions.06-18-2009
20090156210METHOD FOR FACILITATING A MOBILE STATION TO PERFORM A FAST HANDOFF - A method for facilitating a mobile station to perform a fast handoff in a wireless communication system allows a handoff procedure to be anticipated (by the mobile station, its serving base station, or both) based on historical information regarding prior successful handoff procedures. In operation, the mobile station receives a neighbor list from a serving base station and determines whether a member base station of the neighbor list is a successful target base station based on historical data. If the member base station is not a successful target base station, the mobile station scans the member base station, measures a signal quality associated with the member base station, and sends a measurement report for the member base station when the signal quality meets a standard signal quality threshold. If the member base station is a successful target base station, the mobile station sends the measurement report for the member base station when the measured signal quality meets a lower signal quality threshold.06-18-2009
20100105391CALL RE-ROUTING UPON CELL PHONE DOCKING - A method and apparatus are provided for call setup in a communication network that comprises at least one mobile station to facilitate the hand-off of a wireless headset from a mobile station that has been docked to a landline base unit that includes a radio front end operable to communicate with the wireless headset. Generally, the embodiments of the invention include establishing a first voice path through at least one switching element between a calling party and a called party in a communication network where at least one of the called and calling parties is communicating with the mobile station or, more generally, with a wireless telephone. Thereafter, a first wireless headset communication link is established between the wireless telephone and the wireless headset unit.04-29-2010
20100105390BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A disclosed base station apparatus is capable of communicating with a user equipment terminal using a downlink shared channel. The base station apparatus includes a selection unit selecting a user equipment terminal transmitting a shared channel from among user equipment terminals other than a user equipment terminal in which a time frame to transmit the shared channel or a time frame to receive acknowledgement information with respect to the shared channel overlaps with a time interval when cells are measured, the cells operating at a different frequency, a user equipment terminal in sleep mode of discontinuous reception mode, a user equipment terminal that has not received radio quality information, and a user equipment terminal having no data to be transmitted and a transmission unit transmitting the shared channel to the user equipment terminal selected by the selection unit.04-29-2010
20100105389METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROACTIVE IDLE MODE HANDOFF - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide a technique that allows a mobile station (MS) to proactively perform a handover during an idle mode. For example, during listening intervals of an idle mode, the MS may scan neighboring base stations (BSs) and proactively handover to a target BS. The MS may be able to synchronize frame numbers with the target BS before missing a page.04-29-2010
20100105388METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROACTIVELY REQUESTING NEIGHBOR BASE STATION INFORMATION - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure allow a mobile station (MS) to proactively request neighbor base station information from a serving base station, for example, if a mobile neighbor advertisement (MOB_NBR-ADV) message is not received (or expected) in a predetermined time period.04-29-2010
20130035099SATELLITE (GPS) ASSISTED CLOCK APPARATUS, CIRCUITS, SYSTEMS AND PROCESSES FOR CELLULAR TERMINALS ON ASYNCHRONOUS NETWORKS - An electronic circuit for use with time of arrival signals from a network, including a position determination unit, a first clock, a second clock, and processing circuitry coupled to said first clock, said second clock, and said position determination unit. The processing circuitry is operable to project a relatively-accurate subsequent global time based on said first and second clocks and to then return said relatively-accurate subsequent global time to said position determination unit to facilitate a subsequent position determination by said position determination unit.02-07-2013
20100330996Control Node for a Mobile Communication Network and a Method for Allocating Resources in Said Network - The present invention relates to a control node for a mobile communication network. The control node has means arranged to provide the IMSI of at least some of the currently set up connections and means arranged to allocate resources for the connections based on said IMSI information. The present invention also relates to a method for allocating resources for a connection in a mobile communication network.12-30-2010
20100330991GPS assisted network administration - Embodiments disclosed herein include methods, apparatus, and system architectures for using GPS within wireless networks to assist with wireless network management including handovers and data transfers, along with navigation decisions within heterogeneous networks.12-30-2010
20100041405METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER HOME NODE B HANDOVER IN A HOME NODE B GROUP - A method of handing over in a communication system that includes a first wireless communications system that has a core network and a second wireless communications system that includes several short range access points using licensed wireless frequencies and a network controller for communicatively coupling a user equipment to the core network. The method determines, by a first access point, to handover the UE to a second access point. The UE has at least one ongoing session with the core network through the first access point. The method sends a relocation required message to the network controller. The relocation required message includes a domain identifier for said message. The method receives a relocation request message from the network controller. The method receives a relocation command message from the network controller for causing the UE to handover from the first access point to the second access point.02-18-2010
20120165018Mechanism for 3rd Generation Partnership Project Multiple Inter-Network Quality of Service Continuity - A system to promote connectivity for inter-radio access technology (RAT) handover from a first radio access network (RAN) to a second radio access network (RAN) is provided. The system comprises a component configured such that for each access point name (APN) in communication with the first radio access network (RAN), the maximum bit rate (MBR) for each active non-guaranteed bit rate (non-GBR) bearer in the second radio access network (RAN) is determined based on each respective access point name's (APN's) used aggregate maximum bit rate (AMBR) and the number of active non-guaranteed bit rate(s) (non-GBR) bearers for the respective access point name (APN).06-28-2012
20120165016MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and a method to transmit a handover complete message in a handover process are provided. The handover method of the present invention includes determining, when a handover command message is received, a handover complete message transmission period, transmitting, when channel establishment information is received, a handover complete message during the handover complete message transmission period, and completing, when a handover complete message transmission period expires, handover to communicate with a base station to which the mobile terminal is handed over. The mobile terminal and handover method thereof are capable of transmitting the handover complete message repeatedly during a predetermined period, resulting in reduction of a probability of a handover failure.06-28-2012
20090124260Method of providing session establishment information in multiple wireless communication systems - The present invention provides methods involving at least one mobile unit configured to receive wireless connectivity using first and second wireless communication systems that operate according to first and second radio interface technologies, respectively. The first and second radio interface technologies are different. The method may include determining, in response to the mobile unit handing off from the first to the second wireless communication system, session establishment information for the second wireless communication system based on session establishment information associated with the first wireless communication system.05-14-2009
20090124259LAYER 2 TUNNELING OF DATA DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for sending data during handover with Layer 2 tunneling are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) sends first Layer 2 packets to a source base station prior to handover to a target base station. The UE sends at least one second Layer 2 packet to the target base station, which identifies the second Layer 2 packet(s) as being intended for the source base station and thus forwards the second Layer 2 packet(s) to the source base station via a Layer 2 tunnel. The UE sends third Layer 2 packets to the target base station after the handover. The target base station processes the third Layer 2 packets to obtain IP packets and sends the IP packets to a serving gateway after a trigger condition, which may be defined to achieve in-order delivery of IP packets from the source and target base stations to the serving gateway.05-14-2009
20090264129Radio Communication Method and Terminal Device - A radio communication method for performing radio communication between a base station and a terminal, including the steps of: comparing field strength of the base station which transmitted a reconnection instruction and filed strength of an adjacent base station which locates adjacent to the base station, when the terminal in a power saving standby mode receives the reconnection instruction from the base station, and controlling whether the terminal reconnects or not to the base station which transmitted the reconnection instruction, according to the result of the comparison.10-22-2009
20090017821HARD HANDOVER PROTOCOL TO ENSURE THE UCD/DCD AVAILABILITY IN ADVANCE - A technique to improve the synchronization timing of a mobile station (MS) when the MS performs a hard handover (HHO) is provided. An MS is ensured to possess the correct channel descriptor information of a target base station (BS) prior to disconnecting from a current serving BS using minimal control message overhead and thus synchronization latency. Specifically, a channel descriptor information checking procedure is added into the HHO preparation phase. The HHO preparation phase refers to the stage where a handover is initiated but the MS is still connected with the current serving BS.01-15-2009
20100056154SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RELOCATING A FOREIGN AGENT FOR AN IDLE MODE MOBILE STATION IN A PROXY MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL ENABLED ACCESS SERVICE NETWORK - Embodiments of a wireless access network and methods for relocating a foreign agent (FA) for an idle mode mobile station (MS) in a proxy mobile internet protocol (PMIP) enabled access service network (ASN) are described herein. In some embodiments, the relocation of the FA is triggered by either an anchor paging controller or a paging controller of a target ASN when the idle mode mobile stations moves across ASNs.03-04-2010
20130045741METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRIGGERING CELL RESELECTION BASED ON A RESOURCE SUSPENSION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in order to trigger a reselection of a serving cell in an instance in which a mobile terminal may be creating neighbor cell interference. Based upon received reselection data, the mobile terminal may release and/or suspend a network resource, such as an enhanced dedicated channel in order to trigger a reselection of a new serving cell. In this regard, a method is provided that includes determining the presence of a reselection condition based on reselection data. In an instance in which the presence of the reselection condition is determined, the method includes causing a network resource to be modified. The method also includes causing a reselection of a serving cell.02-21-2013
20130045740AUTOMATED TRIGGERS FOR APPLICATION OF CELL ASSOCIATION BIAS AND/OR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION TECHNIQUES - In a wireless telecommunications network, there is included: a macro cell (02-21-2013
20130045742RAN NODE AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method of a serving Radio Access Network (RAN) node for facilitating communication between a communication terminal and a core network in view of a handover of the communication terminal from said serving RAN node. The method comprises receiving a first message from the communication terminal, the message comprising a first message sequence number. The method also comprises producing a sequence number synchronization indicator (SNSI) arranged to indicate to a second RAN node to adjust a message sequence number of any future message from the communication terminal before forwarding said future message to the core network, such that the message sequence number of said future message is synchronized with a corresponding expected message sequence number of the core network. The method further comprises sending an update message to the second RAN node, wherein the update message comprises the SNSI.02-21-2013
20090318151APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL WITHOUT GPS - An apparatus and method for supporting a handover of a mobile terminal without a Global Positioning System (GPS) are provided. The method includes receiving a sub-cell IDentifier (ID) from a Base Station (BS) using Transmission Parameter Signaling (TPS), recognizing a location of the mobile terminal using the received sub-cell ID, and determining a candidate group of adjacent cells, to which the handover is possible, using the recognized location information of the mobile terminal. Accordingly, the mobile terminal may performs a handover within a short period of time, and a seamless service may be provided by avoiding a possibility that a service Further, in comparison with the conventional handover, power consumption may be reduced by decreasing a frequency search time of an adjacent cell during an off time.12-24-2009
20090042577MEASUREMENTS IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method of selecting a cell for handover of a mobile station to another communication system. A command is sent to a mobile station from a first network element. The command includes a request to perform compressed mode measurements at the mobile station of a neighboring cell. The neighboring cell uses a different communication means than the first network element. Compressed mode measurement results are received from the mobile station at the first network element. The received compressed mode measurement results are weighted with indicators of a prioritized neighbor cell list to form a prioritized list. A second command is sent to the mobile station from the first network element. The second command includes a second request to decode identification codes at the mobile station based on the prioritized list. An indicator of a suitable cell from the prioritized list is received from the mobile station at the first network element. An instruction is sent to the mobile station from the first network element after receiving the indicator. The instruction stops decoding identification codes at the mobile station.02-12-2009
20090042576METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING MOBILITY BETWEEN NON-3GPP TO 3GPP NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for handling mobility between a non-third generation partnership project (3GPP) radio access technology (RAT) and a 3GPP RAT includes utilizing services provided by the non-3GPP RAT. A need to utilize services provided by the 3GPP RAT is determined and a 3GPP non-access stratum (NAS) state is entered. 3GPP messages are tunneled to the 3GPP EPC network over the non-3GPP access RAT and a transition is made from the non-3GPP RAT to the 3GPP RAT. A 3GPP NAS state transition is made and a transition to a second 3GPP NAS state occurs.02-12-2009
20090042575METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING, IN A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK, WHICH DEVICE AMONG A FIRST AND SECOND DEVICES HAS TO MANAGE DATA ASSOCIATED TO A MOBILE TERMINAL - The present invention concerns a method for determining in a wireless cellular telecommunication network which device among a first device managing data associated to mobile terminals located in a first pool of cells and a second device managing data associated to mobile terminals located in a second pool of cells has to manage data associated to a mobile terminal. The first and second pools of cells have common cells and the mobile terminal is located in the first pool of cells. The first device managing data associated to the mobile terminal:02-12-2009
20130102314HANDOVER OF DIRECT PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for D2D handovers. The method may include sending to a target base station a handover request message including a proposed common identifier for a device-to-device pair and a proposed allocation of radio resources for the device-to-device pair; receiving, from the target base station in response to the handover request message, a handover request reply message including a confirmation of the proposed allocation and of the proposed common identifier; sending to a first device of the device-to-device pair a handover command including the proposed allocation and the proposed common identifier; receiving, from a second device of the device-to-device pair, a measurement report representative of the target base station; and determining whether to initiate a handover of the second device to the target base station, wherein when the handover is initiated, the first device of the device-to-device pair and the second device of the device-to-device pair are handed over to the target base station. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described.04-25-2013
20130053040BASE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station 02-28-2013
20130053039Method and Telecommunications Network for Deactivating or Activating a Cell in Such a Network - The invention relates to a method for deactivation of at least one first cell of a plurality of cells in a telecommunications network. User devices in the at least one first cell are triggered to report measurement information regarding one or more second cells of the plurality of cells to the telecommunications network. The measurement information is received in the telecommunications network (preferably using the still active at least one first cell) and analysed (in the telecommunications network or by an external system), in order to determine whether one or more user devices in the at least one first cell are eligible for being served by a second cell of the one or more second cells when the at least one first cell would be deactivated. When the one or more user devices are determined to be eligible for being served by the second cell of the one or more second cells, the one or more user devices are transferred, i.e. are handed over or perform cell reselection from the first cell to the second cell and the at least one first cell is deactivated.02-28-2013
20130090118APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UPDATING CONTROL INFORMATION OF A TARGET BASE STATION DURING HANDOVER OPERATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed herein is an operation method of a terminal for updating control information of a target base station in a handover procedure, and the method may include receiving a neighbor advertisement message comprising control information of at least one neighbor base station comprising the target base station from the serving base station; transmitting a handover request message comprising first change count information indicating a neighbor advertisement message version to the serving base station; receiving a handover command message comprising delta control information different from the control information included in the neighbor advertisement message from the serving base station; and updating the control information of the target base station using the received delta control information.04-11-2013
20090325577Method And System Of Radio Communication - The present invention relates to handover in a communications system, and more especially it relates cell change using Iu-interface dependent neighbor-cell lists, particularly in a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System, UMTS or WCDMA system.12-31-2009
20090247163RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE - Provided is a radio communication base station device capable of reducing a message size in a call connection. In the device, a report information creation unit (10-01-2009
20130183977METHOD FOR PROCESSING HANDOVER FAILURE, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The disclosure provides a method for processing handover failure, and user equipment (UE). The method comprises: UE failing in handing over from a first cell to a second cell; the UE failing in performing radio resource control (RRC) re-establishment in the first cell, the second cell or a third cell, and succeeding in performing RRC establishment in a fourth cell; a network element to which the user equipment in a connected state is connected sending a physical identifier of the second cell to a network element to which the first cell belongs. The disclosure can ensure that the network element to which the first cell belongs carries out accurate judgment of handover situations according to the physical identifier, which can ensure the optimization of handover parameters.07-18-2013
20130183978Method and Apparatus for Providing Measurement Reporting to Reduce Drive Testing Requirements - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided that may provide a scheme for measurement reporting for minimization of drive tests (MDT) data. In the context of a method, an indication of a handover of a user terminal from a first cell associated with a first public land mobile network (PLMN) to a second cell associated with a second PLMN may be received by the user terminal. Responsive to the handover, an indication of availability of MDT measurement logged data may be provided to the second PLMN. A determination may then be made at the user terminal as to whether to provide the MDT measurement logged data to the second PLMN based on an identity of the second PLMN.07-18-2013
20130183979METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING ADDITIONAL MEASUREMENT RESULTS - Disclosed are a method and system for reporting additional measurement results, which method comprises: a base station notifying a terminal of whether or not the terminal should report an additional measurement result; the terminal ranking a plurality of cells at a current frequency according a predetermined ranking mode in accordance with the notification of the base station and selecting the optimal cell at the current frequency according to the ranking result to report the additional measurement result. The present invention enables the base station to control whether the terminal reports the additional measurement results, which reduces the possibility of the terminal reporting the additional measurement results, thus reducing system overhead.07-18-2013
20090305703BASE STATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CALL SETTING UP, HANDING OVER AND RELEASING IN HYBRID NETWORK - A base station system and method for call setting up, handing over and releasing in hybrid network are disclosed. The base station system consists of BSC, TC, several BTSs and a band-width guaranteed IP network among them, IP mode transport and traditional TDM mode transport between BSC and TC are simultaneity supported in the system, and BTS supports TDM mode or IP mode. The invention is provided with such advantages: compatibility with TDM, which maximumly protects the providers' investment; smooth transition from TDM to IP, which decreases investing risk; flexible choice for different physical layer or data link layer transmission apparatuses to bear IP message, which facilitates the providers to constitute their networks. In IP mode, data service can share bandwidth with the mute frames of voice service, the system can coexist with different IP networks such as 3G or WiMax, and the control plane and the user plane is independent each other so as to simplify the developing procedure and reduce the maintaining cost.12-10-2009
20090093253Hand-Off Control Method in Radio Communication System - A hand-off control method (FIG. 04-09-2009
20090093252AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF HANDOFF PARAMETERS FOR FEMTOCELL - Automatic provisioning of an access point base station or femtocell. The method may include the femtocell transmitting first information (e.g., location information, signal measurement information, capability information, etc.) to a service provider (e.g., over an IP network). The femtocell may receive second information from the service provider, where the second information includes one or more operational parameters. The operational parameters may include hand-off parameters, admission policy parameters, PN or scrambling codes, power parameters, and/or other parameters. The femtocell may operate according to the received parameters to provide access for a plurality of access terminals in a local area.04-09-2009
20090093251Inter-Radio Access Technology Measurement System and Method - A macrotechnology-based system is provided. The system includes a processor configured to promote macrotechnology-based transmission to a multi-mode user equipment of a signal including a plurality of data portions and a plurality of gaps between one or more of the plurality of data portions, at least one of the gaps used by the multi-mode user equipment for measurement of a signal strength of a microtechnology-based network.04-09-2009
20130072191Determining a Handoff Metric - A method and apparatus of determining a hand-off metric are disclosed. One method includes a subscriber receiving identifications of a neighboring set of base stations from a serving base station, determining an active set of base stations by measuring received signal power from each of the base stations of the neighboring set at first discrete points in time, averaging the received signal power for each of these base stations, and selecting the active set based on the average received signal power. Determining the hand-off metric further includes calculating a ratio of average receive signal power to average excess received signal power, for each base station of the active set, wherein the excess received signal power includes signal power received by the subscriber in excess of power received from the base station.03-21-2013
20130072190Inter-System Hand-Over of a Mobile Terminal Operable with a First and a Second Radio Access Network - A method and device for initiation a mobile originating service-based inter-system handover At least two radio access networks (RANs) of different types, i.e. RAN of a first type and a RAN of a second type. A dual-mode mobile terminal communicates with the communication system via the RAN of the first type. The initiation of the inter-system handover is included in a transmission including a bearer capability (BC) field. The BC field indicates that a requested service is only operable with the RAN of the second type. In particular, at least one BC field is set to a parameter value, which serves as indication for the receiving network and its processing entities, respectively, which receiving network indicated to carry out the inter-system handover initiated by the mobile terminal.03-21-2013
20130072193Condition Reporting To Enable Possible Reduction In Radio Network Inefficiencies - A method includes sending a message from a first base station to another entity in a radio network. The message includes one or more indications one or more conditions have been met. The one or more conditions include one or both of: a duration the user equipment is connected to a first cell served by the first base station, prior to handover from the first cell to a second cell served by a second base station, is less than a threshold; or the signal strength of the second cell as measured by the user equipment and reported to the first base station is better than a signal strength of the first cell for a threshold duration of time. The entity may receive the message, e.g., and use the message to determine whether to effect changes to the radio network. Apparatus, program products, and software are also disclosed.03-21-2013
20130072189MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) BASED CONCURRENT SCAN OF NEIGHBOR CELLS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for concurrently performing handoff-related measurements for neighbor cells using multiple input multiple output (MIMO) antenna resources. In one example, a mobile device is in communication with a serving cell. Handoff-related measurements of first wireless signals from a first neighbor cell are performed. The first wireless signals are received at first MIMO antenna resources of a device. Handoff-related measurements of second wireless signals from a second neighbor cell are performed, as well. The second wireless signals are received at second MIMO antenna resources concurrently with the first wireless signals received at the first MIMO antenna resources. The first handoff-related measurements and the second handoff-related measurements may be performed during a scan interval. A type of handoff-related measurement to perform may be determined based on a determined length of the scan interval.03-21-2013
20130072192METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING MOBILE RELAY - A method for implementing mobile relay station is provided. The method includes performing spectrum sensing at least one spectrum sensing entity in a base station, a mobile relay station and a user terminal, sending, by the spectrum sensing entity, the result of spectrum sensing to a spectrum managing entity in the mobile communication system, allocating, by the spectrum managing entity available spectrum to a first link between the mobile relay station and the base station and allocating, by the spectrum managing entity, the available spectrums to a second link between the mobile relay station and the user terminal as working spectrum. The present invention also provides a mobile relay station system. The present invention can solve the problem of capacity bottleneck in the backhaul links and access links in high speed wireless environment.03-21-2013
20130072194MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A second communication system starts transmission of direct data received from a core network apparatus without waiting to receive an end marker when the end marker indicating the last forwarding data forwarded from the first communication system is not received within an end marker waiting period.03-21-2013
20130059588METHOD FOR SWITCHING SERVICE OF MANAGEMENT DEVICE SERVING NETWORK OR DEVICE - Disclosed is a method for smoothly switching between services to allow networks or devices to coexist. The method of switching between services of a television band device (TVBD) network or device includes: receiving a request for switching between services of the TVBD network or device from a coexistence manager (CM); and transmitting a response with respect to the request to the CM, wherein the services include an information service obtaining, by the TVBD network or device, neighbor information of the TVBD network or device from the CM and a management service providing measurement results to the CM by the TVBD network or device, and the response includes an indicator indicating whether or not the request has been successfully processed.03-07-2013
20130059587Storing of Neighbour Cell Information for Rapid Recovery in Case of Handover Failure - This disclosure teaches a method and apparatus for radio link failure recovery by a User Equipment (UE). The example UE includes one or more controllers that are configured to store cell access information for a target cell that is the target for an impending handover from a serving cell, and for a backup cell that is selected by the UE from among a set of neighbouring cells that includes the target cell. Advantageously, in case the handover to the target cell fails, the one or more controllers are configured to retrieve the cell access information stored for the backup cell and to use that information for re-establishing connection in the backup cell. The UE selects the backup cell, for example, as the neighbouring cell other than the target cell having the strongest signal conditions with respect to the UE.03-07-2013
20130059586NETWORK SEARCHING METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR MULTI-MODE USER EQUIPMENT - A network searching method for a multi-mode user equipment having a first radio access technology module and a second radio access technology module includes camping on a current cell by the user equipment via the first radio access technology module; obtaining information broadcast by a system of the second radio access technology module via the first radio access technology module when network environment corresponding to the first radio access technology module changes; and instructing the second radio access technology module to perform a network searching.03-07-2013
20130059585CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH MOVING BASE STATIONS AND METHODS AND APPARATUS USEFUL IN CONJUNCTION THEREWITH - A mobile communication network system comprising a core network including a core device and at least one static base station; base stations; and Mobile stations communicating via antennae with the base stations; The base stations including at least one moving base station which communicates via antennae with the mobile stations and has a physical e.g. Ethernet back-connection to a co-located radio manager having a physical connection with a co-located mobile station communicating via antennae with at least one selectable static base station, wherein each individual co-located radio manager comprises a radio resource manager; and functionality for receiving information from, and sending information to, other respectively co-located radio managers regarding qualities of their respective connections back to the core network, quality of its own connection back to the core network and channel quality which other base stations are able to provide and which its own base station is able to provide, to mobile stations in the vicinity of the individual co-located radio manager, and for using the information to determine whether to reject at least one mobile station seeking to be served by an individual base station associated with said individual co-located radio manager.03-07-2013
20090291686Autonomous connectivity between a mobile station and multiple network elements for minimizing service discontinuities during handovers in a wireless communication system - A novel and useful autonomous connectivity mechanism for use in user equipment (UE) connectivity in one or more cellular communications systems. The handover process is optimized by improving the selection of target base stations and optimizing the discontinuity period from the time of disconnection from a serving base station and connection to a target base station. The mechanism facilitates multiple cell connectivity in a network unaware manner while preserving single endpoint connectivity. The UE does not need to negotiate for or receive pre-allocated opportunities from the network for making neighboring base stations measurements. Measurement opportunities are created by the UE autonomously in accordance with UE activity patterns. Measurement opportunities are used to measure and maintain a candidate target base station list over the same or a plurality of access technologies. The parameter set tracked includes parameters that can be measured without any assistance from the target base station and which can effect the handover process, e.g., link quality, etc.11-26-2009
20090270103MULTI-CELL WTRUS CONFIGURED TO PERFORM MOBILITY PROCEDURES AND METHODS - Dual-cell or multi-cell Wireless Transmit Receive Units (WTRUS) configured to implement mobility procedures are described. The WTRU configurations implement methods to optimize and allow mobility for the procedures of cell search and cell reselection, measurement reporting and inter-frequency handovers, compressed mode measurements, and soft handovers.10-29-2009
20090270105WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM AND HANDOVER TIMING DETERMINING METHOD - A wireless communication terminal includes a first detecting section for detecting whether or not a reception signal level indicating a level of a received signal from a base station currently in connection as the first base station reduces to be equal to or lower than a first threshold level, a second detecting section for detecting whether or not a communication situation of a communication application program currently in communication is a situation suitable for handover, a third detecting section for detecting whether or not a predetermined handover forcedly performing condition is established, a determining section for determining whether or not the handover control is necessary, based on detection results of the first to third detecting section, and a communication control section for performing a handover control to switch from the first base station to a second base station when the switching to the handover control is necessary.10-29-2009
20090270102MOBILE TERMINAL AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR PROVIDING HANDOVER SERVICE - A mobile terminal and a network device for providing a handover service are provided. A mobile terminal includes a transmission unit to transmit a request message for handover information to a network device, and a receiving unit to receive a response message including the handover information from the network device, wherein the request message and the response message are transceived by an application layer protocol.10-29-2009
20090075658WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing a message in a mobile, telecommunications device. The method comprises: receiving a Cell Update Confirm (CUC) message; determining whether the device has an empty C_RNTI variable; when the device has an empty C_RNTI variable, determining whether the CUC message includes a new C_RNTI; when the CUC message includes a new C_RNTI and the CUC message would cause the device to enter a state which requires the UE to respond to the message before entering the state, carrying out at least one further step prior to entering the state.03-19-2009
20120225657RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NEIGHBOR CELL LIST OPTIMIZING SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND NEIGHBOR CELL LIST UPDATING METHOD - A neighbor cell list optimizing system according to the present invention is a neighbor cell list optimizing system that updates a neighbor cell list that is provided in a base station that manages a cell to which a mobile terminal establishes a connection and to which specific neighbor cells that are candidates of a handover destination cell for said mobile terminal of neighbor cells that are in the vicinity of said cell are registered, comprising: priority computation section that computes priorities of said neighbor cells to be registered to said neighbor cell list based on measurement information that represents radio communication qualities of neighbor cells in which the measured radio communication qualities exceed a threshold; and neighbor cell list updating section that registers neighbor cells in descending order of the priorities up to an upper limit of radio cells that can be registered to said neighbor cell list.09-06-2012
20120225656LOCAL CALL LOCAL SWITCHING AT HANDOVER - Described is a method for managing locally switched call connections in a wireless communication network comprising receiving, at a core network node, a first message indicating that a first user equipment connected via the locally switched call connection has been detected in a target radio access node and transmitting, triggered by the first message, a second message requesting a status change of the locally switched call connection to a second user equipment, such that a user plane data path from the first user equipment to the second user equipment is switched to a core network path. Moreover, the method is implemented in a network node, while the method steps can be executed by means of a computer program product comprising instruction sets performing each method step.09-06-2012
20120225655APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RELAY MODE OF BASE STATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for providing a relay service in a Base Station (BS) of a communication system are provided. The method includes detecting a communication state with a backhaul of the communication system, transmitting backhaul error occurrence information to at least one Mobile Station (MS) located in a service coverage area when communication with the backhaul is interrupted, selecting a neighbor BS from among one or more neighbor BSs as a target BS, and providing a relay service by connecting with the target BS.09-06-2012
20090286541METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT HANDOVER IN LTE - An efficient use of downlink (DL) air-interface bandwidth during handoff of user equipment from a source cell to a target is provided. In conjunction with a handoff message to ensure receipt, expedited status exchanges are provided so that initial communications do not require a subsequent retransmission of duplicate data. A method for transmitting a dedicated Random Access Channel (RACH) preamble and cell information, receiving a RACH from the user equipment to start communication, and transmitting a handover message and a radio link control (RLC) status message or an UL grant in response to receiving the RACH is provided. Also, a method for receiving a handover message and target cell information from a source cell to start handover negotiations, initiating communication with target cell using the target cell information, receiving a handover message and (RLC) status message, and using the received information to approximate status reporting is provided.11-19-2009
20130065595Method, Device, and System for Information Processing - Embodiments of the present invention disclose an information processing method. A first base station receives a handover request message from a second base station. The first base station determines whether the handover request message is an initial handover request message directly sent by a source base station in a handover process or a forwarded handover request message. If a judging result is that the handover request message is the forwarded handover request message, the first base station saves a user equipment, context in the handover request message so as to become a prepared base station of the UE.03-14-2013
20130065594CELL SELECTION AND RESELECTION FOR CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method for cell selection including a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell is described, the method including receiving priority information or reselection information, storing the information at a wireless transmit/receive unit, and applying the priority information for cell selection.03-14-2013
20130065596METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING HANDOVER AND RESELECTION - A method and an apparatus for controlling handover and reselection are provided. The apparatus comprises: a controller configured to obtain information related to the energy consumption of one or more services on one or more systems utilizing different radio access technology; and determine a need for a handover or a reselection for a mobile unit using one or more services on the basis of the information.03-14-2013
20130065593METHOD, TERMINAL, AND SYSTEM FOR CELL RESELECTION - A method, terminal and system for cell reselection are disclosed. When in a cell of a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, the terminal receives a message from the LTE system. The message includes a dedicated priority list for the cell reselection. When the terminal camps on a cell of a non-LTE system, the terminal performs inter-system cell reselection in accordance with the dedicated priority list before a valid time of the dedicated priority list expires. With the discloses method, terminal and system, the problems of establishing a dedicated priority list causes too much increased signaling and too high costs for network update in the prior art when perform inter-system cell (re)selection are effectively resolved.03-14-2013
20130065590Method and System for Determining Access During Inter-Technologies Handoff - A system and method for determining an initial mean open loop power level of a pilot channel of a reverse traffic channel for a mobile terminal. The initial open loop power level enables handoff of an active call from a first access network to a second access network. A handoff initialization request is from the first access network. A mean received power level of the forward link of the second access network is measured and transmitted to the second access network. An open loop power adjustment factor is received from the second access network. The initial mean open loop power level is set based on the open loop power adjustment factor.03-14-2013
20130065592HANDOFF METRIC FOR MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGIES - Provided are methods and systems of managing a handoff in a multimedia communication network. Embodiments include estimating the voice quality of a communication route in the network. The voice quality may be estimated by using a total voice quality metric involving subtracting various impairments to the voice signal. Impairments may result from the type of vocoder in a communication route, the error or loss associated with RF links and network links, and delays in the communication route. After subtracting the impairments to obtain the total voice quality metric for the communication route, the total voice quality metric may be compared with a threshold and/or other total voice quality metrics of other communication routes to determine whether and when a handoff should be made.03-14-2013
20130065589LOAD DISTRIBUTION IN CS FALLBACK - Described embodiments provide a method of a circuit switched (CS) fallback procedure at a first network providing only a packet switched (PS) service. A CS fallback procedure may be initiated upon a receipt of a call associated with a CS service. One of carriers assigned to a second network that provides a circuit switched (CS) service may be selected. Then, a second network cell mapped to a serving cell of the first network and using the selected carrier may be selected as a target cell. The user equipment may be handed over o to the selected second network cell in order to provide a requested CS service.03-14-2013
20130065591APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MAKING MEASUREMENTS IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM USER EQUIPMENT - A method and apparatus for selecting cells in a mobile telecommunications system, the system comprising a network of a plurality of cells of a Universal Mobile Telecommunications Systems (UMTS) and a network of a plurality of cells of a second Radio Access Technology (RAT), the method comprising, at a user equipment device: when in UMTS mode, flagging in a neighbouring cell list stored on the user equipment device information for a cell of a second RAT which is known to be unsuitable for selection. Information from the neighbouring cell list information for the flagged cell may be removed, in particular for a limited period of time.03-14-2013
20130065588TRANSMITTING DATA OVER MULTIPLE NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting data from a source device to a destination device in a communications system, including at the device, executing an application which generates data according to an application layer protocol and supplies the data to a first network interface for transmission in a communications session over a first channel; and the device receiving data at the first network interface for supply to the application. The application determines to effect a handover and opens a second channel for the communication session; the application supplies data to a second network interface for transmission over the second channel and generates a message for transmission over the first or second channel to the destination device, said message including a destination address identifying the second network interface for receiving data over the second channel.03-14-2013
20110021197APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING TRANSFER TO A SECONDARY CELL - A method and apparatus facilitating access to a communication session for a client is provided. The method may comprise obtaining, by a wireless communications device (WCD), reverse link transmit power to a primary cell, detecting if the transmit power to the primary cell exceeds a first threshold, locating one or more secondary cells when the detected transmit power exceeds the first threshold, obtaining reverse link transmit power to the one or more located secondary cells, and initiating a session transfer to a secondary cell when the secondary cell estimated transmit power is less than the transmit power to the primary cell.01-27-2011
20090239540Method For Reducing Interference Between Adjacent Sectors, And Base Station Apparatus - A cellular mobile communication system employs frequency multiplexing as a multiplexing system and adopts a sector configuration for cells. The cellular mobile communication system includes: a device for determining a scheduling turn of a local sector for a downlink scheduler of a base station apparatus; a device for acquiring assigned frequency information about adjacent sectors; a device for assigning a frequency to the local sector while considering the frequencies not used in the adjacent sectors; and a device for notifying about the result of the frequency assignment for the local sector. Thus, the interference between the sectors can be reduced and the frequencies can be effectively used.09-24-2009
20090036133Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving message for handover to heterogeneous system in broadband wireless access - Provided is an apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving a message for a handover to a heterogeneous system in a BWA system. In the method, a neighboring BS information message containing the neighboring heterogeneous system BS information is generated according to the neighboring BS information message generation scheme of the serving system. The serving system BS has only to transmit information about a neighboring BS of the serving system, thus reducing a message overhead. Also, the neighboring heterogeneous system BS has only to transmit its own BS information within the corresponding coverage, thus enabling efficient use of control channel resources.02-05-2009
20090233605APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING PILOT BEACON OF BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for generating a pilot beacon of a Base Station (BS) supporting a first communication system and a second communication system is provided. The apparatus includes a first system unit for converting a first signal for the first communication system into a first high-frequency signal, a second system unit for converting a second signal for the second communication system into a second high-frequency signal, and a beacon system unit for alternately generating beacon signals for the first and second communication systems by using the first and second signals.09-17-2009
20090233604METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING A NETWORK INITIATED HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Various embodiments are described to address some of the inefficiencies in present-day network initiated handovers. A serving node (09-17-2009
20090233603Method of preventing call drop and apparatus for performing the same - A method of preventing call drop in a mobile terminal when a serving radio network subsystem SRNS relocation to a target RNC from a source RNC is performed includes (a) receiving a control message in accordance with start of the SRNS relocation from the target RNC, (b) performing a RLC configuration procedure, (c) transmitting a complete message in accordance with the RLC configuration procedure to the target RNC, and (d) retransmitting the complete message to the target RNC in case that RLC reset is performed after the complete message is transmitted. As a result, call drop by exceptional case while the SRNS relocation is performed may be prevented.09-17-2009
20090233602PERSONALISABLE HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK HANDOVER SCHEME - A communications system comprises a plurality of local area networks (LAN) within a wide area network (WAN), in which local area networks are associated with a subscriber. A LAN has a different mode of communication from the mode of communication within the WAN. A subscriber has a user identity which is directly or indirectly associated with both a LAN (their home network) and with the WAN, for example, a GSM cellular communications network. When a mobile communications device requests handover or completes handover to the wireless home LAN of a subscriber or from the subscriber's wireless LAN to the WAN, the handover event triggers an action to be performed. The action may be the generation of an alert and/or the activation of one or more devices/systems in accordance with a configuration scheme set up by the subscriber. The communications device may be the subscriber's mobile communication device or the communications device of another user which is capable of operating in both a wireless LAN mode and in a WAN mode.09-17-2009
20120115481METHOD FOR PROVIDING AND RECEIVING RELIABLE SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for providing reliable wireless service in a femto system is provided. The method includes broadcasting information about out-of-service, which notifies that an air interface based on the femto BS is disabled, to user equipment (UE); and disabling the air interface. The information about the out-of-service comprising an identifier about a recommended BS that is another BS which the UE can enter.05-10-2012
20120115480MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio base station includes a mobile communication system, a relay node and a radio base station connected via a radio bearer. A mobile station is configured to perform a handover process between a state in which a radio bearer is set with the relay node so as to communicate via the relay node and the radio base station, and a state in which a radio bearer is set with the radio base station so as to communicate via the radio base station. The handover process is configured such that a data signal is transferred via the radio bearer between the relay node and the radio base station.05-10-2012
20120115479Method and Network Node - Method in a network node (05-10-2012
20100035615INTRA-FREQUENCY CELL RESELECTION RESTRICTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate utilizing reselection indicators in reselecting access points in wireless communications. In particular, an indicator can be provided relating to a restricted association access point that specifies whether intra-frequency reselection is allowed. If so, a mobile device receiving the indicator can reselect to other access points, to which it has access, operating in a similar frequency. If not, the mobile device can evaluate access points in other frequencies so as not to cause substantial interference to the restricted association access point. In addition, a predicted level of interference caused by communicating with an intra-frequency access point can be computed and evaluated to override the reselection indicator, in some cases. Thus, a restricted association access point can control reselection for some devices to mitigate interference while allowing the devices to override prohibitive restricted access points.02-11-2010
20090011765MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ITS SCRAMBLE CODE ASSIGNING METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND BASE STATION - An object of the present invention is to reduce the amount of calculation performed in a mobile station and amount of information exchanged between a base station and mobile station in a mobile communication system where the base station autonomously assigns a scramble code. In the mobile communication system, the base station starts communication by using a predetermined initialization scramble code used only at its activation time. The mobile station positioned in a cell determines whether the scramble code identified upon cell search time is the initialization scramble code. Only when the scramble code is the initialization scramble code, the mobile station determines a candidate scramble code, determines whether the candidate scramble code is usable in communication, and notifies the base station of the control information including the determination result. Based on the control information, the base station determines a service scramble code to be used, from the candidate scramble codes, and applies the service scramble code to start communication.01-08-2009
20090011764Mobile communications system and mobile radio terminal - Mobile station notifies base station of identification information of base stations searched by searching as a search list, and the base station notifies the mobile station of base stations which are not regarded as prestored neighbor base stations and base stations which are in an unusable base station list, of the base stations in the notified search list, as an NG list. If necessity of handover is increased, the mobile station receiving the notification executes handover to base stations (for example, base station) in the search list other than the base stations included in the NG list.01-08-2009
20100087197USER APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD USED IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user apparatus in a mobile communication system includes: a unit configured to receive a downlink control signal using a frequency of a residing cell; and a unit configured to perform cell search using a frequency different from the frequency of the residing cell during an interval between reception timings of the downlink control signal in response to an occurrence of a predetermined event for different frequency measurement in the user apparatus or a base station apparatus. When the reception timing interval of the downlink control signal is not longer than the threshold reported from the base station apparatus, and when the predetermined event for different frequency measurement occurs in the user apparatus or the base station apparatus, different frequency measurement is performed in a cycle, different from the reception timing interval, reported from the base station apparatus.04-08-2010
20090047959DATA TYPE ENCODING FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A method of employing an encoding scheme for media independent handover, comprising: having at least some data type carry only required information to determine the end of data without a length value02-19-2009
20080318574METHODS FOR HANDING OVER CALLS BETWEEN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS USING DISSIMILAR AIR INTERFACES - A call in progress in a first communication network is handed over to a second communication network which uses a different air interface. To facilitate the handover, the present serving base station commands the mobile communication device to take measurements of surrounding cells of the second communication network. The measurements are sent along with a handover request from the serving base station to a radio network controller of the second network, which decides upon a cell to which the cal will be handed. A grant message including an identifier to be used by the mobile communication device and an identifier of the base station receiving the handover is transmitted back to the first network, and used by the mobile communication device in handing over the call.12-25-2008
20080318572System and Method for Network Handover - The invention provides for a telecommunications system and related method of handover from a first radio access technology to a second radio access technology for a mobile radio communications device within a mobile radio communications network, and including determining a timing advance value associated with the second radio access technology, and the method employing positional data of the device within the network for determining the said timing advanced value.12-25-2008
20130165120METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS RELATING TO MOBILITY CONTROL INFORMATION - Mobility history relating to a plurality of cells visited by the user equipment (06-27-2013
20120238273METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REASSIGNING FREQUENCY RESOURCE IN A FEMTO BASE STATION DURING HANDOVER - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for arbitrating radio resources between femto base stations in which, when handover of a terminal takes place between femto base stations, the handover is carried out by reallocating radio resources of a serving femto base station assigned to the terminal to a target femto base station, to rearbitrate the radio resources and reduce the time required for rearbitration, thereby enhancing communication effectiveness.09-20-2012
20120238272MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH ADAPTIVE HANDOFF MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A method of operation of a mobile telecommunication system includes: measuring a measured target power and a measured server power; predicting a future target power and a future server power for a prediction tap number from when the measured target power and the measured server power are measured; computing an estimation error and a prediction error associated with the future target power and the future server power; determining a handoff hysteresis level based on the estimation error and the prediction error; and sending a handoff trigger for transferring a mobile station from a server station to a target station when the future target power minus both the future server power and the handoff hysteresis level is greater than zero.09-20-2012
20120238271METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING HANDOVER FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for enabling handover of a mobile device in a network supporting a single unacknowledged control block on a control channel, where if channel conditions exceed a threshold, the method sends, from a mobile device, a request or message utilizing a control channel; and if channel conditions do not exceed the threshold, the method delays the sending of the request or message to permit a handover message to use the control channel.09-20-2012
20090247166MEASURING NEIGHBORING CELL LOADING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate detecting cell interference and/or loading by analyzing control data transmitted between devices communicating in the cell. Control data resources can be transmitted related to communication received over data channels, and the control data resources can comprise quality indicators related to the data as well as resource identifiers that specify a resource over the data channel related to the data. Multiple control data resources can be transmitted per communication specifying a beginning and ending resource identifier of related data channel resources. If this control data is decodable at a wireless device, the associated resources corresponding to the resource identifiers can be marked as interfered and/or avoided in subsequent communication or resource allocation requests by the wireless device.10-01-2009
20130165121REDUCING DATA OPTIMIZED SESSION NEGOTIATION TIME AND FACILITATING ACTIVE HANDOFF - A communication entity, such as a wireless communication device, is handed off from a one network to a data optimized network. To facilitate the handoff and interruptions that may occur during the handoff, the communication entity stores data optimized session state information. The communication entity notifies the data optimized network that it is ready to be handed off to the data optimized network after the communication entity determines it is ready to be handed off.06-27-2013
20130165122COMMUNICATION SETTING METHOD, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - In a mobile communication system in an embodiment, when a handover of a mobile station which is a target of coordinated communications among multiple wireless base stations is detected, at least a part of setting procedure for the coordinated communications (CoMP setting procedure) is executed before completion of the handover. Hence, the coordinated transmission for the mobile station can be resumed earlier after the handover, and any reduction in the communication quality or throughput caused by the resume of the coordinated communication after the handover of the mobile station can be prevented.06-27-2013
20130165123MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step of notifying, by a radio base station DeNB, a radio base station eNB of identification information (PCI or ECGI) of cells #06-27-2013
20090098873SYSTEM AND METHOD TO LOCATE FEMTO CELLS WITH PASSIVE ASSISTANCE FROM A MACRO CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORK - A system, method and computer product for a mobile station to locate a femto cell, the method comprising: (a) storing in a database information to locate at least one femto cell; (b) receiving, from at least one macro cell, location information of the UE; (c) searching within the database to determine if the UE is in a general proximity of at least one femto cell; (d) if so, accessing the femto cell using the database information corresponding to the femto cell.04-16-2009
20090197602Indication of Content of Message Element - By providing an indicator outside a message element the content of the message element is indicated. This is particularly applicable to indication of a dual transfer mode handover command.08-06-2009
20100075675ROBUST AND FAST INTER-EBS HANDOFF MECHANISM - A communications system provides a robust and fast inter-base station handoff mechanism, e.g. for networks using Enhanced Base Stations (EBS) equipment. A method for connecting a mobile device to a destination base station in the wireless communications system, may include steps of receiving a mobile device measurement report, transferring context information from a serving base station to possible target base stations, and receiving admission control information from possible target base stations. A priority list of the possible target base stations is calculated and sent to the mobile device. The mobile device connects to one or more of possible target base stations according to the priority list. The method may also entail receiving a release message from one of the possible target base stations to which the mobile device has successfully established a wireless connection, to allow release of resources of the prior serving base station.03-25-2010
20120108242WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing a message in a mobile, telecommunications device. The method comprises: receiving a Cell Update Confirm (CUC) message; determining whether the device has an empty C_RNTI variable; when the device has an empty C_RNTI variable, determining whether the CUC message includes a new C_RNTI; when the CUC message includes a new C_RNTI and the CUC message would cause the device to enter a state which requires the UE to respond to the message before entering the state, carrying out at least one further step prior to entering the state.05-03-2012
20120108241Method of Handling Minimization of Drive Tests in Radio Access Technology Change - A method of handling minimization of drive tests, hereafter called MDT, for a mobile device is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a MDT measurement configuration from a first RAT, starting a timer for a MDT measurement logging corresponding to a timer value in the MDT measurement configuration, and keeping the timer running when the mobile device performs an inter-RAT procedure to move from the first RAT to a second RAT.05-03-2012
20120108240METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER - A method, an apparatus and a system for releasing bearers at time of handover are disclosed by the present invention. The method includes: obtaining information about bearers of a local breakout service of a User Equipment (UE) if it is decided to initiate handover of the UE; and triggering the UE to hand over from a source Home NodeB (HNB) to a target base station according to the information about bearers of the local breakout service, where the target base station does not set up any bearer of the local breakout service. According to the present invention, the target base station does not set up any local breakout service bearer of the UE or forward the data of the local breakout service, which saves resources and prevents errors of routing local breakout service packets.05-03-2012
20110294508APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method in a heterogeneous wireless communication system reconnect a Mobile Station (MS) to a previously connected cell upon occurrence of a Radio Link Failure (RLF) in a current cell when a portion of a coverage of the second cell is included in a coverage of the first cell. A Mobile Station (MS) stores system information of a first Base Station (BS) of a first cell when performing handover from the first cell to a second cell. When changed system information of the first BS is received from a second BS of the second cell, the MS updates the stored system information using the changed system information. When detecting that a connection with the second cell is lost prior to a handover from the second cell, the MS performs reconnection to the first BS using the stored system information.12-01-2011
20090275333RADIO ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE AND PERIPHERAL CELL INFORMATION REPORT METHOD - A radio access network device used in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The radio access network device includes a first cell identifier selection unit configured to select an identifier used as a first cell identifier; a second cell identifier selection unit configured to select identifiers used as second cell identifiers; and a neighboring cell information generating unit configured to generate neighboring cell information including the first cell identifier and the second cell identifiers.11-05-2009
20110105125METHOD FOR CLEARING INVALID USER EQUIPMENT INFORMATION IN HOME NODE B-GATEWAY - The present invention provides a method for clearing information in a HNB-GW, with a UE being located in a cell under the control of the home Node B, the method comprises steps of: monitoring by the home Node B whether the UE has moved away from the home Node B, the UE being in an idle state, CELL_DCH state, URA_PCH state, CELL_FACH state or CELL_PCH state; sending by the home Node B a message to the HNB-GW, if the UE has moved away; and clearing by the HNB-GW information on the UE in the HNB-GW. With the present invention, the HNB-GW can keep track of the resident state of UE and thus update UE information in real time.05-05-2011
20110281583SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF TRANSMITTING MEASUREMENT REPORTS - Systems and methods for transmission of measurement reports are provided. In some cases, once a mobile station transmits a measurement report for a cell, such as an uncontrolled cell, then the mobile station transmits some further minimum number of measurement reports. In some cases, a mobile station can only transmit measurement reports for a cell up to some maximum or for some specified time. The mobile station transmits measurement reports using two formats. In the first, the cell is identified using routing parameters; in the second, the cell is not identified using routing parameters. The network is able to associate messages sent using the two formats.11-17-2011
20110281586METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT, AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method for mobility management, an apparatus and a User Equipment (UE) are disclosed. The method includes: obtaining cell set information sent by a cell set in an access network; selecting a target cell set to which a UE may hand over according to the cell set information, and sending information about selection of the target cell set to the target cell set; and receiving information about at least one target cell decided by the target cell set, and providing the information about the target cell to the UE for handover. The method for mobility management between cell sets simplifies mobility management in multi-cell communication and improves performance of the communication system.11-17-2011
20110281585METHOD FOR PERFORMING A HANDOFF BY A COMP SET - Disclosed is a method for performing a handoff in a CoMP cluster. A user equipment measures a signal to interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) value of each of the CoMP sets constituted by the combination of a plurality of base stations in one CoMP cluster. Then, the user equipment transmits the SINR value of each of the CoMP sets to a serving base station through a pilot strength measurement message (PSMM). Subsequently, the user equipment receives, from the serving base station, a message which instructs a handoff determined through the transmitted signal to interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) values.11-17-2011
20110281584Method and Arrangement in a Communication Network - Method and arrangement in a network control node, for performing access control of a mobile node in a handover from a source cell to a target subscriber group cell. The method comprises obtaining a network based allowed subscriber group list, receiving a target subscriber group identification, checking if the target subscriber group identification is comprised in the obtained network based allowed subscriber group list. If it is, information from a target network control node is obtained, verifying that the received subscriber group identification corresponds to the target subscriber group cell. Still further, the method comprises granting the mobile node access to the target subscriber group cell. Also, a method and arrangement in a target network control node, for assisting a network control node in performing access control for a mobile node in a handover from a source cell to a target subscriber group cell is provided.11-17-2011
20090318153METHOD TO INCREASE THE PROBABILITY OF HANDOVER MESSAGE BEING RECEIVED BY RECEIVER - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes triggering a handover process across a wireless network and generating handover messages on more than a single communications process to facilitate receipt of the handover messages. The method can include increasing the power associated with a communications channel in order to facilitate receipt of the handover messages and can also include generating multiple messages that also are increased in power by the communications channel.12-24-2009
20100075680METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING SUCCESSIVE PRE-REGISTRATION ATTEMPTS BY ACCESS TERMINALS - An access terminal pre-registers with a second access network via a first access network to ensure a quick handover in the future. Frequent pre-registration attempts are avoided by implementing a hysteresis timer that restricts when a pre-registration process can be initiated. The hysteresis timer is started when pre-registration is initiated by the access terminal. No new pre-registration attempts are permitted if the hysteresis timer has not expired. An abort condition can cause the hysteresis timer to be aborted early, and a new pre-registration can be initiated. Access points in the first access network may be grouped into one or more pre-registration zones. If the access terminal moves from a first access point to a second access point, a new pre-registration is skipped if the first and second access points have the same pre-registration zone or the second access point is aware of the pre-registration zone for the first access point.03-25-2010
20100009682CELL/CARRIER REDIRECTING AND REVERTING CONTROL AT THE TIME OF RRC CONNECTION - A cell redirection process in accordance with load balancing and user terminal conditions, and a prompt cell reverting at the time of redirection failure are provided. A cell redirection control method under a situation where a base station controls two or more cells, the method comprising steps of: transmitting a response acknowledgement for a connection set-up to a redirected cell in accordance with a redirection instruction that instructs a redirection to another cell controlled by a base station and is transmitted from the base station at the time of an RRC connection in a user terminal; determining in the user terminal whether a connection to the redirected cell is successful within a range of a maximum number of retransmissions; and performing a reverting process for reverting back to an originating cell when the connection to the redirected cell fails, in the user terminal.01-14-2010
20110098046METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CELL SELECTION/RESELECTION OF A MOBILE TERIMINAL FROM A LEGACY NETWORK TO AN ADVANCED NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are provided for performing a cell selection by a multi-mode terminal from a legacy network (2G, 3G) to a advanced network (4G). The terminal performs the cell selection upon the existence of a Base Station (BS) on the advanced network system. The terminal does not attempt to perform the cell selection when the LTE BS does not exist.04-28-2011
20110136488SESSION HANDOVER IN MOBILE-NETWORK CONTENT-DELIVERY DEVICES - An application mobility-management entity (“AME”) in a radio-access network detects movement of a mobile device and routes application data for already-active application streams associated with the mobile device to the device's new location by establishing a connection to a second AME in the radio-access network. The second AME merges forwarded application data from/to the first AME for previously active application streams with the new application streams (e.g., new TCP connections) locally and forwards to/from the mobile device through the radio access network elements.06-09-2011
20100087196METHOD OF DEREGISTERING RELAY STATION AND MULTI-HOP RELAY SYSTEM FOR THE METHOD - A method of deregistering a relay station and a multi-hop relay system for the method are provided. In order to deregister the relay station, a base station ends a handover of mobile stations connected to the relay station, and informs the relay station accordingly. When the handover of the mobile stations is ended, the relay station performs a deregistration procedure. Messages that already exist are used as messages necessary for the method.04-08-2010
20110300868HANDOVER DESTINATION SPECIFICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION - A technology is disclosed that provides a handover destination specification system and the like capable of reducing signaling load and shortening handover processing time. According to the technology, the handover destination specification system is configured by: a mobile terminal that measures a reception quality of each cell indicating an accessible range formed by a plurality of base stations capable of being connection targets of the mobile terminal, and when the measured reception quality satisfies a predetermined condition, transmits to a connection base station, a first message including identification information of the cell that satisfies the predetermined condition and information on the reception quality of the cell; and the connection base station that transmits to the mobile terminal, a second message including information for detecting unique global identification information of the cell of which the reception quality has been measured, based on the first message. The mobile terminal detects the global identification information of the cell of which the reception quality has been measured based on the second message, checks access permission for the detected cell, and when access permission is confirmed, transmits to the connection base station, a third message including the global identification information of the cell for which access permission is granted.12-08-2011
20110300869RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A radio access network apparatus includes; a receiver unit 12-08-2011
20110300867TERMINAL DEVICE, HOME BASE STATION, AND HOME BASE STATION SWITCHING DEVICE - A wireless communication system comprises an MME (12-08-2011
20110300866SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REPORTING OF NEIGHBOUR CELLS IN HANDOVER FROM GAN - Methods are described for use in a mobile device such that when the mobile device is connected to a generic access network (GAN) cell, the mobile device receives information including characteristics pertaining to one or more neighbour cells in a network that are not GAN cells. The mobile device can then determine at least a list of candidate neighbour cells for handover from the GAN cell to a cell that is not a GAN cell as a function of the information. In some embodiments of the invention the network that is not a GAN is a UTRAN network and a candidate list of 3G cells are generated.12-08-2011
20080200171WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TRANSMITTING NEIGHBORING CELL INFORMATION - A wireless communication system in which neighbouring cell information is transmitted by the network to a mobile station is disclosed, wherein the neighbouring cell information includes sets of parameters, each set of parameters being applicable to several neighbouring cells. The neighbouring cell information may also include applicability information which specifies the rules the mobile station is to apply to determine which parameter set is applicable for a particular neighbouring cell.08-21-2008
20090088161METHOD FOR ALLOCATING A TEMPORARY RESOURCE REQUEST IDENTIFIER FOR ACCESSING A TARGET BASE STATION - The present invention provides for a method for allocating by a plurality of source base stations of a cellular wireless communication support infrastructure a temporary resource request identifier to a wireless communication device for accessing a target base station. The method includes identifying a list of temporary resource request identifiers associated with the target base station for use by one or more wireless communication devices, wherein the list includes a subset of one or more part time temporary resource request identifiers whose respective assignment to a corresponding grouping of one or more source base stations at a particular time is rotated between more than one of the plurality of corresponding groupings of one or more source base stations. The present invention further provides for allocating a temporary resource request identifier to a wireless communication device for accessing a target base station, where a corresponding one of the temporary resource request identifiers is allocated to a particular wireless communication devices, where the temporary resource request identifier includes a limitation of usage corresponding to particular communication time intervals during which the temporary resource request identifier can be used with the target base station.04-02-2009
20100003983HANDOVER MESSAGING IN AN UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Methods and messages for performing handovers between an unlicensed mobile access network (UMAN) comprising a first radio access network and a second radio access network. URR (UMA radio resource) handover messages are exchanged between a mobile station (MS) and a UMA network controller (UNC) operating in the UMAN. The MS may access the UMAN via a wireless access point (AP) that is communicatively coupled to the UNC via an IP network. The URR handover messages are sent between the MS and the UNC using an Up interface comprising a set of layered protocols over an underlying IP transport. The handover methods include both handover from a UMAN to the second radio access network, and handover from the second radio access network to the UMAN.01-07-2010
20090170517METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION RATE IN A HANDOVER REGION - The present invention is attained by a network nodes such as radio base stations and radio network controllers and methods m a cellular radio telecommunications network for providing a radio air interface to at least a first mobile terminal m at least a first radio coverage area, hereinafter referred to as cell, comprising a receiver for receiving uplink packet data from the at least one mobile terminal. The radio base station further comprises a rate limiter provided to limit the uplink packet data transmission rate from the at least first mobile terminal during handover between the at least first cell and another cell.07-02-2009
20110287767Method and system for implementing measurement - The present invention discloses a method and system for implementing measurement. The method comprises: a report status of a measurement task is detected, a User Equipment (UE) no longer measures the current measurement task if the report status is that the current measurement task has been finished or will not continue being reported, or the User Equipment (UE) continues measuring the current measurement task if the report status is that the current measurement task is not finished or will continue being reported. By adopting the present invention, the UE is free from unnecessary measurements when the reporting of the measurement task is not needed, which relieves the measurement burden of the UE.11-24-2011
20100173632COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, THRESHOLD MANAGEMENT SERVER, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio terminal (07-08-2010
20120088507METHOD FOR HANDOVER PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION - Method for handover problem identification in a mobile telecommunications system, the system including at least a first radio basestation, a second radio basestation and a mobile terminal able to communicate with said basestations, said mobile terminal is adapted to do a handover from the first basestation to the second basestation, the method including the steps of: 04-12-2012
20130023270MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION FOR SPECIFIC CELL, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system 100 includes a radio base station 20 for a specific cell configured to manage a specific cell to which any one of a plurality of frequencies allocated to a public cell is allocated. The radio base station 20 for a specific cell notifies guidance notification leading cell reselection from the public cell to the specific cell by using the remaining frequencies other than the frequency allocated to the specific cell.01-24-2013
20130023271MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station includes a measurement unit that measures radio qualities for a serving cell and a candidate switching target cell; a cell switching determination unit that determines whether the radio quality of the serving cell is less than a reference quality corresponded in advance with a predetermined throughput, wherein, when the radio quality of the serving cell is less than the reference quality, the cell switching determination unit determines whether the serving cell is to be switched to the candidate switching target cell by comparing the radio quality of the serving cell with that of the candidate switching target cell; and a radio communication unit that transmits a signal for requesting the switching of the serving cell, and that receives a signal for instructing the switching of the serving cell from a network apparatus.01-24-2013
20130023269METHODS AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for performing handover in a third generation (3G) long term evolution (LTE) system are disclosed. A source evolved Node-B (eNode-B) makes a handover decision based on measurements and sends a handover request to a target eNode-B. The target eNode-B sends a handover response to the source eNode-B indicating that a handover should commence. The source eNode-B then sends a handover command to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The handover command includes at least one of reconfiguration information, information regarding timing adjustment, relative timing difference between the source eNode-B and the target eNode-B, information regarding an initial scheduling procedure at the target eNode-B, and measurement information for the target eNode-B. The WTRU then accesses the target eNode-B and exchanges layer 1/2 signaling to perform downlink synchronization, timing adjustment, and uplink and downlink resource assignment based on information included in the handover command.01-24-2013
20120108239METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING CELLS IN THE PRESENCE OF INTERFERENCE - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include determining measurement values for base stations based on signal measurements obtained over resources protected from interference by neighboring cells. The protected resources can be determined based on at least one of detecting at least a bimodal disparity in signal measurements received over the resources, receiving an indication of the protected resources, determining the resources as used for transmitting paging signals, determining the resources from a previous resource assignment, and/or the like. Thus, where a device is measuring cells for idle-mode reselection, such measurement of protected resources can provide for a more accurate measurement of characteristics of signals received from the base station.05-03-2012
20110294509HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS - Disclosed is a method in which in case where it is inappropriate for a particular Home (e)NodeB providing a service to a particular UE to continue to provide the service on the ground of a changed status, such as overload, temporary drop due to maintenance, expiry of CSG membership for the UE, increase of temporary interference, policy change, or the like, the Home (e)NodeB transmits information on a cause that the UE performs a handover to another base station to an control entity within a network. Furthermore, it is allowed for the entity within the network to store information on the cause. In addition, if the status of the particular Home (e)NodeB is changed, then the entity within the network is allowed to perform a reverse handover for the UE to the particular Home (e)NodeB on the basis of the information on the changed status and the information on the cause.12-01-2011
20090047961METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING NEIGHBOR LIST FOR HANDOVER MANAGEMENT - A method and an apparatus for optimizing a neighbor list in a mobile communication system is disclosed. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes: i) a data collecting unit, collecting wireless quality measurement data and call fault data of a mobile communication terminal, wherein the call fault data is information on a call fault event generated because no sub-cell information is present in the neighbor list when the mobile communication terminal carries out a handover, ii) a data analyzing unit, analyzing the wireless quality measurement data and the call fault data and calculating a frequency of a sub-cell being included in an active set for each handover-possible target sub-cell and a frequency of call fault event occurrence, wherein the frequency of being included in the active set is a frequency of the sub-cell and target sub-cell being included simultaneously in the active set for handover and iii) a neighbor list optimizing unit using the frequency of being included in the active set and the frequency of call fault event occurrence to set an order of priority of handover-possible target sub-cells for the sub-cell and generating a neighbor list.02-19-2009
20100279691Indicating Radio Access Technology Information to Mobile Stations System and Method - An access node. The access node includes a component configured to communicate with a mobile station operating on one of a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second RAT. The component is configured to communicate a permission to the mobile station to attempt to identify a cell of the first RAT in the absence of communicating to the mobile station a first radio access type neighbour cell list for a serving cell of the second RAT.11-04-2010
20090124261MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION - In a mobile communication system that switches a base station, with which a mobile terminal communicates in a cell boundary, from a first base station to a second base station according to handover control, the mobile terminal notifies assignment information on a radio resource assigned by the first base station, to the second base station during handover period, and the second base station collects the assignment information, and assigns a radio resource to a mobile terminal existing in its own cell based on the collected radio resource assignment information, so that interference from the first base station is decreased.05-14-2009
20090131056Computing an Action Time for Allocation of Resources to a Mobile Station That is Handing Over From a Source to a Target Base Station - To perform a handover of a mobile station from a source base station to a target base station, the source base station determines a delay of a connection between the source base station and the target base station. The source base station computes an action time taking into account the determined delay, the action time specifying a time when the target base station is able to allocate resources to the mobile station for the handover.05-21-2009
20090075657METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING THE LOAD DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN A FIRST MOBILE RADIO NETWORK AND A SECOND MOBILE RADIO NETWORK - A method for optimizing the load distribution between one mobile radio network, for example using the UMTS standard, and another mobile radio network, for example using the GSM standard, by optimizing the signalling sequence when establishing a connection in such a mobile radio system. It enables efficient cooperation when establishing a connection, for example a voice connection, between a UMTS and a GSM network. In addition to the efficient use of resources in a UMTS system, the method also enables direct establishment of a connection, for example of a voice connection that was initiated in a UMTS network, in a GSM network.03-19-2009
20090149179APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A TERMINAL ACCESSING A BASE STATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A circuit includes a controller to determine whether to prohibit entry of an end unit to a base station in a wireless communication network, the controller configured to process a media access control (MAC) management message that includes a timer value, the timer value designating a time period during which entry is prohibited.06-11-2009
20090054064WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND HANDOVER WARNING METHOD - A wireless communication device (02-26-2009
20100081438Method and System For Inter-Frequency Or Inter-RAT Cell Reselction - A method for reselection of a cell in a wireless network comprises a) detecting that a level of a current serving cell is below a threshold defined for the current serving cell; b) determining the availability of a target cell at a lower or equal priority layer than the current serving cell; c) determining, for at least one available target cell at a lower or equal priority layer than the current serving cell, whether the available target cell has a level above a threshold defined for the available target cell; and d) selecting the available target cell if the determination at c) is affirmative; if the determination at c) is negative, using a hysteresis to select any target cell with a level better than the serving cell.04-01-2010
20090186616HANDOVER EXECUTION AND COMMUNICATION RESUMPTION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Handover execution and communication resumption in a wireless access system is provided. Performing a handover includes communicating with a serving base station through a first communication link and receiving from the serving base station, handover information associated with at least one candidate target base station. The method also includes transmitting handover indicator to the serving base station indicating a handover operation to a selected target base station and performing a ranging procedure with the selected target base station to establish a second communication link with the selected target base station while maintaining the first communication link with the serving base station. The method also includes being released from the serving base station in response to a handover complete status message from the selected target base station to the serving base station, or resuming normal communication with the serving base station if the handover fails with the selected target base station.07-23-2009
20100035617Communication Network - There is provided a method of operating a communication network comprising at least one macrocellular base station, and a plurality of femtocell base stations that are within the coverage area of the at least one macrocellular base station, the method comprising providing a proxy in a signalling path between the at least one macrocellular base station and the plurality of femtocell base stations, providing unidirectional signalling for the support of mobility and interference control from the at least one macrocellular base station to the proxy; and providing signalling for the support of mobility and interference control between the proxy and the plurality of femtocell base stations.02-11-2010
20100035614Radio Communication Apparatus and Radio Communication Method - A radio communication apparatus includes a battery voltage monitor configured to acquire a dropped amount of an output voltage in a case where a network connection unit is connected to at least one of radio communication networks used in a handover; and an operation controller configured to stop a handover controller from executing the handover to the other radio communication network when a predicted voltage obtained by subtracting the dropped amount from the output voltage is not more than a predetermined threshold.02-11-2010
20120190367MOBILE STATION, RADIO BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes: a determination unit 07-26-2012
20090239537CARRIER COMMUNICATION METHOD, PERIPHERAL CELL MEASUREMENT METHOD, BASIC STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A mobile communication technique capable of efficient measurement of adjacent cells and implementation of handover process, while reducing the measurement workload on a mobile station, is provided. The mobile station measure a first carrier frequency supported by a first adjacent cell based on the carrier information received from a base station that covers the cell in which the mobile station is currently located. If the propagation condition of the first carrier frequency satisfies a predetermined condition, the mobile station measure a second and a subsequent carrier frequencies supported by the first adjacent cell. If the propagation condition of the first carrier frequency does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the mobile station terminates the measurement for the first adjacent cell, and moves to measurement of carrier frequencies of a second adjacent cell.09-24-2009
20100029278USING IDENTIFICATION SEQUENCES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Techniques, apparatuses, and systems for using identification sequences in a wireless communication system can include receiving information indicative of a pilot code detected by a wireless device, the pilot code being shared by multiple Femto Access Points (FAPs) that each provide wireless service in at least a portion of the coverage area; receiving information indicative of an identification sequence detected by the wireless device that is associated with the pilot code, using the information indicative of the identification sequence to identify one of the FAPs that share the pilot code; and performing a hand-off of the call to the identified FAP to continue to provide wireless service for the call via the identified FAP.02-04-2010
20090239536Network Evaluated Hard Hardover Using Predictions - The invention is directed towards determining whether a hard handover should be performed of a mobile station (09-24-2009
20090088162Method and system for supporting IP Multimedia Subsystem for voice call continuity based on media-independent handover - Provided is a method and system for supporting IMS VCC based on an MIH. In a method of supporting a multimedia service for an MIH-based VCC, neighbor network information is obtained from an MIH server periodically or according to an event trigger and scanning the neighbor network. The capacity of at least one more candidate networks is detected from the scanning results to prepare a handover. A target network is determined among the candidate networks to reserve resources and a handover command event is generated to perform a domain transfer. The handover is completed after the performing of the domain transfer.04-02-2009
20100113024METHOD OF HANDLING AN INTER RAT HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling an inter-RAT handover for a mobile device in a wireless communication system includes when, via a handover from a serving network using a first RAT to a target network using a second RAT, the mobile device succeeds in establishing a connection to the target network and has packet switched data for transmission, transmitting a predetermined radio resource control message, indicating existence of a packet switched signaling connection of the mobile device, to the target network.05-06-2010
20110263258ACTIVE MACRO-FEMTO HAND-IN WITH HELP FROM OUT-OF-BAND PROXY - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for supporting macrocell-to-femtocell hand-ins of active macro communications for mobile access terminals. A femto-proxy system is provided including a femtocell and an out-of-band (OOB) proxy. While the femtocell may be addressed by the macro network according to a potentially non-unique identifier (e.g., its PN offset), the OOB proxy is addressable according to a unique OOB identifier (e.g., a Bluetooth device address, BD_ADDR). When the mobile access terminal is in proximity to the femto-proxy system, it detects the OOB proxy and communicates the unique OOB identifier to the core network via the macro network (e.g., as part of a measurement report). The OOB identifier is mapped (e.g., in the core network) to the femtocell, allowing the core network to uniquely identify the appropriate target femtocell for active hand-in.10-27-2011
20100035616Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product For Data Forwarding at Handover - An apparatus for facilitating data forwarding at handover may include a processor configured for issuing, from a source node, a handover request to a target node for handing EPC over communications with a mobile terminal from the source node to the target node, receiving acknowledgement of the handover request, and forwarding data to the target node prior to communication of a handover command to the mobile terminal.02-11-2010
20100113021Association of Network Cells with Location Information - Aspects of the invention provide methods, apparatuses and computer media for providing cell location information in a digital broadcasting system. A mobile terminal uses the cell location information to form a preliminary handover candidate list. A mobile terminal receives reference coordinates for a reference cell, displacement coordinates for a current cell, and displacement coordinates for neighboring cells over a wireless channel. The mobile terminal consequently determines the locations of the current cell and the neighbor cells based on the coordinates. The mobile terminal determines a range distance for the current cell and includes a neighboring cell in a handover candidate list when the neighboring cell is within the range distance, where the range distance is based on an estimated maximum radius of the current cell and optionally on a cell coverage offset. The handover candidate list is further sorted based on distances of the handover candidates from the current cell.05-06-2010
20100113022MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION AND UPPER NODE - An upper node and a handover source radio base station store setup information on an access bearer having been set up between the upper node and the handover source radio base station. A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: (A) informing, from the handover source radio base station to a handover target radio base station, the access bearer setup information; (B) storing, at the handover target radio base station, the access bearer setup information informed of by the handover target radio base station; and (C) setting up, at the upper node, an access bearer between the upper node and the handover target radio base station by using the stored access bearer setup information without performing reallocation processing of new access bearer setup information, the access bearer being set up in response to a path switching request from the handover target radio base station.05-06-2010
20100216471Link Layer Control Protocol Implementation - A radio base station suitable for performing a handover operation for a LTE-variant of a radio access network comprises a transceiver and a status report requester. The transceiver is configured to facilitate wireless transmission between the radio base station and a wireless terminal over an air interface, including transmission of a radio link bearer for the connection over a downlink from the radio base station to the wireless terminal. The status report requester is configured to determine, according to one or more pre-defined criteria, whether to request from the wireless terminal a status report for a radio bearer prior to the radio base station transferring user data for the connection to another radio base station in conjunction with a handover.08-26-2010
20090104911COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPRATUS AND METHOD - A communication control apparatus that is applied to a wireless communication system in which a mobile terminal can be connected to a fixed base station through a wireless connection to a relay station that is mounted on a moving body, wherein the communication control apparatus includes a detecting unit that detects a change, associated with movement of the moving body on which the relay station is mounted, of a communication environment between the mobile terminal and the relay station, a control unit that controls a handover of the mobile terminal according to the change, detected by the detecting unit, of communication environment between the mobile terminal and the relay station.04-23-2009
20090104910APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for processing handover in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes selecting a cell for handover when a HandOver (HO) drop occurs, identifying if information for communicating with a serving BS is stored, transmitting a message ranging request signal to the serving BS, identifying provision or non-provision of a service from the serving BS comprised in a response signal to the message ranging request signal, and transmitting/receiving a signal with the serving BS.04-23-2009
20100267387BASE STATION FOR A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A base station (10-21-2010
20100267386METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING HANDOFF BETWEEN A FEMTOCELL BASE STATION AND A CELLULAR BASE STATION - A user may enter information about a cellular base station into a femtocell base station. A user may enter information about a femtocell base station into a subscriber station. A femtocell base station may receive a neighbor list from a cellular base station, and broadcast the neighbor list to subscriber stations that are located within a coverage area of the femtocell base station. When a subscriber station is being served by a femtocell base station, the subscriber station may receive a neighbor list from the femtocell base station and scan for potential handoff candidates using the neighbor list. When a subscriber station is being served by a cellular base station, the subscriber station may scan for potential handoff candidates using a neighbor list received from the cellular base station and also using the femtocell base station information that the user entered.10-21-2010
20120088508TERMINAL DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal device (04-12-2012
20090291688MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD USED IN THE SAME - A mobile terminal used in a cellular mobile communication system is disclosed. The mobile terminal includes a measuring unit configured to measure reception levels of received signals; an averaging unit configured to average the measured reception levels based on a forgetting factor; a cell reselection unit configured to reselect a cell based on the averaged reception level; and a factor determining unit configured to determine the forgetting factor according to parameters sent from a network.11-26-2009
20100120432ENHANCEMENTS FOR OPERATION OF A TIMER - A method and an apparatus for operating a timer in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) includes the WTRU receiving a circuit switch (CS) call request, transmitting an enhanced packet switch mobility management service request (ESR) in response to the CS call request, starting the timer in response to the transmittal of the ESR, receiving a handover command in response to the transmittal of the ESR and stopping the timer upon reception of the handover command.05-13-2010
20100120434MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless base station connected together with another wireless base station to a superior apparatus, comprises, a forwarding controller to forward data received from the superior apparatus and addressed to the mobile station to the mobile station in a case of receiving none of a handover request message from a mobile station connected to the wireless base station itself by use of a wireless channel shared between or among a plurality of mobile stations, and to forward a part or the whole of the data received from the superior apparatus after receiving the handover request message to the another wireless base station in a case of receiving the handover request message from the mobile station and transmitting a handover process request message in response to this handover request message to another wireless base station defined as a handover destination, and a notifying unit to notify the another wireless base station of information used for the another wireless base station to determine a reception allowable period of the data forwarded from the wireless base station.05-13-2010
20090023447Data processing in intra-site handover - The invention involves data processing during intra-site handover procedures. At least two directional antennas of a base station receive user data carrying signals originating from a mobile units positioned in an intra-site handover area defined by the overlapping radio coverage of the antennas. The directional antennas performs an initial data signal detection of the received data signals resulting in detected user data, which typically results in a loss of radio performance of the antenna. The detected user data from the directional antennas is then jointly processed to generate processed user data. The performance loss is compensated by providing differential antenna gain of the directional antennas within the handover area. As a result, a similar radio coverage in this area as prior art solutions is obtained but with a less complex antenna-related design.01-22-2009
20090023448METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-SYSTEM HANDOVER - An inter-system handover system for a wireless communication system supports hand-down and hand-up of user equipment (UE) to different radio access technologies, including synchronous and asynchronous systems. Latency and handover connection failures are reduced by an access node (nodeB) broadcasting information about neighboring systems (targets) when the UE reception (RX) capability is both inside or outside the reception range of the target. A single RX chain is sufficient, although transitioning between a wireless wide area network (WWAN) to a wireless local area network may (WLAN) may advantageously benefit from simultaneous operation on two Rx chains. Optimized list of neighboring RAT systems (targets) are broadcast from the network, including measurement parameters and reporting instructions. Thereby, UE-driven reporting minimizes latencies. UE reports other-system searches to network only if needed for a handover. In addition, handover requests can be bundled with other-system measurement information, if necessary, for additional efficiencies.01-22-2009
20100087195Adaptive Handover Apparatus And Method In A Heterogeneous Network Environment - Disclosed relates to an adaptive handover method in a heterogeneous network environment. Once a wireless device starts up, the invention collects estimation information for a channel environment and integrates with the wireless device's geographic information to decide two groups of recursive parameters and a channel theoretical signal model. The model and the first group of recursive parameters are used to execute recursive iteration for a signal strength decay theoretical value. The obtained actual signal strength decay value from channel estimation, second group of recursive parameters and the signal strength decay estimation value at previous iteration are used to execute channel-tracking recursive iteration for obtaining a signal strength decay tracking value. The current network status and the signal strength decay tracking value are used to predict and analyze system performance of heterogeneous networks. Based on the analyzed result, prediction time is also regulated. A decision is made based on each heterogeneous network's analyzed result, and an adaptive handover procedure is prepared by following the decision.04-08-2010
20120034919WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN WHICH NodeB BROADCASTS IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ON RELAY APPARATUS - A wireless communication system includes a first NodeB that forms a cell; and a relay apparatus to which the first NodeB connects and which relays data transmitted and received between the first NodeB and a core network. The first NodeB broadcasts identification information on the relay apparatus to which the first NodeB connects.02-09-2012
20110201336METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING USER-LEVEL QoS DURING A LOCATION-BASED HANDOFF OVER HETEROGENEOUS MOBILE ENVIRONMENTS - A multi-radio mobile device receives data transmission of a session from a serving access network in a heterogeneous network system comprising difference access networks. A handoff is performed based on the received data transmissions. User-level QoS for the wireless communication session is adjusted during the handoff based on connection QoS information in the current location of the multi-radio mobile device and/or a velocity of the multi-radio mobile device. Location-based network connection information, comprising call drop information and the connection QoS information, in the current location of the multi-radio mobile device is acquired from a location server. A target access network or a different base station in the serving access network associated with the highest connection QoS is selected. The user-level QoS is adjusted during the handoff for receiving the wireless communication session from the selected target access network or the different base station in the serving access network.08-18-2011
20100120431INTER-CARRIER MEMBER HANDOVER APPARATUS AND METHOD - Provided are an inter-carrier member handover apparatus and method. In the inter-carrier member handover apparatus and method, data is transmitted or received by allocating a plurality of carriers to a single mobile terminal, a carrier aggregation, which includes a plurality of carrier members that process the allocated carriers, is managed, and a handover between the carrier members in the managed carrier aggregation is processed when the handover is required. Therefore, an intra-base station handover can be performed when a mobile terminal and a base station exchange data using a plurality of carrier frequency bands.05-13-2010
20100120430MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system comprises a first base station, a second base station, and a wireless terminal. The wireless terminal performs a handover from the first base station to the second base station. The first base station transmits information related to data volume of downlink data to the second base station, when the handover is performed. The second base station receives information related to the data volume.05-13-2010
20090264133TERMINAL DISTRIBUTION CONTROL FOR POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling a user equipment (UE) capable of receiving a point-to-multipoint service in a wireless communication system comprises receiving a point-to-multipoint service and performing a cell reselection in response to completion of the receiving of the point-to-multipoint service. The cell reselection is performed among multiple frequencies. The cell reselection may be performed in response to signaling from the network. The cell reselection may be performed regardless of whether cell reselection criteria are satisfied. The cell reselection criteria may comprise at least one of a cell reselection reference value between frequencies and a cell reselection reference value within a frequency. The cell reselection criteria may be embodied in frequency layer dispersion (FLD) information. Alternatively, the cell reselection criteria may be embodied in frequency layer convergence (FLC) information.10-22-2009
20120202500METHOD OF HANDLING AN INTER RAT HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling an inter-RAT handover for a mobile device in a wireless communication system includes when, via a handover from a serving network using a first RAT to a target network using a second RAT, the mobile device succeeds in establishing a connection to the target network and has packet switched data for transmission, transmitting a predetermined radio resource control message, indicating existence of a packet switched signaling connection of the mobile device, to the target network.08-09-2012
20090291689MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ITS CONTROL DEVICE, AND HAND-OFF CONTROL METHOD - According to an embodiment of the present invention, a mobile communication system comprises a plurality of cellular stations configured to each form areas and a control device configured to connect the cellular stations to a network through communication resources. The control device comprises a construct processing module, a prediction processing module, a secure processing module and an establishment processing module. The construct processing module constructs a database storing hand-off records in time series of a plurality of the mobile terminals. The prediction processing module predicts one or more candidates of cellular stations of connection destinations next to the mobile terminals with reference to the time series of the database before hand-offs are requested. The secure processing module secures channels in the communication resources of the predicted candidates. The establishment processing module establishes communication links via the secured channels among the mobile terminals and the network when hand-off execution is requested.11-26-2009
20090054065METHODS AND DEVICES, WHICH ENABLE TO DETERMINE IF A HANDOVER OF A COMMUNICATION IN WHICH A MOBILE TERMINAL IS INVOLVED HAS TO BE EXECUTED FROM A FIRST BASE STATION TO A SECOND BASE STATION - The present invention concerns methods and devices for enabling the determination, if a handover of a communication in which a first mobile terminal is involved has to be executed between base stations in an area managed by an entity of a wireless cellular telecommunication network. The entity: 02-26-2009
20090264132INTERMITTENT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - In an intermittent communication system where an intermittent communication can be made between a base station and a mobile station, a transmitting unit of the mobile station transmits a request to start a normal communication after stopping an intermittent communication at timing different from the intermittent communication if a handover is determined to be required. A transiting unit transits from the intermittent communication to the normal communication after the transmitting unit transmits the request. A handover performing unit performs a handover upon completion of transition to the normal communication by the transiting unit.10-22-2009
20090264131METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR USER DETACHMENT WHEN A HANDOVER OR CHANGE OCCURS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A method for user detachment when a handover or change occurs in a heterogeneous network is provided. The method includes: a user equipment (UE) is handed over or switched from a source network to a target network; a network element on a network side determines whether to detach the UE from the source network, and if yes, the network element on the network side detaches the UE from the source network. A system and a device for user detachment when a handover or change occurs in a heterogeneous network, and another method for user detachment when a handover or change occurs in a heterogeneous network are also provided.10-22-2009
20090264130METHOD AND APPARTUS FOR MANAGEMENT OF AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR RELATION FUNCTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate management of automatic neighbor relation functions in wireless networks. The system can include components and/or devices that ascertain whether or not to add or remove a neighbor relation based on information associated with an operations and management system, wherein the operations and management system dispatches add or remove requests to a base station that establishes, updates, and/or maintains a neighbor relations table and/or set of neighbor relations that includes neighbor relations between cells.10-22-2009
20100029281BASE STATION AND RESOURCES SECURING METHOD - A base station includes a required resources determination unit which determines the amount of free resources to be secured for a local cell based on statistical information including a record of how resources have actually been used. The base station includes a handover object selection unit which selects a mobile station capable of being handed over to another cell among mobile stations within the local cell if the actual amount of free resources is smaller than the amount of free resources to be secured as determined by the required resources determination unit. The base station includes a connection control unit which hands over the mobile station selected by the handover object selection unit to another cell.02-04-2010
20090170514COMMUNICATION METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND RADIO BASE STATION IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment transmits information for a radio base station using either of radio resources associated with individual multi-beams, which may be formed by the radio base station, and the radio base station performs reception processing of the radio resources for the individual multi-beams.07-02-2009
20090163211METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFER OF A MESSAGE ON A COMMON CONTROL CHANNEL FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for sending a message for random access by a user equipment (UE) are described. In an aspect, the UE may send the message on a control channel for random access and may send a reserved channel identifier to indicate the message being sent on the control channel. In another aspect, the UE may send the message in a protocol data unit (PDU) and may send additional information (e.g., a buffer status report) in the PDU if it can accommodate the additional information. In yet another aspect, the UE may generate a short message authentication code for integrity protection (MAC-I) for the message. The short MAC-I may have a smaller size and may be used to authenticate the UE. In yet another aspect, the UE may send a UE ID of one of multiple types for random access and may convey the UE ID type via a format field in the message.06-25-2009
20100124929NEIGHBOR CELL MONITORING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DUAL-STANDBY MOBILE TERMINAL - A neighbor cell monitoring method and apparatus for a dual-standby mobile terminal is provided to reduce unnecessary power consumption by controlling one of two communication units to operate in an idle state while the other performs neighbor cell monitoring. A neighbor cell monitoring method for multi-standby mobile terminal includes acquiring a neighbor's cell information through neighbor cell monitoring by operation of a master unit; performing cell tracking by the master unit and a slave unit independently; executing, when a cell change event is detected by the master unit, the cell change event using the neighbor cell information by the master unit; and transmitting, when a cell change event is detected by the slave unit, from the neighbor cell information from the master unit to the slave unit and executing the cell change event using the neighbor cell information by the slave unit.05-20-2010
20100124927PERIODIC REPORTING FOR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY LOCATION-BASED HANDOVERS FROM A GSM MACROCELL TO A WCDMA FEMTOCELL - The present invention provides a method for implementation in a mobile unit that is configured to communicate with a wireless communication system that includes macrocells and one or more femtocell(s). The macrocells and the femtocells use different radio access technologies. The method includes periodically reporting, from the mobile unit to the macrocell, a distance between said mobile unit and the femtocell and performing an inter-radio access technology handoff of the mobile unit from the macrocell to the femtocell when the distance is less than a threshold distance.05-20-2010
20100099415METHOD FOR CHANGING ROUTE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method for changing a route in wireless communication involves: when there is subscriber equipment requesting a change of route in a cell, a base station negotiates downlink measurement contents with a relay station facilitating the route change in the cell; a network side informs the subscriber equipment requesting a change of route of the negotiated downlink measurement contents, and the subscriber equipment executes a downlink measurement according to the received measurement contents and reports the downlink measurement results to a radio access point; and the radio access point executes the route change for said subscriber equipment according to the received measurement results. The method can effectively improve the accuracy of the route change and alleviate the delay due to the route change.04-22-2010
20120295623METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR POSITIONING A NODE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM USING DIFFERENT RAN/RATS - A method in a positioning node (11-22-2012
20110201337METHODS, APPARATUSES, SYSTEM, AND RELATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR HANDOVER SECURITY - It is disclosed a method comprising receiving, prior to a handover operation, first key indication information, creating, prior to the handover operation, key information based on the received first key indication information, retaining the created key information, sending, after the handover operation, the received first key indication information associated with the key information created prior to the handover operation, and retrieving, after the handover operation, the retained key information based on the first key indication information; and a method comprising generating, prior to the handover operation, the first key indication information associated with key information intended to be created, sending, prior to the handover operation, the generated first key indication information, and receiving, after the handover operation, second key indication information corresponding to the generated first key indication information.08-18-2011
20090088165RELAY STATION, BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR EXTENDING A COVERAGE AREA OF A BASE STATION IN A RADIO NETWORK - A method for extending a coverage of a base station in a wireless communication network is disclosed, characterized in that a relay station transfers control information and communication related information between the base station and the mobile station according to an indication of the base station.04-02-2009
20110171960INTELLIGENT HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS HANDOFF - Provided are methods and systems of managing vertical handoffs in a wireless communication network. Embodiments include analyzing wireless device usage to determine usage patterns, which may include locations and times at which the wireless device is typically accessing the network. The network may recognize points in the usage patterns at which signal quality parameters are typically reduced. Such reductions in signal quality parameters may lead to inefficient vertical handoffs. The network may decrease adverse effects of inefficient vertical handoffs by reducing ping ponging, selecting links between wireless devices and network nodes, or indicating to a user of the wireless device that delays and/or data loss may occur.07-14-2011
20090170519Handoff for Cellular and Internet Protocol Telephony - A telephone system supports communication with user devices over both a cellular radio network as well as over an Internet Protocol (IP) network, and enables roaming and active call handoff between cellular and IP domains. Components of the system interact with conventional cellular telephone systems, for example, by emulating behavior of control components, providing proxy services for conventional components, transporting cellular telephone control communications over IP connections, or by simulating cellular operating characteristics of user devices operating in an IP domain.07-02-2009
20100124928METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for handover of a MS of a plurality of MSs to a BS of a plurality of BSs in a wireless communication network. The method includes identifying a target BS from the plurality of BSs for handover of the MS served by a serving BS. A difference between a quality of a signal received by the MS from the target BS and the quality of the signal received by the MS from the serving BS is greater than or equal to a first predefined threshold. The method further includes performing a handover for the MS from the serving BS to the target BS when the quality of the signal received by the MS from the serving BS is greater than or equal to a second predefined threshold.05-20-2010
20090280809WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A signal transmitted from a terminal is received by plural adjacent wireless base stations (11-12-2009
20090149183DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A data processing method when the handover or change appears between systems includes the source data forwarding network element forwards the data to the user plane anchor network element; the user plane anchor network element forwards the data to the target side processing network element. A data processing method when the handover or change appears between systems is also provided by the present invention, which includes: the user plane anchor network element receives the message indication, transmits the data to at least one of the source data forwarding network element and the target side processing network element; the user plane anchor network element updates the route of the user plane, and transmits the data to the target side processing network element according to the updated route of the user plane. A data processing method when handover or change appears between GERAN/UTRAN systems under the Direct Tunnel solution is provided by the present invention, which can be applied to the Direct Tunnel solution.06-11-2009
20080207205Method of Hand-Over In the Mixed Network of Asynchronous Communication Network and Synchronous Communication Network - In the present invention, as a mobile communication terminal, which is using service in the area of an asynchronous mobile communication system, detects signals from a synchronous mobile communication system, the mobile communication terminal repeatedly performs a process of examining whether, in a predetermined time, signals from the asynchronous mobile communication system have been detected a designated number of times, and measuring the intensity of the signals. When the number of times that the intensity of signals from the asynchronous mobile communication system is smaller than a designated number of times, or no signals from the asynchronous mobile communication system are detected, within the predetermined time, it is determined whether to perform handover of the mobile communication terminal.08-28-2008
20110171959WIRELESS MESSAGING METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A wireless messaging method includes the steps of: when a mobile station is transmitting a message to a network and a first handover occurs, evaluating network conditions to generate an indication signal; and re-transmitting the message according to the indication signal.07-14-2011
20090298503METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AN EFFICIENT HANDOVER IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Apparatus and method for an efficient handover of at least one user equipment from a first access node to at least one further access node of a plurality of access nodes in a telecommunications system, said method comprising the steps of: said first access node, upon reception of a handover request from said user equipment, preparing a group of further access nodes of said plurality as possible target access nodes, upon attachment of said user equipment to said one further access node, said one further access node transmitting a message to said first access node, and upon reception of said message by said first access node, said first access node transmitting a further message to said possible target access nodes.12-03-2009
20090280813Handover Procedure Between Radio Access Networks - A generic access network infrastructure controller entity (11-12-2009
20090280814Method and Apparatus for Signal Strength Indication - A method, in a wireless communications device, the method for reporting a signal strength indication from a first layer to a second layer, the method comprising: measuring and reporting an initialisation value of signal strength; periodically measuring a current value of signal strength; determining whether a change in signal strength meets a threshold criterion; reporting the current value of signal strength as an update value of signal strength when the change in signal strength meets a threshold criterion.11-12-2009
20090280812SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIMODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOFF - Methods and apparatus for easily and quickly returning to a first radio access technology (RAT) network when handover to a second RAT network is cancelled are provided. The methods and apparatus may involve a mobile station (MS) entering idle mode before handover to the second RAT network is completed and requesting a serving base station (BS) to retain MS service and operational information, as well as service flow state information. In this manner, should handover to the second RAT network be cancelled before completion, a re-entry to the first RAT network may be expeditiously performed using the retained MS information.11-12-2009
20090280811Base station apparatus and neighboring cell information management method - A first base station apparatus, when newly installed, extracts cells of a second base station apparatus and its coverage cells neighboring them from neighboring cell information stored therein. The first base station apparatus notifies the second base station apparatus of the cells by a notification message. The second base station apparatus updates neighboring cell information stored therein based on the notification message. The first base station apparatus also sends a notification message to a third base station apparatus so that the third base station apparatus updates neighboring cell information stored therein.11-12-2009
20090042573Radio Bearer Dependent Forwarding For Handover - This invention employs an inherent tradeoff in a radio bearer dependent data handling method for intra-E-UTRA handoffs. For user equipment using real time data, the source node forwards to the target node not yet acknowledged real time service data units and disconnects. This makes the handoff latency short at the expense of data traffic between nodes. For user equipment not needing real time data, the source node continues to receive user equipment acknowledgements during a time out period and only forwards service data units acknowledged during the time out period. This reduces X2 interface traffic between the source and target nodes but extends the handoff latency.02-12-2009
20090291687TRIGGER OF INTER-FREQUENCY MEASURMENTS WITHIN MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - The invention provides for a method of initiating inter-frequency measurements within a mobile radio communications device and including the step of inspecting by way of a network the load state of the cell in which the mobile radio communications device is located, and further including the step of paging the mobile radio communications device with a Paging Type 1 message indicating that the mobile radio communications device can perform inter-frequency measurement on the cells identified within SIB before responding to the paging signal.11-26-2009
20110171961SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GEOGRAPHICALLY LOCATING A CELLULAR PHONE - According to an embodiment of the invention, there is disclosed a method for geographically locating a cellular phone. The method comprises: determining an effective cell-area for each of a first cell and a second cell in a cellular network; and determining a handover area within which the cellular phone is likely to be located when control of the cellular phone is transferred from the first cell to the second cell; wherein the determination of the handover area and the effective cell-area for each of the first cell and the second cell are made based on a topological relationship between the first cell and the second cell. Further related apparatus embodiments are also disclosed.07-14-2011
20090270104METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESELECTING CELL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention include a method for performing cell reselection in a mobile communication system. The method comprises the steps of reading, by a user equipment (UE), the Access Class (AC) barring parameters of the serving cell which are broadcast from a base station, and performing an AC barring check; calculating the cell reselection values of the serving cell and the adjacent cells according to the cell reselection parameters broadcast by the base station when the AC barring check fails; and ranking the calculated cell reselection values, selecting by the UE the cell corresponding to the maximum value of the calculated cell reselection values as the serving cell of the UE.10-29-2009
20110269470METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING AND ACQUIRING ANTENNA CONFIGURATION INFORMATION - A method, device and system for sending and acquiring information is provided, which relates to the field of communication, for solving the problem that user equipment (UE) cannot judge whether information transmitted in a time-frequency resource block is pilot measurement information or not that result in inaccurate detection on signal quality of a neighboring cell by the UE. A technical solution according to the present invention includes: acquiring antenna configuration information of the neighboring cell; and sending a message carrying the antenna configuration information of the neighboring cell to the UE. The embodiments of the present invention can be applied in a wireless communication network.11-03-2011
20120295624OFFLOADING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ENHANCING MOBILITY - The present invention provides an offloading method and device for enhancing mobility, used for solving the technical problem of poor mobility in the current offloading and network construction solution. The present invention discloses that: a Network Address Translating (NAT) gateway is deployed in an upper layer of a Femto Node B; a dedicated tunnel for transmitting the offloading data between the Femto Node B and the NAT gateway is established; the NAT translation of the offloading data message is performed by the NAT gateway and the offloading data is forwarded through the dedicated tunnel according to a continuation relationship; when a User Equipment (UE) performs a handover across two Femto Node B's due to mobility, it is only necessary to modify the continuation relationship of the UE, without disconnecting and reconnecting the link of the offloading data stream, thereby improving the system's mobility.11-22-2012
20110269462METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY ENHANCEMENT IN DRX - When a user equipment (UE) is in a CONNECTED state with a base station of a wireless network and is also in a discontinuous reception (DRX) mode, a DRX parameter such as DRX period for the UE is compared with a threshold. If the DRX parameter is at or below the threshold, the UE applies a network controlled mobility mode with UE assist where the network controls handover of the UE to another cell. If the DRX parameter is above the threshold, the UE applies a UE controlled mobility mode in which the UE is free to select a best cell. In this way, DRX benefit of reduced power consumption is maintained while the time period in which the UE is unreachable is minimized.11-03-2011
20090170518System and Method for Providing a Handoff Leg Associated With a Preexisting Leg in a Network Environment - A method for facilitating communications between wireless networks is provided that includes communicating with a mobile station and transferring a communication session from a first wireless link to a second wireless link. The mobile station is operable to negotiate a first wireless link with a first wireless network, to establish a communication session with a device using the first wireless link, and to facilitate a session handoff with a second wireless link with the second wireless network using the second wireless interface. The handoff is enabled by associating the first wireless link to the second wireless link.07-02-2009
20090170516Method And Arrangements For Providing Information Regarding GAN Coverage In The Cellular Radio Communication Network - The present invention relates to control of GAN-enabled mobile stations operating in a cell of the cellular radio communication network. A signal is transmitted S07-02-2009
20110207462Voice Over LTE Via Generic Access Handover (HO) Apparatus And Method - A method and system wherein a Voice over LTE via Generic Access (VoLGA) Access Network Controller (VANC)1 upon receiving a REGISTER and REGISTER UPDATE message from the UE1 notifies a Hand Over Selection Function node (HOSF) that a user equipment (UE) is registered in the VANC. This will only be done if the HOSF has not theretofore been notified.08-25-2011
20110207461METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION OF A FEMTO RADIO BASE STATION - A method for configuration of a femto radio base station is characterized in the steps of establishing a connection of the femto radio base station (08-25-2011
20100136975PORTABLE TERMINAL AND ITS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A portable terminal capable of reliably carrying out reselection even though power consumption is reduced and thereby increasing the chance to wait for connection to the upper-layer communication system so as to realize a long-time communication system so as to realize a long-time standby and to enable an increase of the traffic efficiency. A portable terminal communication method and a wireless network system are also disclosed. The portable terminal (06-03-2010
20100136977System and Method for Providing Intelligent Cell Reselection for Delay Sensitive Data Applications - A mobile station for receiving delay-sensitive data from a wireless communications network is provided with a data buffer and cell reselection controller. The data buffer receives data from the network and stores the data for communication to a delay-sensitive data application. The cell reselection controller selectively inhibits cell reselection in order to meet requirements of the delay-sensitive data application. By intelligently controlling cell reselection, delay sensitive data may be received in a more reliable fashion, thereby increasing performance of the data application.06-03-2010
20100136974Apparatus and method for dynamic resource exchange in cognitive radio (CR) based communication system - A base station includes an apparatus and a method for exchanging frequency channel resources between base stations in a Cognitive Radio (CR) based communication system. A requesting Base Station (BS), which requests channel exchange a neighboring BS, receives a channel advertisement message from a neighboring BS and sends a channel exchange request message to the neighboring BS. The channel exchange request message includes at least one of a neighbor BS Identifier (ID), a requesting BS ID, channel information for the channel exchange at the requesting BS, and channel information exchangeable at the neighboring BS. The requesting BS receives a channel exchange response message from the neighboring BS in response to the channel exchange request message, determines whether to execute a channel exchange process to the neighboring BS based on information in the received channel exchange response message, and sends a channel exchange reply message indicative of the determination result.06-03-2010
20090163207RADIO LINK HANDOVER IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station (06-25-2009
20080274741High-Density Wireless Local Area Network - A data communication system includes an access point and a plurality of stations each for exchanging wireless data communication messages with the access point. At least some of the messages are in a format that includes at least one message header and a plurality of data units. Each of the data units includes a respective data unit header and a respective data frame. Each data unit header identifies a respective one of the stations as a recipient to receive the respective data frame of the data unit.11-06-2008
20100210266Methods and Apparatus of Improving Inter-Sector and/or Inter Cell Handoffs In a Multi-Carrier Wireless Communications System - A wireless communications system, e.g., an OFDM system, uses a plurality of carrier frequencies each with an associated frequency band. A base station sector transmitter in the system transmits ordinary signaling, e.g., user data, in its own assigned band. In addition the sector base station transmitter periodically transmits beacon signals into its own frequency band and the frequency bands used by adjacent sector transmitters for their ordinary signaling. Beacon signals, being short duration high power signals with sector transmission power concentrated on one or a few tones, are easily detectable. Each beacon signal may be identified as to the source base station sector transmitter, e.g., based on tone. A mobile node, tuned to a single carrier band, receives a plurality of beacon signals, identifies the sources of the received beacons, compares the received strength of the beacons, and makes handoff decisions, without having to switch carrier band.08-19-2010
20100248725Handoff Method, Switching Device and Terminal - A handoff method, a switching device, and a terminal are provided. A first service link is established between a first terminal and a second terminal through a switching device. The method includes the following steps. A first switching device receives a call request from the first terminal, and the first switching device sends a link establishment request to the switching device on the first service link according to the call request. A switching device and a terminal are also provided. By adopting the handoff method, the switching device, and the terminal, only the switching device on the first service link is updated to support the universal handoff logic, and there is no requirement of whether the first switching device supports the universal handoff logic. In the case that it is difficult to update all the switches one by one to support the universal handoff logic in the current network, the handoff method is simple to operate and has wide universality.09-30-2010
20100248724Communication System Receiver and Method for Concurrent Receiving of Multiple Channels - A method and apparatus in a communication system provide for concurrent processings of signals at the different frequencies. A received signal is down converted in a RF/IF system (09-30-2010
20100248722METHOD FOR PREVENTING COVERAGE GAPS ON THE BORDERS OF A CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - The invention relates to a method for operating a first cellular communications network, particularly for operating cells in the border region of the first cellular mobile communications network, wherein the first mobile communications network is identifiable by an identifier and, at least in border regions of the first mobile communications network, transmits the identifier of a second neighboring mobile communications network that is considered equivalent to a mobile communications terminal device to which a communications connection exists, wherein an at least partial spatial overlap of the communications ranges of the two mobile communications networks is present, wherein the mobile communications terminal device measures the communications signal strengths of the mobile communications networks currently receivable at the current location of the mobile communications terminal device, wherein the communications signal strengths measured by the communications terminal device and the associated identifiers of the respective mobile communications network are sent to the first mobile communications network for analysis, wherein the communications connection is transferred to the second neighboring mobile communications network if the communications signal strength of said network exceeds a predeterminable threshold value or is greater than the communications signal strength of the first mobile communications network.09-30-2010
20100248723INTERFACE ESTABLISHING METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND RADIO NODE APPARATUS IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An interface establishing method in a handover procedure, includes: managing an occurrence status of handover for a plurality of radio node apparatuses; transmitting an establishment instruction from the management apparatus to a first radio node apparatus to establish a first link between the first radio node apparatus and a second radio node apparatus according to the occurrence status of handover, the first radio node apparatus and the second radio node apparatus being accommodated in the management apparatus; and establishing the first link between the first radio node apparatus and the second radio node apparatus based on the establishment instruction.09-30-2010
20090170515BASE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - Embodiments of the present invention make it possible to reduce loss and delay of downlink user data transmitted at regular time intervals in a mobile communication system employing a hard handover method, and make it possible to easily perform high-quality handover solely by a handover-starting base station. A base station for transmitting downlink user data at regular time intervals to a mobile station is disclosed. The base station is configured to transmit a handover-command signal immediately after transmitting the downlink user data to the mobile station.07-02-2009
20110269464APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR X2 INTERFACE SETUP AND CELL SWITCHING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for setting up an X2 interface setup are provided. The method includes transmitting, by a first Base Station (BS), an X2 interface setup request to a second BS, wherein the X2 interface setup request comprises an access mode of a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) supported by a cell in the first BS, and transmitting, by the second BS, an X2 interface response message to the first BS, wherein the X2 interface response message comprises the access mode of the CSG supported by the cell in the second BS.11-03-2011
20080280613HANDOVER APPARATUS AND HANDOVER METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing handover of a terminal in a wireless communication system, the method including obtaining information on neighboring networks from a media independent handover (MIH) server by using a MIH layer if a state of a link connected to a serving network is changed; transmitting a handover initiation request message to the MIH layer of the serving network through the MIH layer; checking handover support information and tunnel state information of the neighboring networks which are received from the MIH layer of the serving network; determining a target network to which handover is performed and performing layer-2 (L2) handover with the target network, by using the handover support information; and performing layer-3 (L3) handover with the target network by using the tunnel state information.11-13-2008
20080280611Smooth Hard Handover Method, Mobile Station and Base Station Adapted For The Method - The present invention relates to a cellular radio communications system and especially a method, a mobile station and a base station for a smooth hard handover. The smooth hard handover includes preparing radio links in selected base stations for potential communication with a mobile station. This is similar to selecting base stations for the active set in the prior art soft handover. A difference is though that just one radio link is actively used for transmission. The handover from the active to a prepared radio link is quick and safe, as compared to conventional hard handover, because of the preparation, while requiring a less complex system architecture then the conventional soft handover. The smooth hard handover can replace the soft handover.11-13-2008
20080280614METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING - The method and apparatus are used for media independent handover (MIH) measurement and reporting in wireless communications. A periodicity for measurement and reporting is set on the MIH function through an MIH protocol message or an MIH SAP primitive and on the link layer device through an MIH_LINK_SAP primitive. A new MIH_SAP primitive, MIH protocol message or MIH_LINK_SAP primitive is added to configure the periodicity. A new information element (IE) field for measurement reporting period may be added.11-13-2008
20080293418MANAGING CALL CONTINUITY BETWEEN NETWORK DEVICES - The present disclosure includes a system and method for managing handovers between network devices. In some implementations, a method includes receiving a request to handover a call session from a femtocell to a macrocell associated with a cellular core network. The femtocell comprise cellular radio technology. A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message is generated based, at least in part, on the handover request. The SIP message is transmitted to a communication node associated with the cellular core network.11-27-2008
20080305798HANDOVER METHOD IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A SYSTEM THEREFOR - A handover method of a mobile station in a wireless mobile communication system and a system therefore are provided. The mobile station transmits a handover indication message to a serving base station, receives a ranging response message that comprises authentication information required for the mobile station to authenticate a target base station, receives fast ranging resources and transmits a ranging response acknowledgement (ACK) message, which comprises authentication information required for the target base station to authenticate the mobile station, to the target base station after receiving the fast ranging resources. Accordingly, a handover break time is minimized.12-11-2008
20080305796Method for performing inter-technology handovers utilizing tunnels - The present invention provides a method for performing inter-technology handovers of a communication unit between a first Radio Access Network (RAN) and a second RAN. The communication unit includes a single transceiver. An inter-RAN tunnel is established between the first RAN and the second RAN. When the communication unit determines that it may be moving out of the service area of the first RAN, the communication unit sends a handover request message to the first RAN. The handover request message includes a request for a second RAN that the communication unit can communicate with. The communication unit is then able to perform some handover communication with the second RAN prior to actually handing off to the second RAN, by utilizing the inter-RAN tunnel between the first RAN and the second RAN.12-11-2008
20080305797RRC MESSAGES AND PROCEDURES - A method for radio resource control (RRC) messaging. The messaging includes transmitting a RRC message upon partial completion of message transmission. The RRC message further comprises an information element (IE) that represents a failed or partially failed condition.12-11-2008
20080311916Network Controller Messaging For Ciphering in an Unlicensed Wireless Communication System - An unlicensed wireless service is adapted to generate the interface protocols of a licensed wireless service to provide transparent transition of communication sessions between a licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. In one embodiment, a mobile station includes level 1, level 2, and level 3 protocols for licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. An indoor base station and indoor network controller provide protocol conversion for the unlicensed wireless service into a standard base station controller interface of the licensed wireless service.12-18-2008
20080311914METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY OF BASE STATIONS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An automated neighbor discovery by a base station with the assistance of an access terminal are disclosed. An exemplary method includes receiving a first message from an access terminal based on detecting an identification signal by the access terminal from the first base station in a communication system. Determination whether the first base station is a known base station is then made. If the first base station is not known, a second message is transmitted to the access terminal requesting a network identification of the first base station. A third message from the access terminal is received in response to the second message including the requested network identification. A request for identification data is sent by the second base station to the first base station via a network link based on the network identification. Corresponding apparatus and other exemplary methods are also disclosed.12-18-2008
20080311912SYSTEM SELECTION BASED ON APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS AND PREFERENCES - Techniques for performing system selection based on requirements and preferences of applications are described. A terminal maintains a policy table containing applications supported by the terminal, priorities of the applications, radio technologies that can be used for each application, and priorities of the radio technologies for each application. The terminal manages policies associated with the supported applications and radio technologies, determines the most suitable radio technology for each application, and activates and deactivates radio technologies in response to events, e.g., the terminal being turned on, a call being placed, the terminal leaving the coverage of a radio technology, etc.12-18-2008
20080311911Handover trigger for an inter-access-gateway interface - An apparatus and method are provided in which multiple options are configured to deliver a base-station ID (BSID), which acts as a trigger for an initiation of a handover at an access gateway level. The handover triggers may be based on a proactive handover between at least one mobile station and a gateway and base station in a serving and target networks or on a reactive handover in which the at least one mobile station does not perform any handover preparation prior to the handover. In addition, the handover trigger may be based on a network initiating and controlling the handover.12-18-2008
20080311910MOBILE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile station includes a handover controller. When the mobile station simultaneously communicates with a plurality of radio base stations by using first channels and communicates only with a certain one of the plurality of radio base stations by using a second communication channel, and even when the radio quality of the certain radio base station communicating by using the second communication channel becomes deteriorated, the handover controller maintains communications with the certain radio base station communicating by using the second communication channel.12-18-2008
20080311909HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION FROM A FIRST TO A SECOND TYPE OF WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for moving or transferring a mobile station from one type of wireless network to another type of wireless network are described herein. The methods may include employing a source radio access technology (RAT) device, a target RAT device, and a cross wireless network type inter-RAT server to collaboratively communicate with each other to move the mobile station between the different types of wireless networks.12-18-2008
20080214195Radio network relocation - There is disclosed a method for serving radio network subsystem relocation from a first radio network controller to a second radio network controller for an established call to a user equipment, comprising transmitting a transmission power control combination index of a radio link established between the user equipment and the first radio network controller to the second radio network controller.09-04-2008
20120142354COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A target communications device receiving from a source communications device a notification that a user communications device is to be handed over from that source communications device, provides the source communications device with multiple component carrier information for use by the user communications device. The multiple component carrier information includes information indicating to the user communications device which of the multiple component carriers is to be used for initial access. The multiple component carrier information may be component carrier indexes. Communication devices may exchange component carrier indexes during a setup or updating procedure such as an X2 setup or updating procedure.06-07-2012
20120295621MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND EXCHANGE - The present invention includes the steps of: receiving, from a mobile terminal (UE) having moved from a management area of an exchange (SGSN #11-22-2012
20120295622USING MOBILITY STATISTICS TO ENHANCE TELECOMMUNICATIONS HANDOVER - A method of operating a communications network (11-22-2012
20090318149METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING A SERVICE IN A FIRST FREQUENCY - The present invention relates to a method for establishing a service in a first frequency in a communication network, wherein the first frequency does not support the service or supports it in a limited way, the method comprises the following steps: determining the service to be established, re-selecting or redirecting to a second frequency that is suitable for the service, so as to carry out the service in the second frequency. The present invention also relates to user equipment and a network apparatus for establishing a service in a first frequency in a communication network, wherein the first frequency does not support the service or supports it in a limited way. According to the present invention, a non-MBMS service may be established in the MBMS dedicated frequency, so as to carry out the non-MBMS service in the normal frequency.12-24-2009
20120046035Method and device for radio cell change due to energy saving in a mobile communication network - There is provided a method for a mobile communication device registering in second radio cell of a mobile communication network based on a deactivation of a first radio cell in which the mobile communication device was located. An exemplary method comprises determining a random time interval by the mobile communication device. An expiration of the random time interval is determined starting from a predetermined point in time. The exemplary method also comprises registering in the second radio cell, when the expiration of the random time interval has been determined.02-23-2012
20130217392Method and system for managing neighboring cell information - The present disclosure discloses a method and a system for managing neighboring cell information. The method includes: a radio network controller sends a notification message to user equipment (UE), wherein the notification message includes an indication which notifies the UE to measure inter-frequency cells which are not in an inter-frequency neighboring cell list or inter-system cells which are not in an inter-system neighboring cell list; after receiving the notification message, the UE measures the inter-frequency cells, which are not in the inter-frequency neighboring cell list, indicated in the notification message, or measures the inter-system cells, which are not in the inter-system neighboring cell list, indicated in the notification message, and reports the measurement result. In the present disclosure, the UE reports a measurement result to the network side after measuring the cells which are not in the neighboring cell list, to improve the capability of the network side to obtain neighboring cell information. Based on the measurement result reported by the UE, the network side decides inter-frequency handover or inter-system handover, so that the UE performs handover in time and the call drop is prevented effectually.08-22-2013
20130217393MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting an “Extended Service Request” from a mobile station UE in Idle mode to a mobility management node MME via a radio base station eNodeB; transmitting an “Initial UE Context Setup Request” from the mobile station UE to the radio base station eNodeB, the “Initial UE Context Setup Request containing priority call information; and preferentially allocating resources to the E-RAB for the mobile station UE by the radio base station eNodeB based on the priority call information contained in the received “Initial UE Context Setup Request.”08-22-2013
20120295620ADVANCED LEGACY MOBILE STATION DOMAIN (ALMSD) INTERSYSTEM HANDOFF WITHOUT ANCHOR NETWORK BEARER SUPPORT - A method for intersystem handoff of a Mobile Station (MS) from an Anchor Mobile Switching Center emulation (MSCe) to a Target MSCe that both support Advanced Legacy Mobile Station Domain (ALMSD), wherein the MS is in communication with a B-Party. The Anchor MSCe sends a handoff request to the Target MSCe to allocate resources for a connection between the MS and an identified Target BS and to establishes bearer resources in a Target Media Gateway (MGW) and in the Target BS to support a voice bearer path between the Target BS and the B-Party. The Anchor MSCe instructs the MS when to move to the Target BS and upon a successful connection to the Target BS, the Anchor MSCe establishes a voice bearer path between the Target BS and the B-Party without maintaining any anchor network bearer resources. The Anchor MSCe completes the handoff by releasing resources in the Anchor BS.11-22-2012
20110207459METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL RESELECTION - A method of reselecting a mobile wireless communication device to a network subsystem before initiating a connection with a wireless communication network. A connection request is received by the mobile wireless communication device in response to a user input. Attributes of signals received by the mobile wireless communication device from multiple network subsystems in the wireless communication network are measured over a period of time. The mobile wireless communication device is associated with one of the network subsystems and not associated with other network subsystems. The mobile wireless communication device reselects to one of the network subsystems based on quality metrics generated from the measured received signal attributes. After reselection, the mobile wireless communication device initiates a connection through the reselected network subsystem.08-25-2011
20110028150Method of Updating Management Information and Related Communication Device - A method of updating management information for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises performing a procedure involved in a cell change from a first cell to a second cell; sending a first request to a network for first assistance data associated with the second cell when the procedure is finished; and receiving the first assistance data from the network.02-03-2011
20110028149Method and Apparatus to Facilitate Influencing Handover Decisions - A cellular communications system end-user transceiver (02-03-2011
20080280612Telecommunications Apparatus and Method - A telecommunications system for providing mobile communications to mobile user equipment is provided which includes an internet protocol access network and a cellular mobile radio network. The internet protocol access network provides a facility for mobile communications to mobile user equipment within a coverage area for wireless communication provided by the internet protocol access network, the mobile communications being provided using an internet protocol. The cellular mobile radio network provides a facility for mobile communications to mobile user equipment within a coverage area for wireless communication provided by the cellular mobile radio network. The mobile communications are provided using at least one of a packet switched communications channel in which data is divided into packets and communicated on a communications bearer shared with other data packets, and a circuit switched communications channel in which data is communicated on a communications channel having a dedicated bandwidth. Mobile user equipment is provided and may activate a connection on the cellular mobile radio network using the packet switched communications channel whilst receiving a communications service via the internet protocol access network. The mobile user equipment communicates via the connection on the packet-switched channel of the cellular mobile radio network in response to a handover event for changing affiliation of the mobile user equipment fro m the internet protocol access network to the cellular mobile radio network. The mobile user equipment also establishes a connection on the cellular mobile radio network using the circuit switched channel in response to the handover event, continues to communicate via the connection on the packet-switched channel while the connection on the circuit-switched channel has been established, and then communicates via the connection on the circuit-switched channel once it has been established. In this way, improved continuity of service can be provided and the incidence of dropped calls can be reduced.11-13-2008
20100144353HANDOVER METHOD FOR MOBILE WiMAX NETWORK BASED ON HUMAN MOBILITY BEHAVIOR - A Handover method in a mobile WiMAX network includes sending a list of target BSs for possible HO acquired by an MSS to a serving BS; providing, at the serving BS, a HO request to the target BSs in the list along with an unique identifier indentifying the MSS to collect association responses from the target BSs; providing, at the serving BS, the association responses along with the unique identifier to the MSS so that the MSS performs scanning and ranging processes; performing resource reservation for possible HO at the target BSs; setting up service flows at a target BS selected among the target BSs; bi-casting data from the serving BS to the MS and the selected target BS before the connection break with the serving BS; and performing, at the MSS, an initializing procedure to connect with the selected target BS as a new serving BS.06-10-2010
20090149181METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - When a network pages the temporary user mobile identifier of a mobile station, the mobile station sends a response to the network. Next, the network checks the authenticity of the user using a ciphering key, corresponding to the temporary user mobile identifier and a random number. If the temporary user mobile identifier is authenticated, a normal incoming call acceptance procedure is executed. If the mobile station is authenticated although the temporary user mobile identifier is wrong, the network reassigns a new temporary user mobile identifier to the mobile station and stops the current communication. In communication, the network and the mobile station mutually notify encipherment-onset time and negotiate about encipherment manner with each other. In addition, diversity handover is commenced upon a call attempt. Furthermore, if a branch replacement is necessary, the current branch is replaced by new branches capable of executing the diversity handover. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, the mobile station uses the same branch structure and the same communication frequency band for all of calls. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, a branch structure and a communication frequency band, which can continue all of the calls, are selected and used. Therefore, the mobile communications system is suitable for transmission of various sorts of data in accordance with the development of multimedia.06-11-2009
20080318577METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING INTER-FREQUENCY AND INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for supporting inter-frequency and inter-radio access technology (inter-RAT) handover are disclosed. A network provides measurement gap parameters for configuring a measurement gap to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The WTRU then performs a measurement based on the measurement gap parameters. Such measurement includes inter-frequency frequency division duplex (FDD) measurements, inter-RAT global standard for mobile communication (GSM) measurements, and inter-RAT universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS) measurements.12-25-2008
20080268844Handoffs and Handoff Selection in a Wireless Access Network - The present invention facilitates handoffs for a mobile terminal in a wireless access network that is capable of supporting different types of handoffs. The different handoff types may include soft handoffs and fast base station switching (FBSS). In operation, context information associated with supporting wireless communications between the wireless access network and the mobile terminal are determined. Based on whether the context information is shared between base stations involved in the handoff or transferred from one base station to another of the base station involved in the handoff, a particular handoff type is selected from the different handoff types that are available. Selecting the specific type of handoff to use may also be based on the level of context information that is available, the actual content of the context information, application preferences, channel conditions, base station or mobile terminal capabilities, or any combination thereof.10-30-2008
20080268848BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - When carrying out a downlink handover, a source base transceiver station from which a mobile node is moving receives packets to be transmitted, via a wireless section, to the mobile node from an IP network, and copies and transfers them to a destination base transceiver station to which the mobile node is moving. On the other hand, when carrying out an uplink handover, the source base transceiver station compares the reliability of transport blocks which are received via a wireless section, from the mobile node and which are demodulated and decoded by the local station with that of transport blocks which are received via an IP network, from another base transceiver station and which are demodulated and decoded thereby, packetizes selected transport blocks with a better quality, and transmits them to a communications-partner node according to a route table, thereby implementing distribution of traffic via the IP network.10-30-2008
20100136973METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING VERTICAL HANDOVER IN SDR TERMINAL - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for allowing a Software Defined Radio (SDR) terminal to perform a vertical handover between different services. The vertical handover method includes: receiving a handover request from an application service which is currently being executed; selecting a new application service which is a handover target from among a plurality of application services, in response to the handover request; installing the new application service in the SDR terminal so that the new application service is executable by the SDR terminal; and performing a handover to the new application service. Accordingly, since handover is performed seamlessly between different services, continuity of service may be ensured.06-03-2010
20100136972GATEWAY MODULE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREOF - A gateway module, a communication method, and a computer program product thereof are provided. The gateway module is adapted for use in a network framework comprising a mobile station, a plurality of interworking units, a first wireless network, and a second wireless network. The mobile station is located within the signal coverage of the first wireless network and the second wireless network, and accepts network service provided by the first wireless network. The gateway module receives a handover request signal of the first wireless network, selects a handover interworking unit from the interworking units according to the handover request signal, and transmits the handover request signal to the second wireless network. Thereby, the mobile station can handover to the second wireless network to accept the network service provided by the second wireless network.06-03-2010
20100136976MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, ITS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM - Provided is a mobile terminal apparatus which can realize a long-time wait as follows. The mobile terminal apparatus surely performs a reselection process to increase chances to wait for a host communication system, improve the traffic efficiency, and reduce arrival failures while reducing power consumption. A communication method and a radio network system for the mobile terminal apparatus are also disclosed. The mobile terminal apparatus (mobile telephone 06-03-2010
20090117902Apparatus and method for traffic forwarding in a wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for data transmission in a base station (BS) of a wireless communication system are provided, storing data to be transmitted to a mobile station which performing handover to a target base station; confirming a quantity of stored data; determining whether to transmit the stored data to the target based at least partly on the confirmed quantity of the stored data; transmitting the stored data to the target base station when the base station determines to transmit the stored data to the target base station.05-07-2009
20090117901METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING SERVICE PATHS IN RELAY SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MOBILE STATION HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for configuring service paths in a relay system, and a method for mobile station handover are provided. In the present invention, when it is determined that a mobile station is to be switched between a base station and a relay station attached thereto, or between different relay stations attached to the base station, the service paths are configured respectively between a handover source station and a mobile station and between a handover destination station and the mobile station and same data is transmitted by the base station. Therefore, this method facilitates the mobile station to ensure service continuity in the process of handover.05-07-2009
20110269463METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PRESERVING BATTERY RESOURCES IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Preserving battery resources in a wireless device in communication with a wireless network by dynamically aligning a RRC connection status of a mobile wireless communication device in communication with a wireless network with a data traffic profile. The data traffic profile indicating a pattern of data transfer between the mobile wireless communication device and the wireless network.11-03-2011
20110189995ACCESS POINT IDENTIFICATION BASED ON MULTIPLE PILOT SIGNATURE INDICATORS - An access point is identified based on a plurality of pilot signatures. Here, in addition to transmitting a pilot signal that is encoded (e.g., spread/scrambled) using a particular pilot signature, an access point transmits a message that includes at least one indication of at least one other pilot signature. For example, an access point may use one PN offset to generate a pilot signal and transmit a message that identifies at least one other PN offset. An access terminal that receives the pilot signal and the message may then generate a pilot report that identifies all of these pilot signatures. Upon receiving a handover message including this pilot-related information, a target network entity with knowledge of the pilot signatures assigned to that access point may then accurately identify the access point as a target for handover of the access terminal.08-04-2011
20090054066HANDOVER SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A handover method of a Mobile Station (MS) and a wireless mobile communication system are provided. The handover method includes sending a handover request message to a Serving Base Station (BS), receiving a handover response message including handover Target BS information and an entire Cipher-based Message Authentication Code (CMAC) value corresponding to a first number of bits, from the Serving BS in response to the handover request message, storing a partial CMAC value corresponding to a second number of Most Significant Bit (MSB) bits in the entire CMAC value, sending to the Serving BS a handover indication message including the entire CMAC value and information on a Target BS to which the MS has determined to handover, selecting a ranging code using the partial CMAC value, and sending the selected ranging code to the Target BS.02-26-2009
20090082021RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ADJACENT STATION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR THIS SYSTEM, AND MANAGEMENT APPARATUS THEREFOR - Adjacent station information of various base stations communicating using CDMA is automatically updated.03-26-2009
20120142351CELLULAR SYSTEM AND HAND-OFF QUALITY IMPROVEMENT METHOD - A base station calculates numerical value data regarding hand-off quality by carrier and by neighbor station. The base station transmits the calculated numerical value data to a management apparatus. The base station receives an improvement instruction from the management apparatus, changes transmission electric power or a transmission direction of an electric wave of a carrier designated with the improvement instruction. The management apparatus determines an improvement subject base station and an improvement subject carrier from a management table using previously-set improvement determination conditions. The management apparatus transmits the improvement instruction to change the transmission electric power or transmission direction of the electric wave of the improvement subject carrier to the improvement subject base station.06-07-2012
20110269469METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN MULTI-CARRIER CELLS - The present invention relates to the wireless network communication field, and discloses a method for handover between multi-carrier cells to avoid repeated handover decisions caused by delay of the triggering event. The method includes: the source cell receives a measurement report triggered by an event reported by a served User Equipment (UE); and the source cell executs a handover decision according to measurement reports triggered by multiple events after receiving the measurement reports triggered by the multiple events within an estimated interval, and hands over the UE to the corresponding carrier of the corresponding target cell. With the present invention, the resources of the source cell and the target cell may be saved, and the handover efficiency may be improved.11-03-2011
20110269466UE Handling of Common Configuration After Handover - A method for a user equipment (UE) operating in a Long Term Evolution network. The method includes the UE receiving a command for a handover from a source cell to a target cell. The method further includes, when the UE has valid stored system information for the target cell, the UE discarding a dedicated radioResourceConfigCommon information element received from the source cell in the handover command and the UE applying radio resource configuration information retrieved from the stored system information.11-03-2011
20090163209Method and Apparatus for Determining Coverage and Switching Between Overlay Communication Systems - Techniques to determine whether or not a terminal is under the coverage of a current wireless communication system (e.g., a packet data system) and to switch from the current system to another wireless communication system (e.g., a voice/data system). In one method, at least one measurement of at least one parameter for at least one base station in the current system is initially obtained. The measurement(s) may be SNR measurements. A metric is derived based on the measurement(s) and used (typically along with a metric threshold and a timer) to determine whether or not the terminal is within the coverage of the current system. A switch to another system is initiated if the terminal is deemed to be outside the coverage of the current system. The two systems provide at least one common service (e.g., packet data service).06-25-2009
20090163206NETWORK INITIATED PROACTIVE HANDOVER PROCEDURE FOR FAST MOVING WIRELESS DEVICES - A method, information processing system, and wireless communication system, initiate a handover scanning procedure with a wireless device. The method includes monitoring a first signal strength measurement (06-25-2009
20090029706RECOVERY FROM HANDOFF ERROR DUE TO FALSE DETECTION OF HANDOFF COMPLETION SIGNAL AT ACCESS TERMINAL - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate recovering from error due to false detection of completion signals at an access terminal. An access terminal specific request signal can be sent to a target base station to initiate handoff or semi-connected state exit. A completion signal can be transferred in response to the access terminal specific request signal. To mitigate errors stemming from false detection of the completion signal at the access terminal, forward link and reverse link confirmation signals can be transferred to confirm successful handoff or connected state re-entry completion. For example, the access terminal can determine handoff or re-entry to be successful when a forward link confirmation signal is detected prior to expiration of a timer. Moreover, the forward link and reverse link confirmation signals can each include more CRC bits as compared to a number of CRC bits included in the completion signal.01-29-2009
20090029707APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK USING GLOBAL RADIO RESOURCE CONTROLLER - A method, system, and apparatus for communication in a wireless communication network by using a global Radio Resource Controller is provided. The method includes receiving one or more reports from one or more local RRCs by the global RRC. The method further includes sending one or more responses to each of the one or more local RRCs by the global RRC. The one or more responses correspond to the one or more reports received from the one or more local RRCs.01-29-2009
20090029708METHOD OF SWITCHING BEARERS AND A DEVICE USED THEREFOR - Communication quality of bearers towards a 3G system having a PoC server and a proxy server connected thereto, and towards a wireless LAN system is monitored by a 3G bearer IF and a wireless LAN bearer IF of a mobile terminal device. Upon being requested for reference by an application of the mobile terminal device, a routing table of the mobile terminal device is referred. A bearer is selected based on the communication lines (bearers) to a destination, and priority corresponded to the communication quality obtained by the monitoring.01-29-2009
20090029705Methods and Apparatus for Service Acquisition in a Multi-Frequency Network - Methods and apparatus for service acquisition in a multi-frequency network. In an aspect, a method is provided for service acquisition in a multi-frequency network. The method includes detecting a service acquisition trigger event and identifying a selected RF channel from an acquisition RF list based on signal strength, wherein the acquisition RF list identifies RF channels in one or more local operations infrastructures (LOIs) of the multi-frequency network. The method also includes acquiring a wide system on the selected RF channel, removing the selected RF channel from the acquisition RF list if the wide system can not be acquired on the selected RF channel, and repeating said operations of identifying, acquiring and removing until the wide system is acquired on the selected RF channel or a system acquisition timeout occurs.01-29-2009
20110207460METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER - A method of performing a handover between a first device and a second device is provided. The method including: transmitting a handover request frame for requesting a handover, including information about a reason for requesting the handover, to the second device; receiving a handover response frame including handover request result information indicating whether the handover request is accepted, from the second device; and selectively performing the handover with the second device based on the handover response frame.08-25-2011
20090298501Method for avoiding interruptions of push to talk services - A method of controlling the cell re-selection of a mobile station (12-03-2009
20090298502ADVANCED HANDOVER FOR ADAPTIVE ANTENNAS - Handover is a main function that is used to support mobility in the network. In a cellular communication network having adaptive antennas for enabling narrow beam operation, it is assumed that a mobile unit is served by an active cell set (S12-03-2009
20090163210COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method of, and apparatus for, reducing interference inflicted by a first wireless communications system on a second wireless communications system, and a method of, and apparatus for, interacting with a first wireless communications system.06-25-2009
20090186615Apparatus and method for terminal handover between systems using different frequency allocations - An apparatus and a method for a terminal handover between systems using different Frequency Allocations (FAs) are provided. The method includes broadcasting an indication signal to inform of existence of the terminal in a coverage of a macro base station to which an indoor base station is registered; and when receiving a handover command message of the indoor base station, from the macro base station, performing a handover procedure to the indoor base station. The base station can efficiently utilize the control channel resource and the user terminal needs not to conduct the unnecessary scanning procedure. Thus, the time and the power required for the scanning can be spared.07-23-2009
20090005044MAINTAINING MINIMUM QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) COMMUNICATION SESSIONS DURING HARD HANDOFFS - The disclosure relates to techniques for maintaining minimum quality of service (QoS) communication sessions with a wireless communication device (WCD) over a data-based communication network during a hard handoff between access networks for the WCD. More specifically, the techniques determine whether a closed connection between the WCD and a first access network during a minimum QoS communication session is due to a hard handoff between the first access network and a second access network. In the case of a hard handoff, the techniques maintain open QoS reservations associated with data flows included in the minimum QoS communication session for a predetermined period of time to enable a new connection to be established between the WCD and a second access network. The techniques described herein may especially useful when performing a voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call over an Evolution-Data Optimized (EVDO) communication network.01-01-2009
20090005042METHOD OF BROADCASTING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN COMMUNICATION CELLS FOR HANDOFF - A method of operating a network infrastructure entity in which a mobile communication device is capable of handover from a first wireless communication network to a second wireless communication network is described. System information of the second wireless communication network is broadcast, over a control channel of the first wireless communication network, to a plurality of mobile stations communicating with the first wireless communication network. The system information includes a system time of the second wireless communication network measured at a predefined time point of a frame structure of the first wireless communication network and at a transmitter of the first wireless communication network. The system information may further include neighbor cell information and slot offset of control channel.01-01-2009
20090005046APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for supporting a handover from a macro Base Station (BS) to a micro BS in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a user layer for requesting scanning information on micro BSs among neighbor BSs and an MIH function for obtaining the scanning information on the micro BSs by interoperating with an MIH server according to the request and for transmitting the obtained information to the user layer. Accordingly, the handover from the macro BS to the micro BS can be achieved.01-01-2009
20090005043METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING A HOME BASE STATION ROUTER - The present invention provides a method of automatically configuring a base station router. The method includes modifying a transmission power for a pilot signal transmitted by the base station router. The modification of the transmission power is determined based upon a frequency of mobility-related procedure requests received by the base station router.01-01-2009
20100151863MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION PROCESSING METHOD - A mobile radio terminal stores transfer information indicating whether a base station to which the mobile radio terminal is connected is changed from a base station belonging to a second mobile communication network to a base station belonging to a first mobile communication network; and control the second communicating unit so as to search for a base station belonging to the second mobile communication network, when it is determined using the stored transfer information that the mobile radio terminal is on standby in a base station belonging to the first mobile communication network after the base station to which the mobile radio terminal is connected is changed from a base station belonging to the second mobile communication network to the base station belonging to the first mobile communication network.06-17-2010
20100003986METHODS FOR SCANNING NEIGHBOR BASE STATIONS AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A communication apparatus is provided. The communication apparatus includes a radio transceiver module and a processor. The processor receives a neighbor cell advertisement message from a serving base station via the radio transceiver module and scans neighbor base stations according to information carried in the neighbor cell advertisement message to obtain a measurement result. The neighbor base stations are scanned in a prioritized order01-07-2010
20100003980AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF INTER-DOMAIN ACCESS TECHNOLOGY NEIGHBOR RELATIONS - The disclosure relates to automatically configuring a map of inter-access technology neighbor relations. In this neighbor relations map configured by an ANDSF, relationships between neighboring cells of differing access networks of the same or different access technologies are maintained including extra-domain and non-domain neighbor relationships. A domain refers to a domain of one or more access technologies in which ANDSF is not required for intra-domain access selection and discovery. ANDSF configures the map based on neighbor relations data reports from wireless terminals, which record the neighbor relations data as they perform extra-domain or non-domain handovers or reselections or as they scan their surroundings. ANDSF provides steering instructions to configure the neighbor relations data recording and reporting behaviors of the wireless terminals. ANDSF provides access network discovery and selection information, which indicates availability of non-domain accesses, and in some cases domain accesses, to wireless terminals based on their locations.01-07-2010
20090061878HANDOVER METHOD WITH LINK FAILURE RECOVERY, WIRELESS DEVICE AND BASE STATION FOR IMPLEMENTING SUCH METHOD - For each target cell determined by a handover decision process, a first message is transmitted from a source base station (03-05-2009
20090061874BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A target base station transmits a traffic assignment signal a plurality of times to a control station for notifying a traffic amount of downlink data that can be processed by the target base station, after a notified cell change timing in which the mobile station changes a communicating base station.03-05-2009
20090061872APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SHARING AND ASSIGNING MULTIPLE NUMBERS TO A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a communication device having a controller to associate two or more phone numbers with two or more phone bills, where the controller is adapted to send outgoing phone calls and receive incoming phone calls on multiple telephone numbers assigned to the mobile communication device in accordance with at least one user profile. Other embodiments are disclosed.03-05-2009
20100003982METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DELIVERY NOTIFICATION OF NON-ACCESS STRATUM RETRANSMISSION - A method and apparatus for data delivery confirmation in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) including transmitting an uplink (UL) message, performing a mobility operation, determining that the UL message is not acknowledged, and generating a delivery failure message. The mobility operation is a handover or a radio resource control (RRC) connection reestablishment. A message including the delivery failure message is passed between protocol layers.01-07-2010
20080318575METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN SOURCE AND TARGET ACCESS SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for switching among heterogeneous networks and inter-working between a source access system and a target access system. An inter-system handoff control component can facilitate setting an IP tunneling by the mobile unit, wherein IP addresses for inter-working security gateway and Radio Access Network of the target access system can be identified. The inter-system handoff control component can then implement tunneling between the source system and the target system, wherein signaling/packeting associated with the target system can be transferred over the source system.12-25-2008
20080318576Handover Between Wireless Cellular Network and Private Network in Wireless Communications - Techniques and systems for performing handover of a mobile station between a cellular wireless network and a private cell or private network.12-25-2008
20090325582Processing Location Information Among Multiple Networks - Gathering location information from a first wireless network to determine whether to anchor a communication session in a second wireless network, a mobile node capable of communicating with both the first wireless network and the second wireless network, includes receiving location information from the first wireless network as the mobile node moves through one or more service areas of the first wireless network. It is determined whether a triggering event occurs. If the triggering event occurs, the location information is stored to determine whether to anchor a session in the second wireless network.12-31-2009
20090325581METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC MOBILE PROFILE FUNCTIONALITY - A method and apparatus provide dynamic mobile profile functionality in a media independent handover. This may include an MIH server dynamically changing a mobile profile in an MIH client.12-31-2009
20090325580Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - A method is described of assigning to a user equipment one or more idle gap patterns in uplink and/or downlink communications between the user equipment and a radio base station, to allow the user equipment to perform downlink measurements on neighbour cells during the idle gaps. The method comprises defining a pre-assigned idle gap pattern; and modifying the pre-assigned idle gap pattern on the basis of one or more short commands sent between the user equipment and the radio base station.12-31-2009
20090325579USER APPARATUS, BASE STATION, AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A disclosed user apparatus includes a random access channel generating unit configured to generate a random access channel; a control channel generating unit configured to generate a control channel in accordance with scheduling information received from a base station; and an uplink transmission signal generating unit configure to generate an uplink transmission signal including the random access channel or the control channel. Further, the purpose ID indicating at least whether there is a user ID uniquely allocated by the base station is included in the random access channel or the control channel.12-31-2009
20080233958Methods and Apparatus for Mobility Influenced Handoff - In a wireless communication system, a mobility factor is used to influence handoff. If a subscriber station has been in a low mobility state for some period of time, the system may handoff operation from a first service type to a second service type. If the mobility factor indicates that the subscriber station is moving, the system may handoff operation from the second service type back to the first service type.09-25-2008
20110223916Smooth Hard Handover Method and Base Station Adapted For The Method - A cellular radio communications system, method, mobile station, and base station for a smooth hard handover. Selected base stations prepare radio links for potential communication with a mobile station although only one radio link is actively used for transmission. A handover is then performed from the active radio link to one of the prepared radio links. The smooth hard handover is faster and more secure than a conventional hard handover, while requiring a less complex system architecture than a conventional soft handover.09-15-2011
20110223914RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATING METHOD IN RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A radio base station apparatus for performing radio communication with a terminal apparatus, including: a logging processing unit which stores history information relating to handover in a storage unit, when the terminal apparatus performs handover; a change determination unit which determines whether a measurement parameter used by the terminal apparatus for determination of the handover is to be changed or not, on the basis of the history information, and outputs a change instruction if the change determination unit determines that the measurement parameter is to be changed; and a transmission unit which transmits the measurement parameter changed on the basis of the change instruction to the terminal apparatus.09-15-2011
20100003988METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CHANNEL SELECTION BY A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and mobile device for performing wireless channel selection that employs more than one concurrent level 2 interface to facilitate a level 3 handoff. The method and device maintain an active service over a first level 3 connection through a first transceiver, establish a second level 3 connection through a second transceiver, and then switch the service over to the second connection. To establish an appropriate level 3 connection, the mobile device may evaluate candidate channels against criteria associated with the active service to ensure quality of service can be maintained over the new connection or may adapt the active service to a candidate channel.01-07-2010
20100003979MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND METHOD - A disclosed mobile station is designed to send or receive at least a control channel using a given frequency in a first operating mode and to tune to a frequency different from the given frequency and perform a neighboring cell search in a second operating mode. The mobile station includes a measuring unit configured to obtain a measurement of radio channel quality at a measurement interval; and a determining unit configured to compare the measurement and a threshold and to select one of the first operating mode and the second operating mode based on the result of comparison. The mobile station allows a base station to recognize the operating mode of the mobile station either by preventing reporting of the measurement lower than the threshold to the base station or by transmitting a signal indicating the selected operating mode to the base station.01-07-2010
20090061877Generic Access to the Iu Interface - Some embodiments provide a method and technique for explicitly indicating the start of a communication session within an Unlicensed Mobile Access (UMA) network or Generic Access Network (GAN). To facilitate the explicit indication of the start of the communication session, some embodiments replace the first DIRECT TRANSFER message exchanged between a user equipment (UE) and network controller of the UMA network or GAN with a new message, the GA-RRC INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message. Some embodiments also provide a method and technique to activate a communication channel prior to performing handover from a first licensed wireless communication network to the UMA network or GAN. In this manner, some embodiments perform a more efficient and seamless handover from the licensed wireless network as the delay resulting from the handover is minimized by performing the channel activation procedure prior to the handover.03-05-2009
20130217394Multi-Mode Mobile Communication Terminal and Mode Switching Method Thereof - Disclosed is a multi-mode multi-band mobile communication terminal and a mode switching method thereof wherein a mode switching can be performed between an asynchronous network and a synchronous network by minimizing interruption in communication. According to the switching method of a multi-mode multi-band mobile communication terminal, the power of a signal received from an asynchronous network or a synchronous network is measured and the measured power of the received signal drives a modem portion, thereby switching the mode of the mobile communication terminal.08-22-2013
20090061876IN-ORDER DATA DELIVERY DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for performing in-order data delivery during handover in a wireless communication system are described. A user equipment (UE) may perform handover from a source base station to a target base station. The target base station may start a timer after a data path from a gateway to the UE has been switched from the source base station to the target base station. The target base station may receive forwarded packets for the UE from the source base station and may receive new packets for the UE from the gateway. The target base station may send the forwarded packets received prior to expiration of the timer to the UE before any new packets. The target base station may send the forwarded packets to the UE without waiting for the timer to expire and may send the new packets to the UE after the timer expires.03-05-2009
20090061873Active service redirection for a private femto cell - A femto cell at a customer premises, such as an IP-based femto Base Transceiver System (IP-BTS), can be configured as a “private access” node intended to service a limited set of mobile stations. However, mobile stations not associated with the private femto cell may acquire and lock onto the femto BTS. To avoid service blockages in such cases, the private femto BTS will allow call access attempts by, and call deliveries to, a non-associated mobile station, despite the “private access” configuration. However, upon completion of call set-up, the non-associated mobile station is directed to initiate handoff, from the private femto cell coverage provided by the femto BTS into a cell coverage of a base station of the macro network, to conserve femto cell resources for use in servicing calls of the associated mobile station(s).03-05-2009
20090088164HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM, RELAY STATION AND BASE STATION - The present invention provides a handover control method in a wireless access system, a relay station and a base station for performing handover control in a mobile multi-hop relay wireless access system such that the wireless access system is enabled to cover a wider area. To achieve the above object, the present invention provides a handover control method in a wireless access system, wherein the wireless access system comprises a mobile station and a base station, which receive and send message via a wireless channel, and further comprises a relay station for forwarding message from the mobile station and the base station under control of the base station, characterized in that the method comprising a relay station measure and arbitration step in which the relay station measures the message and arbitrates whether to relay the message, and a base station measure and handover step in which the base station measures the message and arbitrates whether to perform handover.04-02-2009
20090088163Apparatus and method for performing vertical handover in a wireless communication system - A vertical handover method and apparatus in a wireless communication system are provided, in which a serving network selects a target network for a vertical handover of a terminal from among at least one candidate target network to which the terminal can perform the vertical handover, transmits information about the selected target network to the terminal, and requests the vertical handover of the terminal to the target network, the target network acquires a profile of the terminal from a policy store, upon receipt of the vertical handover request from the serving network, the terminal requests a connection to the target network, and the target network transmits information about a router to which the terminal will connect to the terminal, upon receipt of the connection request from the terminal and updates a proxy binding for the terminal in the policy store.04-02-2009
20090088159Measurement Control for Handover From One Radio Access Technology to Another - A method is provided for measuring at least one radio condition of each of a plurality of radio access technologies (RATs). The method includes specifying a sequence of the RATs, and measuring at least one radio condition of a first RAT in the sequence before measuring at least one radio condition of a second RAT in the sequence.04-02-2009
20090088157Methods, Systems, and Computer-Readable Media for Providing Cellular Handoff - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media provide for providing cellular handoff. According to embodiments, a method for providing a cellular handoff is provided. According to the method, a first group of users is associated with a first class of service and a first cellular tower. A second group of users is associated with a second class of service. Whether to hand off the first group of users from the first cellular tower to a second cellular tower is determined based on real-time quality of service provided to at least one of the first group of users and the second group of users. In response to determining to hand off the first group of users from the first cellular tower to the second cellular tower, a handoff of the first group of users from the first cellular tower to the second cellular tower is performed.04-02-2009
20090088156Methods, Systems, and Computer-Readable Media for Reserving A Cellular Resource - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media provide for reserving a cellular resource. According to embodiments, a method for reserving a cellular resource is provided. According to the method, a change in location is determined for a preferred cellular device. Whether the preferred cellular device will be handed off from a first cell to a second cell is predicted based on the change in location for the preferred mobile cellular device. In response to predicting that the preferred cellular device will be handed off from the first cell to the second cell, a cellular resource in the second cell is reserved for the preferred cellular device.04-02-2009
20090124258HANDOVER CONTROL APPARATUS AND OPERATION METHOD OF HANDOVER CONTROL APPARATUS - A handover control apparatus and an operation method of a handover control apparatus are provided. The handover control apparatus includes an information identification unit which ascertains movement direction information of a terminal and location information of a plurality of neighboring RASs adjacent to the terminal and a scanning order determination unit which determines a scanning order for a handover with respect to the plurality of neighboring RASs using the movement direction information of the terminal and the location information of the plurality of neighboring RASs.05-14-2009
20090104908WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication base station apparatus that can raise the usage efficiency of the frequency resources of the whole system in a multicarrier transmission. In this apparatus, a separating part (04-23-2009
20110223918Method and Node for Enabling Central Processing of Local Information - The invention relates to a method in a first communication node in a wireless communications network comprising a plurality of second communication nodes for enabling a central processing of local data from second communication nodes in the network. The first communication node establishes (09-15-2011
20110230193HANDOVER ROUTING IN CS-OVER-LTE-VIA-GAN SOLUTIONS - A method and various devices (e.g., MME, GANCs, UE) are described herein for preventing a CS domain call from being dropped during a CSoLTEvGAN towards GERAN/UTRAN handover procedure.09-22-2011
20110230192APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING SEQUENCED MESSAGE TRANSFER DURING SIGNAL RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY (SRVCC) - A mobile communications device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided. The wireless module selectively performs wireless transceiving to and from a first service network or a second service network. The controller module receives, via the wireless module, a handover request for a handover from the first service network to the second service network, and determines whether a Non-Access Stratum (NAS) message flow with a counted sequence number is active on a Circuit-Switched (CS) domain of the first service network in response to the handover request. Also, the controller module keeps the counted sequence number unchanged in response to the NAS message flow being active on the CS domain of the first service network. Specifically, the handover request is transmitted by the first service network in response to a Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) procedure between the first service network and the second service network.09-22-2011
20090088160METHOD FOR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CELL RESELECTION - A method for performing cell reselection first determines a current cell selection quality value. The cell selection quality value is compared to a predetermined threshold. Measurements of neighboring cells are taken if the cell selection quality value is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold. Measurements can be taken of intra-frequency cells, inter-frequency cells, and inter-radio access technology cells. If a neighboring cell is found that is better than the current cell based on the measurements, then the better neighbor cell is reselected to.04-02-2009
20090209258METHODS AND DEVICES FOR DETERMINING IF A HANDOVER HAS TO BE EXECUTED FOR A TERMINAL - The present invention concerns a method for determining if a handover of a first half-duplex terminal has to be executed from a first to a second base station. The first base station: 08-20-2009
20090104909REDUCED PING PONG OCCURRENCE DURING HANDOVER - Disclosed is a method, computer-readable memory medium and apparatus configured to reduce an occurrence of handover ping ponging of user equipment between network access nodes.04-23-2009
20090209257METHODS AND DEVICES FOR DETERMINING IF A HANDOVER HAS TO BE EXECUTED FOR A TERMINAL - The present invention concerns a method for determining in a wireless cellular telecommunication network in which a half duplex terminal is handled by a first base station, if a second base station is able to handle the half-duplex terminal, characterized in that the method comprises the steps, executed by the half duplex terminal, of:08-20-2009
20090061875MBMS SOFT COMBINING - A method of conducting soft combining of at least two received MBMS signals in a user equipment (03-05-2009
20090203379METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCATION-BASED PREARRANGED HAND-OFF - Methods and systems for location-based prearranged hand-off are disclosed and may include pre-arranging hand-off of communication services with a mobile communication device (MCD) based on present and future locations of the MCD and the availability of wireless services in the locations. The MCD may include location-determining capability which may include one or more of: a global navigation satellite system, triangulation, and ultra-wideband positioning. A travel route of the MCD may be anticipated utilizing the locations. The travel route may traverse one or more wireless coverage areas and the hand-off of communication services with the MCD may be configured when the MCD is expected to enter a wireless coverage area with a desired network resource allocation, which may include one or more of: bandwidth, data transfer rate, cost, power requirements, channel conditions, quality of service, and secure communications capability. Configurable MCD attributes may include antennas, beam forming, codes, and modulation.08-13-2009
20090117900RADIO CHANNEL CONTROLLER AND RADIO CHANNEL CONTROLLING METHOD - Even when a general user's mobile station in communication enters a use-prohibited cell, the use of the use-prohibited cell is prevented while the communication is being maintained. Regarding a mobile station 05-07-2009
20120231796METHODS FOR INTRA BASE STATION HANDOVER OPTIMIZATIONS - The method and apparatus as described are directed toward techniques and mechanisms to improve efficiency in wireless communication networks through optimization of handover scenarios. Determining whether an intra-base station or inter-node-B handover is to be performed, and determining the protocol layers to reset during the handover based at least in part on the type of handover to be performed increases the overall efficiency of the wireless network.09-13-2012
20120231795Terminating Notification Message for Terminals in a Target Network Area - Embodiments herein include a method of notifying terminals located in a target network area. The method is executed by a call control node. The call control node is associated with a serving network area, wherein the serving network area at least partially comprises the target network area. In order to provide an efficient, easily accomplishable, and network capacity sparing notification of terminals located in a target network area, the method comprises receiving a result of a scanning of a visitor location register database associated with the call control node for terminals registered for the target network area, and sending a notification message to the terminals located in the target network area based on the received result of the scanning.09-13-2012
20090209255METHOD OF PROVDING TRANSCODING DURING VOICE-OVER-INTERNET PROTOCOL HANDOFF - The present invention provides a method for supporting handoffs of a first mobile unit in a wireless communication system that supports multiple vocoder technologies. The method includes allocating, prior to completion of a handoff of the first mobile unit, a transcoder function to the first mobile unit. The method also includes detecting a change in a format of at least one packet received from the first mobile unit. The change indicates that the vocoder technology used by the first mobile unit to form packets has changed. The method also includes transcoding packets in response to detecting the change in the format.08-20-2009
20080261597HANDOFF METHOD BETWEEN DIFFERENT SYSTEMS AND WIRELESS TERMINAL - A method of performing a handoff between a plurality of wireless systems having different service areas and a wireless communication terminal are provided. A means for selecting one of the wireless systems to be connected according to the average moving speed of the wireless terminal is provided. When the average moving speed is changed across a certain threshold, the wireless terminal starts selecting one of the wireless systems as a handoff destination. Upon selection of the handoff destination, the current throughput is compared with the estimated throughput of the handoff destination. When an improvement in the throughput can be expected, the wireless terminal performs the handoff. The wireless terminal incorporates a plurality of control devices to select the handoff destination while communicating with the current wireless system.10-23-2008
20120077501METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR DERIVING KEYS - Method, device, and system for deriving keys are provided in the field of mobile communications technologies. The method for deriving keys may be used, for example, in a handover process of a User Equipment (UE) from an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) to a Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN). If a failure occurred in a first handover, the method ensures that the key derived by a source Mobility Management Entity (MME) for a second handover process of the UE is different from the key derived for the first handover process of the UE. This is done by changing input parameters used in the key derivation, so as to prevent the situation in the prior art that once the key used on one Radio Network Controller (RNC) is obtained, the keys on other RNCs can be derived accordingly, thereby enhancing the network security.03-29-2012
20120077500METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER FROM LTE/EUTRAN TO GPRS/GERAN - A method and apparatus for handover of a dual mode wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) from an LTE system to a GERAN system uses measurements of the LTE and GERAN frequencies and a decision by a source evolved Node B to perform the handover. A GERAN access procedure includes PS attach messages exchanged between the WTRU and the target base station controller and a target SGSN. Alternatively, the GERAN access procedure uses RAN mobility information messages exchanged by the WTRU and the target base station controller and a relocation detect message by the source evolved Node B.03-29-2012
20120231794METHOD FOR MEASURING HOME CELL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is method for measuring a home cell in a mobile telecommunications system, comprising acquiring, at a network, position data indicative of the position of a first user equipment, determining whether the first user equipment is close to the home cell by using the acquired position data, sending a cell measurement control message from the network to the first user equipment via a base station specifying measurements of said home cell, performing a fine position measurement at the first user equipment, determining at the first user equipment whether the first user equipment is close to the home cell, based on said fine position measurement; and taking measurements of said home cell at the first user equipment when the first user equipment is close to the home cell.09-13-2012
20110143758METHOD OF HANDOVER BETWEEN PRIVATE BASE STATIONS - A method acquires load status information of an adjacent private base station to perform handover between private base stations. The method includes: receiving the load status information from a terminal that has received base station system information which includes the load status information, indicating the status of radio resource use of the adjacent base station, with the system information having been broadcast by the adjacent private base station, and storing the received load status information of the adjacent base station.06-16-2011
20090247164HANDOFF ALGORITHM AND ARCHITECTURE FOR MOBILE SYSTEM - A reference signal and handoff management (RSHM) program executing on a mobile device detects reference signals, allocates them into groups, and performs handoffs between synchronous and asynchronous sectors. Sectors are allocated to an active group. Sectors from the active group that satisfy a channel quality constraint are allocated to a second group. Sectors from the second group that satisfy a link budget constraint are allocated to a third group. The RSHM program calculates a weighted characteristic of the forward and reverse links of sectors in the third group. The RSHM program performs handoffs from current serving sectors to sectors having the largest weighted characteristic that exceeds the weighted characteristic of the current serving sector by an hysteresis amount. Battery power of the mobile device is efficiently used to perform handoffs and to manage reference signals in heterogeneous network environments by preventing unnecessary handoffs, overhead downloads, access probes and new registrations.10-01-2009
20090247162COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication controlling apparatus includes a track information storage unit that has stored therein track information including tracks passing through a management area of the communication controlling apparatus and shift patterns indicative of which cell and in what order the handover is preferably executed for when a mobile device moves on the tracks defined in a correlated manner; and a movement speed determining unit that determines whether a movement speed of the mobile device is equal to a predetermined speed or more. The apparatus also includes a track determining unit that determines a track including the mobile device in motion by extracting from the track information a track including a cell the mobile device belongs to in the shift pattern if the movement speed determining unit determines that a movement speed of the mobile device is equal to a predetermined speed or more.10-01-2009
20120231793Method for Canceling Call Initiation in Radio Access Technology Change - A method for canceling a cell initiation in radio access technology, hereafter called RAT, change for a mobile device is disclosed. The method comprises initiating a call in a first RAT, receiving a command redirecting the mobile device to a second RAT, moving from the first RAT to the second RAT in response to the command, and canceling the call by aborting a connection establishment to the second RAT before establishing a connection to the second RAT when the mobile device moves to the second RAT.09-13-2012
20090253434Base Station And Method For Reducing Transfer Delay - A disclosed base station for transferring, to a user terminal, a series of packet data received from a higher-level network, includes a determining unit configured to, when the user terminal is handed over to a handover destination base station due to movement of the user terminal, determine according to a transfer delay-related characteristic of the series of packet data whether data forwarding of the series of the packet data to the handover destination base station is not to be performed.10-08-2009
20090275332METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVED HANDOVER OF MOBILE STATIONS TO UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and system for handover of a mobile station (MS) to an unlicensed mobile access network controller (UNC) in an unlicensed mobile access network (UMAN). In one embodiment, the MS sends an unlicensed mobile access (UMA) radio resource (URR) Registration Request message to the UNC with one or more location identifiers for the MS. The location identifiers may include a GSM Cell Global Identity, an access point (AP) Radio Identity, a set of GPS coordinates, or an AP location. The UNC selects absolute radio frequency channel numbers (ARFCN) and base station identity codes (BSIC) values from a table based on the location identifiers and returns them to the MS in a URR Registration Accept message.11-05-2009
20090275334METHOD, SYSTEM, TERMINAL, ACCESS NODE AND GATEWAY FOR HANDING OVER TERMINAL TO MACROCELL - The present invention provides a method and system for handing over a terminal to a macrocell and terminal, access node and gateway. The method includes: determining that the terminal is in a frequent handover state or a fast moving state; handing over the terminal to the macrocell according to the frequent handover state or the fast moving state and a preconfigured handover criterion.11-05-2009
20120196602METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for multiple preparation of target cells in a wireless communication network, for handover of a mobile terminal from a source cell to a target cell, includes providing a list of candidate target cells that meet given conditions (weak signal strength in uplink or downlink between mobile terminal and serving base station) and eventually statistics for their inclusion. At least some of the cells on the list are prepared for handover, while a cell included in the list that no longer meets the conditions is removed from it. Preparation of a cell for handover may be triggered when it is added to the list, or the signal strength between the source cell and the mobile terminal reduces below a threshold value, in uplink or in downlink. The handover preparation and the handover cancel procedures between eNodeBs as specified in LTE are used for this purpose.08-02-2012
20080318573METHOD FOR HANDOVER PROCEDURE OF USER TERMINAL ON RADIO INTERFACES, A BASE STATION AND A NETWORK THEREFOR - The invention concerns a method for a handover procedure of a user terminal (UE) on radio interfaces from a source base station (SBS) to a target base station (TBS) whereby the target base station (TBS) sends out user data to the user terminal (UE) before reception of a message indicating the termination of the handover procedure (HO Complete), the user terminal (UE) uses an uplink feedback for sending at least one message (Feedback) associated to the downlink transmission of said user data to the target base station (TBS), and the target base station (TBS) uses said at least one message (Feedback) associated to the downlink transmission of said user data as an indication of the presence of the user terminal (UE) within the range of the target base station (TBS), a base station (BS12-25-2008
20100273490COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system comprises: mobile user equipment; and a communication network adapted to communicate with the user equipment, the communication network comprising: a first base station adapted to communicate with the user equipment using radio signals and according to a first defined radio frame format comprising a first sequence of radio frames each having the same length and each being allocated a respective first system frame number (SFN) such that the radio frames of the first sequence are sequentially numbered; and a second base station adapted to communicate with the user equipment using radio signals and according to a second defined radio frame format comprising a second sequence of radio frames each having said same length and each being allocated a respective second SFN such that the radio frames of the second sequence are sequentially numbered, the user equipment being adapted to receive radio signals from the first base station and to use said received signals to synchronise with the first sequence of numbered radio frames, such that the user equipment can transmit radio signals to the first base station in accordance with the first defined radio frame format, and determine the first SFN of a frame of the first sequence at a particular time, the communication network being further adapted to transmit a radio signal to the user equipment, the radio signal comprising first information indicative of a difference between the first and second SFNs at a particular time and second information usable with said first information to determine unambiguously at least a least significant bit of the SFN in binary form of a frame of the second sequence at a particular time from a knowledge of the SFN of a frame of the first sequence at a particular time, the user equipment being further adapted to receive said radio signal and, when synchronised with said first sequence, to use the first and second information to synchronise with the second sequence, such that the user equipment can transmit radio signals to the second base station in accordance with the second defined radio frame format. A corresponding communication method is provided.10-28-2010
20100273488APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING PERFORMANCE BASED ON LOCATION INFORMATION OF MOBILE STATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for improving transmitting/receiving performance based on location information of a Mobile Station (MS) in a communication system are provided. The method includes measuring coordinates of the MS to obtain the location information by using a navigation device, measuring received signal strengths of each Base Stations (BSs) according to the location information and transmitting the measurement result to a serving BS, receiving regional cell status information generated from the serving BS, and performing a transmitting/receiving operation according to a MS location included in the regional cell status information.10-28-2010
20100273486SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING BATTERY POWER - A wireless communication device, a wireless communication system, and a method for optimizing battery power resources are described. The wireless communication device comprises a rechargeable battery, a control module, and a display. The control module is configured to communicate using a first operational mode and a second operational mode different from the first operational mode. The control module is operatively coupled to the rechargeable battery and is configured to determine a first remaining battery time associated with the first operational mode, and a second remaining battery time associated with the second operational mode. The display operatively is coupled to the control module and is adapted to display the first remaining battery time and the second remaining battery time. The wireless communication system comprises antennas configured to communicate using the first operational mode and the second operational mode. The method comprises accessing a network system, estimating battery metrics based on current battery power, querying a table that associates battery power metrics with different radio access technologies, and generating a table output that displays the remaining battery time associated with each of the wireless technologies.10-28-2010
20120142356COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A user communications device, such as a mobile telephone, obtains and reports capability information to a serving base station. The capability information identities if a neighbouring UTRAN base station is HSPA/EDCH capable. The serving E-UTRAN base station can use this information to control handover decisions and load balancing performed thereby.06-07-2012
20120142352System and Method for User Equipment Mobility Support in a Heterogeneous Network - A method for supporting mobility in a user equipment by a macro cell as the user equipment moves into a coverage area of a low power node includes receiving a measurement report from the user equipment, and selecting a technique for supporting mobility according to the measurement report, and a support factor of the user equipment and of a communications system where the user equipment is operating. The method also includes operating the macro cell and the low power node according to the selected technique.06-07-2012
20090088158METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for performing inter-frequency handoff in a wireless communication network are described. An access terminal may acquire a first sector on a first frequency (e.g., at power up), receive an overhead message from the first sector, obtain neighbor list information from the overhead message, and store this information. The access terminal may be directed from the first frequency to a second frequency, e.g., to balance network load. The access terminal may perform handoff to a second sector on the second frequency. This handoff may be unsuccessful if the access terminal is within the coverage of the first sector but outside the coverage of the second sector, even though the two sectors may be co-located. If the handoff is unsuccessful, then the access terminal may determine a neighbor sector based on the stored neighbor list information, then attempt acquisition of the neighbor sector, and perform handoff to the neighbor sector if acquired.04-02-2009
20100184437Radio Resource Management Based on Parameters Indicating Imbalance between Uplink and Downlink - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements for radio base stations of a wireless communication network, enabling each radio base station to transmit parameters indicating imbalance between UL and DL to adjacent radio base stations, when it is triggered to do so. The adjacent radio base stations can then use the parameters for radio resource management decisions such as HO decisions, whenever needed.07-22-2010
20100184438METHOD OF HANDLING RADIO BAERRER RESUMPTION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A method of handling radio bearer resumption is illustrated in an exemplary embodiment of the present invention to prevent the transmission stall and the reception on the suspended signaling radio bearer and the suspended data radio bearers. First the wireless communication device receives the connection reconfiguration message including the handover message. Second the wireless communication device determines whether the received connection reconfiguration message including the handover message is the first received connection reconfiguration message including the handover message after a successful completion of a connection re-establishment procedure. Third, the wireless communication device resumes at least one of the suspended signaling radio bearer and the suspended data radio bearers when the received connection reconfiguration message including the handover message is the first received connection reconfiguration message including the handover message after the successful completion of the connection re-establishment procedure.07-22-2010
20090291685RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND RELAY DEVICE - Disclosed is a technique in which, when no reliability exists between a previous communication device and a destination communication device with respect to a mobile terminal, a context which is setting information needed for making a connection of the mobile terminal to a network is transferred at a high speed from the previous communication device to the destination communication device. According to this technique, before movement, a mobile terminal 11-26-2009
20090047958Neighbor List Management for User Terminal - Methods and apparatus for maintaining neighbor cell information for use in handover operations are disclosed. In an exemplary method, a mobile station maintains a high-priority neighbor cell list and a low-priority neighbor cell list, each list comprising one or more neighbor cell entries corresponding to candidate cells for handover. Signal strength measurements for candidate cells in the high-priority list are made according to a first measurement schedule, while signal strength measurements for candidate cells in the low-priority list are made according to a second measurement schedule. In one or more embodiments, the low-priority cells are measured less frequently than the high-priority neighbor cells.02-19-2009
20090047956CELL IDENTIFIER CONFLICT RESOLUTION - The technology described automatically resolves cell identity collisions/conflicts in a cellular radio communications network. A detecting node determines that a first cell identifier associated with a first conflicting cell is the same as a second cell identifier associated with a second conflicting cell. One of the first and second conflicting cells is selected to change its cell identifier. A different cell identifier is determined for the selected cell. The different cell identifier is then provided to other cells and preferably to user equipment (UE) terminals without disrupting ongoing UE communications.02-19-2009
20100184436Radio Base Station and Radio Communication Method - A radio base station according the present invention communicates with a radio communication terminal which has established a connection. The radio base station includes: a task manager 07-22-2010
20100184439Method, apparatus and system for reselecting or handing over to a cell - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for reselecting or handing over to a cell. The method includes: querying, by a user equipment, a current macro cell in an identification list of neighboring macro cell(s) of an accessible AP, and determining that the accessible AP is included in the current macro cell; acquiring, by the user equipment, AP cell information of the accessible AP included in the current macro cell, and measuring the accessible AP cell included in the current macro cell based on the AP cell information; and reselecting, by the user equipment, an AP cell that meets a reselection requirement base on the measurement result and is included in the current macro cell, or handing over to an AP cell that meets a handover requirement base on the measurement result and is included in the current macro cell.07-22-2010
20100184435METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A WIRELESS EXPANSION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for providing a wireless expansion network. In an aspect, an apparatus includes an expansion circuit configured to identify at least one of a selected uplink (UL) channel and a selected downlink (DL) channel that are provided by one of a primary network and an expansion network, and a processing circuit configured to switch to the at least one of the selected UL and DL channels. An apparatus includes means for obtaining link parameters associated with a primary network and an expansion network, means for identifying clients that are assigned transmission channels on both the primary network and the expansion network based on the link parameters, and means for transmitting messages to the clients to indicate the assigned transmission channels.07-22-2010
20100167740WIDE AREA MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS OVER FEMTO-CELLS - A method and apparatus is provided for hand-off of a mobile User Equipment (UE) across a femto cellular network. The method includes dynamically clustering a plurality of neighboring femto cells in a vicinity of a first femto cell to which a mobile UE is currently attached. The dynamic cluster of neighboring femto cells is moved across the femto cellular network in accordance with movement of the mobile UE across the femto cellular network.07-01-2010
20100197308Handover Using Dedicated Resources Reserved For A Limited Time Interval - A method and arrangement for handover wherein the handover resource (the dedicated random access preamble) is reserved by the target radio base station (RBS) for a limited period of time, thus increasing the handover efficiency and thereby allowing random access preambles to be used for initial access to a larger extent. The information about the reserved time interval is sent to the UE in the handover command message by means of a frame number offset between the source RBS and the target RBS. The UE uses the information to calculate when to send its synchronisation message to the target RBS. The frame number offset is calculated either by source RBS or by target RBS.08-05-2010
20100167741PROACTIVE HANDOVER POLICY - An exemplary system and method for determining handovers for a mobile device are disclosed. An exemplary system may generally include a handover server in communication with a communication network configured to support initiated communications from a mobile device. The handover server is configured to detect an initiated communication between the mobile device and a first communication link, determine a value for each of a plurality of factors associated with each of a plurality of available communication links, and assign a desired communication link to the mobile device from the plurality of available communication using a generally simultaneous assessment of the plurality of factors.07-01-2010
20130122907METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A WAIT PERIOD FOR SINGLE RADIO CONTINUITY TRANSFERS - Various methods for implementing a wait period for single radio continuity transfers are provided. One example method includes obtaining a timer value, where the timer value is based on a communications delay to a far end device. The communications delay to the far end device may be determined during session establishment with the far end device. The example method also includes implementing a wait period for a duration of the timer value, and, in response to completion of the wait period, triggering a single radio continuity network transfer. Similar and related example methods and example apparatuses are also provided.05-16-2013
20130122909MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step of transmitting, by a mobile management node MME, “Measurement Configuration #05-16-2013
20100159931System and Method for Inferring Wireless Trajectories in a Cellular Telephone Network - A device includes a processor configured to determine a number of users in each of a plurality of wireless telephone cells of a trajectory in a wireless telephone network. The processor is also configured to determine handoff data between each adjacent pair of the wireless telephone cells, and to determine a first number of users traveling along the trajectory in the wireless telephone network while on a telephone call. The processor also calculates a total number of users associated with the trajectory in the wireless telephone network based on the handoff data between each adjacent pair of the wireless telephone cells, and based on the first number of users traveling along the trajectory while on the telephone call.06-24-2010
20090149182METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - When a network pages the temporary user mobile identifier of a mobile station, the mobile station sends a response to the network. Next, the network checks the authenticity of the user using a ciphering key, corresponding to the temporary user mobile identifier and a random number. If the temporary user mobile identifier is authenticated, a normal incoming call acceptance procedure is executed. If the mobile station is authenticated although the temporary user mobile identifier is wrong, the network reassigns a new temporary user mobile identifier to the mobile station and stops the current communication. In communication, the network and the mobile station mutually notify encipherment-onset time and negotiate about encipherment manner with each other. In addition, diversity handover is commenced upon a call attempt. Furthermore, if a branch replacement is necessary, the current branch is replaced by new branches capable of executing the diversity handover. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, the mobile station uses the same branch structure and the same communication frequency band for all of calls. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, a branch structure and a communication frequency band, which can continue all of the calls, are selected and used. Therefore, the mobile communications system is suitable for transmission of various sorts of data in accordance with the development of multimedia.06-11-2009
20100151864CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - In a mobile communication system including a certain user targeted base station (Home eNB), fast cell search and handover are achieved without unnecessary signaling and without increasing interference with other cells. In the mobile communication system, when it is detected that a mobile station permitted to access the certain user targeted base station has entered or exists within a location registration area associated with the certain user targeted base station, connection information including at least frequency information being presently used by the certain user targeted base station and ID information for the certain user targeted base station is transmitted to the mobile station in a dedicated manner. The mobile station performs cell search based on the transmitted connection information. In a preferred embodiment, the mobile station receives adjacent cell frequency information broadcast from a resident public targeted base station and performs the cell search based on the frequency information in the transmitted connection information as well as the adjacent cell frequency information.06-17-2010
20100216474METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF MOBILE TERMINAL, AND MOBILE TERMINAL THEREOF - A method for supporting mobility of a mobile station and the mobile station which supports the mobility are disclosed. The method of supporting the mobility of the mobile station includes receiving cell reselection information and neighbor cell information from a base station (BS) of a present cell, wherein the cell reselection information includes thresholds for determining whether the quality of the other RAT cell shall be measured or not, wherein the neighbor cell information includes a frame duration code and a frame number of a downlink frame in the other RAT cell, wherein the frame duration code indicates the start preamble of the downlink frame; determining whether a mobile station (MS) shall measure the quality of the other RAT cell or not using the thresholds; and measuring the quality of the other RAT cell and reselecting a cell or transmitting the measured result to the BS through a measurement report message according to the measured result, if it is determined that the MS would measure the quality of the other RAT cell. Accordingly, since the mobility of the mobile station between the E-UTRAN network and the other RAT cell is supported, the mobile station can continuously receive a service while maintaining current service quality although a user moves to the other RAT cell.08-26-2010
20100216475SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ASSIGNING REGIONAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS HANDOVERS UTILIZING ANCILLARY CELL FEEDBACK - A networked computing system for assigning regional wireless communications based on ancillary device feedback. The network computing system includes a radio communications controller, one or more transceiver device(s), user equipment, and data communications network facilitating data communications amongst the wireless communications devices of the networked computing system. The radio communications controller may be configured to receive a feedback communication from a network transceiver device capable of detecting ancillary wireless communications, and then determine whether an alternate service provider resource exists for providing wireless data communications service to the user equipment within the data communications network, based on the received feedback communication.08-26-2010
20110059741PREDICTIVE HARD AND SOFT HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus that facilitate predictive hard and soft handover are presented herein. A measurement component can measure signal strength data associated with a source cell and one or more target cells. One or more linear regression lines can be computed based on the signal strength data. Rates of at least one of an increase or a decrease in the signal strength data per unit of time can be determined based on a slope of the one or more linear regression lines—the slope can comprise a change in signal strength data per unit of time. A time to trigger at least one of a hard or soft handover can be triggered based on the rates.03-10-2011
20100159933METHOD FOR EVOLVED MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE - According to an Evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (E-MBMS) service method of the present invention, an E-MBMS service is received from a first base station. If neighbor cell MBMS control information is modified in the first base station, MBMS paging information, including a factor informing that the neighbor cell MBMS control information has been modified, is received from the first base station. When an MBMS control information update cycle is reached, modified neighbor cell MBMS control information is received from the first base station and is stored. When a user equipment moves from the first base station to a second base station, a P-T-M radio bearer is reset based on the stored neighbor cell MBMS control information and receiving the E-MBMS service from the second base station. Accordingly, the consumption of battery power can be reduced, and an E-MBMS service being services is not interrupted although a user equipment moves.06-24-2010
20100159932METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING HANDOVER BASED ON WIRELESS LINK QUALITY - A method and system for controlling handover based on a quality of a wireless link of a mobile terminal is provided. The method includes requesting the mobile terminal to measure a quality of a wireless link, receiving a report message about a measured wireless link quality from the mobile terminal, determining a target base station based on the report message about the measured wireless link quality, and determining an optimum handover scheme according to wireless link quality between the target base station and the mobile terminal and between the serving base station and the mobile terminal to make a handover.06-24-2010
20100159930BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR VERTICAL TILT ANTENNA BEAM SWEEPING - A base station and method are described herein that vertically sweeps an antenna beam within a cell to improve the signal quality at scheduled times for a user terminal located within a coverage area of the cell. In one embodiment, the method improves a signal quality for a user terminal by: (a) vertically sweeping a beam within a cell coverage area to vary a signal quality at scheduled times for the user terminal located within the cell coverage area; and (b) performing one or more scheduling functions while taking into account variations in the vertical sweep of the antenna beam. For instance, the scheduling function(s) can include a link adaptation function, a resource allocation function, a user admittance/dropping function, a handover function, and/or a hybrid automatic repeat request function.06-24-2010
20100216472Apparatus and method for scheduling in wireless communication system - A base station is capable of performing a method for scheduling in a wireless communication system. In the method, a downlink channel measurement value received from a terminal is compared with a threshold. When the downlink channel measurement value is smaller than the threshold, an activation set for a handover of the terminal is determined. When the number of base stations inside the activation set is two or more, a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level is allocated to the terminal with consideration of the downlink channel measurement value. A wireless resource is allocated to the terminal with consideration of the allocated MCS level and a headroom of the terminal.08-26-2010
20100240370METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR A MOBILE BROKER SUPPORTING INTER-RAT, INTER-OPERATOR HANDOVERS - A method for determining an optimal access network by an apparatus is described. The method may include communicating with a first base station as part of a first access network using a first radio access technology (RAT). Information about access networks available to the apparatus may be received from a mobile broker. An optimal access network and the corresponding optimal RAT may be selected based on the received information. The method may also include switching to communications with a second base station using a second RAT.09-23-2010
20100240371SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RESELECTING CELLS IN A CELLULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methods include reselecting and handing over a mobile communication device from a first cell to a second cell in a cellular wireless communication system based on determining whether the signal quality level of the second cell meets or exceeds a signal quality threshold.09-23-2010
20100240372Method of Establishing Multiple Links with Multiple Component Carriers and Related Communication Device - A method of establishing multiple links with multiple component carriers for a mobile device of a wireless communication system, the method includes establishing a first link corresponding to a first component carrier by a first radio resource control procedure, and establishing at least a link corresponding to at least a component carrier by a second RRC procedure according to a first RRC message received in the first link.09-23-2010
20100216470Asymmetric Uplink/Downlink Connections in a Mobile Communication System - A base station reduces interference from user equipment operating in a neighboring cell by monitoring one or more channels of neighboring base stations to receive a signal transmitted by a user equipment that is being served by one of the neighboring base stations, and detecting when a power level of the signal transmitted by the user equipment exceeds a threshold power level. The base station then uses the received signal transmitted by the user equipment to acquire an identifier of the user equipment. The base station then communicates with a network node of the mobile communication system to arrange for it to serve the user equipment itself but in only the uplink direction. The neighboring base station continues to serve the user equipment in the downlink direction in what is now an asymmetrical uplink/downlink connection.08-26-2010
20100216473Methods and Arrangements in a Telecommunication System - The present invention relates to exchanging a cell-specific parameter such as the A-MPR, comprising information related to a required additional maximum power reduction of a UE transmitter between networks nodes. The networks nodes may be radio base stations or other network nodes such as radio network controllers or core network nodes exemplified by access gateways (aGWs). By exchanging this cell-specific parameter with information of the required additional maximum power reduction between the network nodes, the cell-specific parameter is provided to the radio base station of the serving cell which implies that the serving cell can send the cell-specific parameter of the target cell to the UE prior to the handover from the serving cell to the target cell. This result in that the UE can start transmission to the target cell with the correct cell-specific parameter and the out-of-band emission requirements can be fulfilled in the target cell.08-26-2010
20100227615CONVEYING SECTOR LOAD INFORMATION TO MOBILE STATIONS - Improved serving sector selection mechanisms are provided which convey sector load information to a wireless communicator. The wireless communicator can use carrier-to-interference (C/I) ratio measurements and sector load information for each of its Active Set (AS) sectors (or all sectors in its Active Set (AS)) to determine the best serving sector.09-09-2010
20100227614METHOD OF SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN A WIRWLESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are methods of performing handover and supporting thereof in a mobile communication system. The method of supporting handover at a first network entity in a mobile communication system comprises transmitting a plurality of data blocks of a first layer to a user equipment (UE), checking whether each of the plurality of data blocks is successfully transmitted to the user equipment (UE), and transmitting to a second network entity at least one data block of the first layer excluding a data block which is successfully transmitted to the user equipment (UE) among the plurality of data blocks of the first layer, the second network entity being a target network entity for handover of the user equipment (UE).09-09-2010
20100240373HYBRID CELL MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing hybrid cell access points that can support closed subscriber groups (CSG) while providing at least a minimum level of service to wireless devices excluded from the CSG. Hybrid cell access points can allow non-member wireless devices to camp and receive paging signals. Upon receiving a request for resources from non-member wireless devices, hybrid cell access points can handover the non-member wireless devices to an access point that can serve the non-member wireless devices, provide a portion of resources compared to a disparate portion provided to member wireless devices, and/or the like. In addition, hybrid cell access points can vary levels of service and downlink transmission power to provide load balancing for access points. Varying levels of service and downlink transmission power can facilitate additional functionality, such as reducing transmission power to serve member devices while mitigating interference to non-member devices.09-23-2010
20100240369CONTROLLING THE USE OF ACCESS POINTS IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile telecommunications network includes a radio access network with base stations and one or more additional access points. An access point is connected to a network core by an IP transport broadband connection. The access point is configured to appear to a mobile terminal as a conventional base station—that is, for example, it communicates with the mobile terminal using GSM or UMTS transport protocols and does not require any modification to a standard GSM or UMTS mobile terminal. Arrangements are disclosed which monitor the quality of the broadband connection between the access point and the network core and which cause the mobile terminal to handover to a neighbouring base station in the event that the quality of the broadband connection becomes too poor for the class of communication between the mobile terminals registered with the access point to be performed satisfactorily.09-23-2010
20100210268HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INCLUDING FEMTO CELLS - A handover method and apparatus for facilitating a handover of a user equipment to a femto cell in a wireless communication system supporting both the femto and macro cells. When a handover condition is detected, the user equipment acquires identity information of a target femto cell base station from system information transmitted by the target femto cell base station, decides whether to handover to the target femto cell base station, based on the identity information; and transmits a measurement report message including the identity information to a serving base station of the user equipment, when the handover is to be made.08-19-2010
20100210269Method, Apparatus and System for Obtaining Location Area Information during Handover between Heterogeneous Networks - A method obtains area information during handover between heterogeneous networks. A mobility management entity of a destination network receives location area related information of a User Equipment (UE) from a mobility management entity of a source network. The mobility management entity obtains location area information required by the UE according to the location area related information. The mobility management entity sends the location area information required by the UE to the UE.08-19-2010
20120129530Handover Method for Reducing the Amount of Data Forwarded to a Target Node - Method and arrangement in a source radio network node for reducing the amount of user equipment related data forwarded to a target radio network node, when performing a handover of a user equipment. The method comprises determining that the user equipment is to perform a handover from the source radio network node to the target radio network node, increasing the polling frequency of polls sent to the user equipment, transmitting a poll to the user equipment, receiving a status message from the user equipment, as a response to the transmitted poll, dropping the data which, according to the received status message have been acknowledged by the user equipment, and forwarding the data which have not been acknowledged by the user equipment according to the received status message, to the target radio network node.05-24-2012
20100167739Handset Handover - A mobile handset capable of operation on more than one wireless system has means for periodically testing for the availability of at least one system whilst operatively connected to another system, wherein the periodicity of the testing process is made at one rate when a call is in progress and at a second rate when no call is in progress (on standby). This significantly reduces power consumption when on standby, without impairing handover reliability if a call is in progress.07-01-2010
20100167743CENTRALIZED CONTROL OF RELAY OPERATION - Techniques for centralized control of relay operation are described. In an aspect, a designated network entity (e.g., a base station or a network controller) may control the operation of relay stations within its coverage area. The network entity may select certain user equipments (UEs) to be relay UEs that can serve as relay stations for other UEs, e.g., based on pathloss between the UEs and a base station, the locations of the UEs, battery power levels of the UEs, fairness considerations, etc. The network entity may also select a specific relay UE to serve as a relay station for a client UE desiring to communicate with a base station, e.g., based on pilot measurements from relay UEs for the client UE. The network entity may also control transmission of discovery pilots by relay UEs and/or client UEs for relay detection.07-01-2010
20090042574APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A handover apparatus and method in a communication system having a macro BS and a plurality of micro BSs in one cell are provided. A handover apparatus includes a macro BS for generating a plurality of messages, each messages respectively corresponds to one of a plurality of group areas defined by grouping service areas of the micro BSs and includes information about BSs to which MSs of the group area can perform handover. The macro BS also generates group area information indicating locations of the group areas, broadcasts the plurality of messages and the group area information to the cell, and manages handover of MSs based on the plurality of messages and the group area information.02-12-2009
20090042572Cell change in cellular networks - The invention relates to a handover or cell change procedure in a cellular radio communications system comprising a mobile user terminal present in a serving cell and having multiple radio resources simultaneously allocated for communication with a base station of the cell. In this procedure, when there is a need for a cell change, the multiple radio resources are sequentially replaced with radio resources allocated to the terminal for communication with at least one base station having an associated cell different from the serving cell. This cell change procedure provides macro diversity without requiring the complexity of soft handovers and has enhanced service coverage and handover robustness compared to hard handover.02-12-2009
20100210267REDIRECTION METHOD OF FEMTO CELL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED THEREON - A redirection method of a femto cell is provided together with a communication system based thereon. A serving gateway, connected with a specific femto cell, or an additional server determines whether there is a need for a redirection of the femto cell by using a load condition of the serving gateway or a target gateway. If the redirection is determined, the femto cell receives redirection instructions from the serving gateway to the target gateway and then the redirection is performed. Since the femto cell is redirected from the overloaded femto gateway to another femto gateway, the femto cell can continuously provide a communication service to user terminals.08-19-2010
20120196603MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system hybridly allows, in a case where an access group consisting of one or more user equipments and one or more base stations is registered, the base station included in the access group to have access in a closed mode from the user equipment included in the same access group and access in an open mode from a user equipment that is not included in the same access group, wherein a communication area of the base station in the open mode is identical to a communication area of the base station in the closed mode. This eliminates a communication area in which the base station serving as an access destination differs between the user equipment in the closed mode and the user equipment in the open mode.08-02-2012
20090075659Apparatus and method for allocating resources based on error vector magnitude (EVM) in a broadband wireless communication system - A resource allocation in a broadband wireless communication system is provided. An apparatus for a base station in a broadband wireless communication system includes a manager for managing resources by dividing the resources into a plurality of regions based on a maximum supportable error vector magnitude (EVM) in a frequency axis; and an allocator for allocating resources of a region other than a first region, the region having the smallest maximum supportable EVM, to a service to which a maximum modulation and coding scheme (MCS) level is not applied.03-19-2009
20090075656MEASUREMENTS IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method of performing compressed mode measurements for selecting communication means in a communication system. Statistics are collected on handovers from a cell in a communications system to a plurality of other cells in the communications system. A cell load of each cell of the plurality of other cells is weighted by a percentage of handovers from the cell to the respective one of the plurality of other cells. A threshold is determined based on the weighted cell loads. The threshold can be used to trigger a load based handover from the cell to one of the plurality of other cells.03-19-2009
20090075655MOBILE PHONE NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - This invention relates to systems and methods for managing and optimizing mobile phone networks. A system for maintaining or optimizing a mobile phone network, the system includes a plurality of data feed inputs including at least one performance data feed input to receive performance data relating to performance of said mobile phone network over a first time period and at least one configuration data feed input to receive configuration data relating to configuration of said mobile phone network over a second time period; and a radio performance optimization system coupled to said plurality of data feed inputs, said radio performance optimization system including a rules engine to operate on said performance data and on said configuration data in accordance with a set of hierarchical rules and to output one or more tasks for network optimization, a said task including a definition of a potential fault, exception or optimization of said network to be investigated by a service engineer.03-19-2009
20100056155WIRELESS BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS SIGNAL - A wireless base station apparatus includes a reporting unit which reports information on a first transmission area that allows transmission of a random access signal. Accordingly, the first transmission area is wholly reported to mobile station apparatuses within an area of the wireless base station apparatus. That is, both a mobile station apparatus in a non-handover state and a mobile station apparatus in a handover state receive the first transmission area information (report information) and use the first transmission area as a transmission area for transmitting a random access signal to the wireless base station apparatus. The wireless base station apparatus also has a notifying unit which notifies a second transmission area to a mobile station apparatus in a handover state, the second transmission area being different from the first transmission area reported by the reporting unit of the handover-destination wireless base station apparatus.03-04-2010
20100113023Method and Apparatus For Setting Discontinuous Communication Interval - An approach is provided for assigning a discontinuous communication interval to a user equipment that is served by a cell associated with a wireless network. The discontinuous communication interval is modified based on speed of the user equipment and size of the cell.05-06-2010
20120142355COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A user communications device having active and idle states operates in a cellular communications network in which user communications devices communicate via network communications devices of cells of the network. History data identifying the cells in which the user communications device has camped whilst in the idle mode or identifying the cells in which the mobile device has been connected whilst in the connected mode is maintained. This history data can be used to identify a home base station.06-07-2012
20120142353COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which mobile telephones that are members of closed subscriber groups associated with home base stations are able to roam between neighbouring home node base stations in a manner that reduces load on the core network.06-07-2012
20110111759CONTROLLING RESELECTION FROM ACCESS POINTS IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A GSM or UMTS mobile telecommunications network is disclosed. In addition to the conventional radio access network comprising macro base station, one or more additional access points are provided. The access point is connected to the network core by an IP transport broadband connection. The access point is configured to appear to the mobile terminal as a conventional base station—that is, it communicates with the mobile terminal using GSM or UMTS transport protocols and does not require any modification to a standard GSM or UMTS mobile terminal. A subscriber may be provided with a designated “home” access point to provide coverage in their premises. Arrangements are described which will tend to reduce the likelihood that reselection to the macro base station while radio coverage is available from the home access point.05-12-2011
20100197310METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CELL SELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing cell selection is provided. The apparatus includes a memory configured to store basic priorities of a plurality of frequencies, and a processor configured to measure the signal strength of at least one cell in at least one of the plurality of frequencies, and perform cell selection based on an overrided priority if a cell with a highest measured signal strength is a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell and the highest measured signal strength is greater than a CSG threshold. When the quality of a serving CSG cell deteriorates, another cell from a different frequency may be selected.08-05-2010
20100069070LOCATION-ASSISTED NETWORK ENTRY, SCAN AND HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus for using a location of a mobile station (MS) to assist network entry and initialization, scanning, and/or handover operations in a radio access technology (RAT), such as WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access), are provided. The location of the MS may be ascertained by determining the Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates of the MS internally or by receiving the location from a GPS device external to the MS. Knowledge of the current or future location of the MS may reduce the amount of base station (BS) information transmitted to the MS; may reduce the power consumption and the amount of time spent during network entry, scanning, or handover; and may increase the bandwidth usage efficiency.03-18-2010
20110028151ACTIVATION TIME FOR TARGET BASED HIGH SPEED SERVING CELL CHANGE - A method for setting up an activation time of a cell change of user equipment includes receiving a timing offset from a network controller through an active set update procedure and calculating a high speed downlink shared channel cell change activation time based on the timing offset. The activation time indicates when the user equipment can move to the target cell. The method also includes transmitting the calculated activation time to the network controller and receiving an approval of the downlink shared channel high speed cell change from the network controller. Additionally, the method includes moving from the serving cell to the target cell at the activation time if the approval has been received.02-03-2011
20100197309VIRTUAL GROUPS FOR FEMTO-CELL HAND-IN - Techniques, apparatuses, and systems for handling femto-cell hand-in requests can include operating a macro-cell base station to provide wireless service to wireless devices in a geographical coverage area; receiving, from a wireless device, a message indicative of the wireless device's reception of a base station radio signal, the message including a base station identifier; controlling multiple femto-cell base stations that are assigned to the base station identifier to communicate with the wireless device and to report a reception of a radio signal from the wireless device; and transferring the wireless device from the macro-cell base station to a femto-cell base station of the multiple femto-cell base stations that reports a reception of the radio signal from the wireless device. The multiple femto-cell base stations can provide wireless service in different nonadjacent portions of the geographical coverage area.08-05-2010
20090203378MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE THEREOF, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND DATABASE CONSTRUCTING METHOD - A mobile communication system comprises base stations, a mobile terminal and a control device. The mobile terminal comprises a report unit reports a reception power of a radio wave from a current station and a next station to the control device for each base station switch processing. The control device comprises a calculation unit calculates a first distance and a second distance. The first distance is the distance between the current station and the mobile terminal. The second distance is the distance between the next station and the mobile terminal. The control device comprises a database stores distance data between the base stations. The control device comprises an update unit updates the distance data by a minimum value of a sum of the first and the second distances.08-13-2009
20090082022Mobile station messaging for ciphering in an unlicensed wireless communication system - An unlicensed wireless service is adapted to generate the interface protocols of a licensed wireless service to provide transparent transition of communication sessions between a licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. In one embodiment, a mobile station includes level 1, level 2, and level 3 protocols for licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. An indoor base station and indoor network controller provide protocol conversion for the unlicensed wireless service into a standard base station controller interface of the licensed wireless service.03-26-2009
20090247165CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A cellular communication system comprises a core network, a first access network not supporting circuit switched services and a second access network supporting circuit switched services. A user equipment detects that an application using circuit switched communication is initiated and accordingly initiates a reselection from the first to the second access network. The user equipment transmits a location update message to a circuit switch mobile switching centre of the core network which in response notifies a mobility management entity for the first access network that the access network reselection has been initiated. In response to the notification the mobility management entity initiates a change of a routing association from being with the first access network to being with the second access network. The invention may e.g. allow improved circuit switched fallback for a 310-01-2009
20120244863SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC SERVICE OFFERING BASED ON AVAILABLE RESOURCES - A system and method is disclosed to dynamically alter service offerings to a user based on the available network resources. As network resources are diminished, the end user will see less available services so as to avoid diminished network performance. If network performance improvements, the system detects the improved network recourse availability and provides more offerings to the end user.09-27-2012
20090143068Terminal for handover using channel characteristics and control method thereof - A terminal for handover using channel characteristics and a control method thereof are provided. Reception level information is received from a neighboring base station. A state of the neighboring base station having transmitted the reception level information is measured. A corresponding neighboring base station to which the handover is possible is selected using a corrected reception level value by computing the corrected reception level value using a value of the reception level information received from the neighboring base station and a channel characteristic value of the neighboring base station. A better neighboring base station for the handover can be selected by applying a reception level based on detected channel characteristics (quality) of a corresponding neighboring base station even when an actually measured reception level of the neighboring base station is high.06-04-2009
20090111469METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BASED ON DYNAMIC BEAMFORMING SCHEME - A method and apparatus for handover based on a dynamic beamforming scheme, which is adapted to a mobile communication system including a mobile node and a base station, is provided. The apparatus includes a mobile profile information processor configured to process mobile profile information based on a location of the mobile node, and to generate a beamforming control signal according to the mobile profile information; a handover indication message processor configured to generate a first handover indication message incorporating the mobile profile information in preparation for a handover of the mobile node; a transceiver configured to transmit the first handover indication message; and a beamforming controller configured to control beamforming for transmission of the transceiver according to the beamforming control signal.04-30-2009
20090042571MOBILE STATION AND FEEDBACK INFORMATION GENERATING METHOD - The present invention provides a mobile station for communicating with a radio base station wherein a closed loop transmit diversity for transmission with use of a plurality of antennas is applied to the radio base station, comprising: a feedback information control unit controlling a feedback information control process based on the number of radio base stations simultaneously communicating with the mobile station. The mobile station can generate feedback information suitable for a shared physical channel in an intra-cell handover. On the other hand, the mobile station can generate feedback information suitable for a dedicated physical channel in an inter-cell handover.02-12-2009
20080261600RADIO LINK AND HANDOVER FAILURE HANDLING - The method and apparatus disclosed are used for handling RL and handover failures based on context transfer details and RACH procedures that enhance the failure handling procedures. After an RL failure, a user equipment (UE) includes the identity of an evolved Node-B (eNodeB) and/or cell as an information element (IE) in an RRC connection request and/or a cell update message or any other RRC message along with a UE identity.10-23-2008
20100297996RADIO TERMINAL, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - A radio terminal (11-25-2010
20090047957Sectioned Common Control Channels in Cellular Networks - A propagated control channel signal for use in a shared radio access network is disclosed. The control channel signal comprises common control data for use by mobile terminals authorized to access the shared radio access network and operator-specific data for use by those of the mobile terminals that are associated with a first mobile operator. The common control data may comprise handover-related data for handovers within the shared radio access network and the operator-specific data may comprise handover-related data for handovers from the shared radio access network to an unshared radio access network having overlapping coverage with the shared radio access network. The common control data and the operator-specific data may comprise values for one or more mobile terminal settings, wherein the operator-specific values are for use instead of the common values by those of the mobile terminals that are associated with the first mobile operator. Methods and apparatus for using and generating the disclosed propagated control channel signals are also disclosed.02-19-2009
20100279694DISPLAY PANEL STRUCTURE, ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING THE SAME, AND MOBILE INFORMATION EQUIPMENT - A display panel includes a display element having, on a front face of the display element, a screen, and a metal holding member for holding the display element together on a back face of the display element. A holding member is provided with a plurality of catch portions that extend from a back face of the holding member and grip end edge portions of the printed circuit board, and is also provided with a plurality of projections that project, around each of the plurality of catch portions, from the back face of the holding member. A printed circuit board is gripped by the plurality of catch portions provided on the back face of the holding member, and ground patterns provided on a surface of the printed circuit board come into close contact with the plurality of projections, so that an electrical connection is made between the display panel and the printed circuit board.11-04-2010
20130130688Methods and Mechanisms for Managing Prioirty Calls in a Cell - A method is provided for managing a priority call in a serving cell. The method comprises, when a priority call is in progress in the serving cell, performing at least one of preventing at least one non-priority call from being handed over into the serving cell and preventing at least one non-priority call from being initiated in the serving cell.05-23-2013
20130130690HANDOVER PROCEDURES AND SIGNALLING FOR PLANNED CELL OUTAGE IN WIRELESS CELLULAR NETWORKS - A method of controlling handover in wireless cellular networks of user equipment in a first cell unit which is to be disabled to a second cell unit which is to provide extended coverage for the, or part of the, first cell unit, where the cell unit of the first and second cell units is a cell or a cell sector, including selecting a part of the signal bandwidth or time-frequency resource units, previously designated for use in normal operation by the second cell unit, which does not overlap with that to be used by the first cell unit during the handover; and designating the selected part for use by the user equipment to be handed over from the first cell unit.05-23-2013
20130130692MECHANISM TO UPDATE THE CSG CELL ACCESS CHECK UPON PLMN CHANGE AT HANDOVER - Solving dual errors for user equipment UE checking whether a private cell is allowed when handing over between serving and target cells, where the PLMN and/or EPLMNs list of the serving and target cells may differ. The serving cell may send a one-bit indication that there is a change in a handover command or system information SI6 message after which the UE may or may not refrain from reporting new cells until it performs a registration/location area update in the target cell. The target cell may trigger in the UE a registration update then provide the UE with the PLMN of the target cell. The serving cell can provide the PLMN of the target cell in a SI6 message or handover command, which the UE may use in place of or in addition to the PLMN/EPLMN of the serving cell when checking whether a private/closed subscriber group cell is allowed.05-23-2013
20100279693METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROCESS SIGNAL STRENGTHS OF NOT ALLOWED CELLS DURING CELL RESELECTION - Methods and apparatus to process signal strengths of not allowed cells during cell reselection are disclosed. An example cell reselection method disclosed herein comprises obtaining cell information indicating whether signal strength of a first neighbor cell not allowed for cell reselection is to be considered during cell reselection, and reselecting to a second neighbor cell different from the first neighbor cell based on the cell information.11-04-2010
20100279692MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND EXCHANGE - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, from a NAS function to an S1-AP function, a NAS-PDU; transmitting, from the S1-AP function to the NAS function, a retransmission request for the NAS-PDU, when receiving a notification, which indicates completion of a handover of a mobile station (UE), from a handover target radio base station (eNB), after receiving an S1-AP response message, *which indicates that transfer of the NAS-PDU to the mobile station (UE) through a radio interface has failed, from the handover source radio base station (eNB); and retransmitting, from the NAS function to the S1-AP function, the NAS-PDU, in response to the retransmission request.11-04-2010
20100311422Apparatus and method for determining neighbor BS information in a wireless communication system - An apparatus and method determines neighbor Base Station (BS) information in a wireless communication system where a macro cell and a Femto cell coexist. The method includes, when a preamble scanning duration arrives, acquiring preamble information on at least one neighbor BS through preamble scanning. It is determined whether to scan a header for at least one neighbor BS among neighbor BSs for which the preamble information are acquired, in consideration of at least one of the acquisition or non-acquisition of new preamble information through the preamble scanning and a variation of an environment of a preamble acquired through the preamble scanning. And, in case that it is determined to scan the header, a header for a corresponding neighbor BS is scanned and header information of the neighbor BS is acquired.12-09-2010
20100311421Methods and Apparatus for Communications Terminal Enabling Self Optimizing Networks in Air Interface Communications Systems - Systems and methods for providing a framework for supporting a self organizing/optimization network (SON) feature in an over the air communications system. An enhanced mobile communications device is provided that performs functions to creating a framework for enhancing SON algorithms. The communications device stores event analysis data in an on board memory and, on certain conditions, signals the analysis to the network. The analysis includes information useful in performing SON algorithms at the network level, such as cell coverage and neighboring cell signal level information, cell selection and reselection information at different locations, relative signal strength between cell base stations at different locations, and coverage hole information. Utilizing the stored information, the network can automatically perform SON algorithms to improve network efficiency without the need for manual intervention by an operator. Embodiments include event filtering by the communications device to efficiently utilize the on board storage.12-09-2010
20100304748Apparatus and Method for Handover in a Communication System - An apparatus, method and system for providing management and execution of handover or redirection of user equipment in a communication system. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes a processor and memory including computer program code. The memory and the computer program code are configured to, with the processor, cause the apparatus to receive a command from a source base instructing the apparatus to decode a physical downlink control channel associated with a target base station, and determine if a cell radio network temporary identifier from the source base station matches an assigned cell radio network temporary identifier on the physical downlink control channel from the target base station.12-02-2010
20100311420Apparatus and Method for Improved Idle State Handoff - A method and apparatus for facilitating handoff operations in a wireless communication device is provided. The method may comprise receiving, by a wireless communication device, a plurality of pilot signals, wherein the plurality of pilot signals includes an active pilot signal and one or more candidate pilot signals, selecting at least one nominal active pilot signal strength value for comparison with the active pilot signal, classifying the one or more candidate pilot signals into a respective one of a plurality of tiers based on a handoff factor corresponding to the at least one candidate pilot signal, wherein the plurality of tiers are divided according to one or more handoff factors, and selecting at least one threshold handoff value for each of the plurality of tiers, wherein the at least one threshold handoff value partly depends on one of the at least one nominal active pilot signal strength values.12-09-2010
20090069014NON-REAL-TIME SELECTION OF DISTRIBUTED DHO NODES - The present invention relates to an arrangement adapted to be located in a network node, e.g. in a RNC, in a mobile communication network. The arrangement selects at least one diversity handover, DHO, node, that is to perform macro diversity functions, amongst the nodes of the mobile communication network comprising macro diversity functionality means. The selection is based on base station combinations of said mobile communication network. The arrangement comprises means for retrieving at least one DHO node, that is to perform macro diversity functions, from a database comprising base station combinations of said mobile communication network and a pre-calculated DHO node selection for each such base station combination. The present invention also relates to said database. The database comprises means for storing base station combinations of said mobile communication network and means for storing a pre-calculated Diversity Handover node selection for each such base station combination.03-12-2009
20090069013HANDOVER BETWEEN RADIO NETWORKS - A communication system (03-12-2009
20130143561METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING CELLULAR NETWORKS OPERATION - A computing platform is provided which is adapted to enable optimizing operation of a cellular network, wherein the computing platform is operative to: (a) probe for information exchanged between a mobile access network and a core network; (b) retrieve statistical KPIs generated from a plurality of network elements belonging to the cellular network; (c) generate a predictive Key Performance Indicator (pKPI) by correlating the probed information with the retrieved statistical KPIs, thereby enabling to predict a trend characterizing future performance of network elements such as cells; and (d) trigger changes in the operation of the cellular network based on the predicted trend, and wherein the probing for information exchanged between a mobile access network and a core network is carried out at a rate which is substantially higher than a rate of retrieving statistical KPIs generated from the plurality of network elements.06-06-2013
20100323699RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND RADIO LINK SETTING METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system, including: a first and second base stations; and a terminal, the first base station includes a first position information acquisition unit which acquires position information of the first base station; a first control unit which generates a new-installation massage including the position information and indicating that the first base station is a newly installed base station and transmits the message to the second base station, transmits a signal link establishment request message to each second base station in the number capable of transmitting to the terminal as adjacent cell information when the first base station receives a new-installation response message responding to the new-installation message from the second base station, generates the adjacent cell information indicating that the second base station transmitted a signal link establishment response message is an adjacent base station.12-23-2010
20100323701Method and Apparatus for Providing Seamless Call Handoff Between Networks That Use Dissimilar Transmission Methods - Call handoff from an 802.1x network to a cellular network, and vice versa. A wireless device that has both cellular and 802.1x capability detects the strength of a cellular signal and of an 802.1x signal. If a call is taking place over the 802.1x network and the strength of the 802.1x signal drops below a particular level and the strength of the cellular signal is above a certain level, the call is handed off from the 802.1x network to the cellular network. If a call is taking place over the cellular network and the cellular signal strength drops below a certain level while the 802.1x signal strength is above a certain level, the call is handed off from the cellular network to the 802.1x network. In addition, the user of the wireless device can manually initiate the handoff by actuating a handoff selector of the wireless device.12-23-2010
20090036130SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING VOICE SERVICE IN A MULTIMEDIA MOBILE NETWORK - User Equipment (UE) receiving non-voice packet switched service in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Terrestial Radio Access Network (eUTRAN) cell undergoes handover to a circuit switched GSM/Edge Radio Access Network (GERAN)/UTRAN cell in response to a requirement for voice service. The voice service is established in the circuit switched domain of a GERAN/UTRAN cell to ensure service continuity regardless of UE mobility that would otherwise not be possible if the voice service was established in the eUTRAN cell. A Gs-like interface between a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the CS Core Network and the Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the Evolved Packet Core provides an interface for page requests and location update procedures to be performed.02-05-2009
20090036129BASE STATION AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A base station according to the present invention includes: a data storage unit 02-05-2009
20090036128METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC CALL ANCHORING - Calls to/from one or more devices operated by a subscriber are dynamically anchored as a need is imposed by mobility of the subscriber. A dynamic call anchoring client application that operates on the one or more devices operated by the subscriber may determine when criteria are satisfied for handover of a call in progress form an enterprise network to another network, or vice versa. Replaces functionality in a switch in the enterprise network is used to effect the dynamic call anchoring by replacing a call leg anchored in one of the networks with a call leg anchored in the other of the networks.02-05-2009
20100323698Systems and Methods For Selecting a Network Access System - A system according to some embodiments of the invention includes (1) a component (e.g. ANDSF) that provides a cell selection rule to a UE and (2) a component (e.g. an access node) that provides the UE with information about the load in the cell currently utilized by the UE. This enables the UE to determine whether to leave the cell, which may be a 3GPP cell, and use a different cell, which may be a non-3GPP cell, by applying the cell selection rule in conjunction with its knowledge about the load of the cell.12-23-2010
20090239539TIMING AND CELL SPECIFIC SYSTEM INFORMATION HANDLING FOR HANDOVER IN EVOLVED UTRA - A method and apparatus for reducing handover time includes a wireless transmit receive unit receiving cell specific information in a downlink signal. The downlink signal is one of a set of signals included in a handover process.09-24-2009
20110003594HANDOVER BETWEEN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The invention provides a method of handover from an active network to a selected one of a plurality of potential other networks. In addition to the overall solution, the solution proposed has several individual aspects. All subsidiary aspects are related to the common problem mentioned above and sharing the underlying common solution concept of implementing a system in which selective handover is possible and in which a list of available other networks provided by an active network can be handled and selection made by a terminal, so that neighbor cell information can be transmitted based on expressed terminal preferences.01-06-2011
20100330993Method of Initiating Handover Pre-preparation and Related Communication Device - A method of initiating handover pre-preparation for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of receiving a pre-prepared handover command from a source base station, wherein the pre-prepared handover command includes context of a target base station, whereby the mobile device does not perform a handover procedure based on the pre-prepared handover command and keeping the context for a period of time.12-30-2010
20100330998METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING RADIO ACCESS INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method of transmitting and receiving radio access information that allows a faster and an efficient way of establishing a radio connection between a terminal and a target base station while performing a handover for the terminal to a cell of the target base station. The network transmits in advance, the radio access information and the like, to the terminal so that the terminal can be connected with the target cell in a faster manner which minimizes the total time for the handover process.12-30-2010
20100330997MOBILE COMMUNICATION ACCESS POINT - An repeater device (12-30-2010
20100330994BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND HANDOVER METHOD - When a handover request for performing a handover of a terminal (12-30-2010
20110039565METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING A SEQUENCE ENABLING THE IDENTIFICATION OF THE HOME BASE STATION BY A MOBILE TERMINAL - The present invention concerns a method for transferring in a wireless cellular telecommunication network, a sequence enabling the identification, by a mobile terminal, of the home base station, the symbols transferred between the home base station and the mobile terminal being separated by a guard period. The home base station: 02-17-2011
20110039564LOAD BALANCING IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A cellular access point, amongst a plurality of interconnected cellular access points receives from a first user equipment a connection attempt that would cause the access point to exceed a first predetermined capacity threshold. The cellular access point selects one of the previously connected user equipments and an associated one of the plurality of interconnected cellular access points. The cellular access point initiates a handover of the selected one of the previously connected user equipments to the associated one of the plurality of interconnected cellular access points and establishes a connection with the first user equipment.02-17-2011
20110039563METHOD OF ALLOCATING CID FOR FAST HANDOVER - A handover performing method and a method of allocating a connection identifier (CID) at the time of handover are disclosed. The method includes transmitting a handover request message to a serving base station, and receiving a handover response message including CID update information used in a target base station from the serving base station. At this time, the CID update information may include a transport CID (TCID) allocation start position and a TCID allocable value used in the target base station. Accordingly, it is possible to minimize service delay of a mobile station by providing a method of updating the CID of the mobile station for performing fast handover.02-17-2011
20110039562SESSION-SPECIFIC SIGNALING FOR MULTIPLE ACCESS NETWORKS OVER A SINGLE ACCESS NETWORK - Providing for call-specific signaling for call-setup on multiple wireless communication systems via a single wireless access network is described herein. By way of example, a communication context for a mobile device can be established on a first radio access network (RAN). Additionally, call-specific signaling for a wireless session to be conducted by the mobile device over a second RAN can be conducted over the first RAN. Such signaling can be done, for instance, in preparation for an application or wireless session not supported by the first RAN. In addition, upon identifying an invitation for such an application or wireless session involving the mobile device, the mobile device can be switched to the second RAN, while session bindings on the first RAN can be maintained, ported to the second RAN, or terminated. Accordingly, the subject disclosure can reduce signaling complexity while integrating services of diverse deployments of wireless networks.02-17-2011
20110039561Mitigation of Uplink Interference from Wireless Communication Device Connected to a Micro Cell - A wireless communication device configured to obtain at least a portion of a power parameter of a first serving cell when connected to the first serving cell, switch the link of the wireless communication device from the first serving cell to a second serving cell, determine, based on the portion of the power parameter, a maximum acceptable transmit power of the wireless communication device for use after the wireless communication device switches its link from the first serving cell to the second serving cell, and limit a transmit power of the wireless communication device, based on the maximum acceptable transmit power, when the wireless communication device is connected to the second serving cell.02-17-2011
20110009119Handover of a User Equipment with Forwarding and Reusing a User Equipment Configuration - It is described a method for handing over a User Equipment from a first to a second base station of a telecommunication network. The described method includes establishing a first connection between the User Equipment and the first base station, arranging a current configuration of the User Equipment with the first base station, forwarding the current configuration to the second base station via a terrestrial interface, establishing a second connection between the User Equipment and the second base station, and reusing the forwarded configuration for the operation of the User Equipment, when the User Equipment is served by the second base station. A set of configuration parameters of the User Equipment is known by the first and the second base station as a default configuration and the current configuration of the User Equipment is forwarded from the first base station to the second base station by solely forwarding configuration parameters deviating from the default configuration.01-13-2011
20110009120Domain Transferring Method for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity - A domain transferring method for the single radio voice call continuity, a UE accesses via an LTE/SAE network, and sets up an IMS session anchored at a VCC AS with a remote node; when an S-IWF receives a handover request used to transfer the session to make the session access from a CS domain, the method comprises: the LTE/SAE network sends a handover command to the UE, the UE sends a handover complete message to a target access device after receiving the handover command; after the UE sends the handover complete message, or after the S-IWF receives the handover complete message, a release session notification message is sent to a VCC AS; after receiving the session release notification message, the VCC AS releases the session resources of the session.01-13-2011
20100178922Apparatus and method for handover in mobile communication system - An apparatus and method for handover in a mobile communication system enables a Mobile Station (MS) to perform a normal handover without performing an unnecessary handover. A Base Station (BS) apparatus capable of preventing an unnecessary handover includes a handover manager. The handover manager receives handover information, including information about at least one cell through which an MS has passed, from a neighbor cell to determine whether the MS has performed an unnecessary handover. If it is determined that the MS has performed an unnecessary handover, the handover manager notifies the occurrence of the unnecessary handover by the MS to the neighbor cell.07-15-2010
20130150043METHOD OF RELIABLE RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORK DUPLICATION FOR HIGH SPEED TRAIN AND RADIO COMMUNICATION-BASED HIGH SPEED TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method of reliable radio communication network duplication for a high speed train and a radio communication-based high speed train control system are provided. For the construction of radio communication network duplication of a high speed train control system, radio communication networks can be alternately disposed so that handover delay and disconnection at the interface between communication cells can be prevented during the handover at the same time.06-13-2013
20110045833Method and Arrangement for Handover or Cell Reselection Evaluation - A method in a base station for configuring a wireless terminal for performing a cell reselection or handover evaluation process “evaluation process” is provided. The wireless terminal is arranged to perform multiple evaluation processes parallel to each other, which multiple evaluation processes are governed by different set of mobility parameters. The base station determines (02-24-2011
20110130142FEMTOCELL, BASE STATION, FEMTO GATEWAY, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A femtocell, a base station, a femto gateway, and communication methods thereof are provided. The femtocell is connected to the femto gateway via the base station. The femtocell turns off its RF transceiver when the RF transceiver is idle for a predetermined time interval. When the base station determines that a mobile station enters its signal coverage, the base station transmits a notification signal to the femto gateway. After receiving the notification signal, the femto gateway transmits a turn-on signal to the femtocell via the base station. After receiving the turn-on signal, the femtocell turns on its RF transceiver and transmits an acknowledgement signal to the femto gateway. Since the femtocell only turns on its RF transceiver when a mobile station needs its service, the femtocell consumes less power. In addition, interferences between femtocells can be reduced.06-02-2011
20110130141Network and Method for Optimizing Cell Reselection by Using an Estimation of Mobility of a Mobile Terminal - The mobile telecommunications network (n) has at least one mobile terminal (06-02-2011
20110117918WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing a message in a mobile, telecommunications device. The method comprises: receiving a Cell Update Confirm (CUC) message; determining whether the device has an empty C_RNTI variable; when the device has an empty C_RNTI variable, determining whether the CUC message includes a new C_RNTI; when the CUC message includes a new C_RNTI and the CUC message would cause the device to enter a state which requires the UE to respond to the message before entering the state, carrying out at least one further step prior to entering the state.05-19-2011
20110117919METHOD OF COMMUNICATING SIGNALS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of communicating signals in a mobile communication system having a first base station, a second base station, and a base station controlling node controlling the first base station and the second base station is presented. The method includes during a handover, receiving, at the first base station, a control message from the second base station including a sequence number indicating at least one data unit to be transmitted to a mobile station or to be received from a mobile station, wherein the first base station receives the control message from the second base station without being controlled by the base station controlling node.05-19-2011
20110117916METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FREQUENCY ACCESS RESTRICTION IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS - A Network node provides information to a base station indicating a list of forbidden frequency from which the base station may or may not offer services. The base station checks the received list of forbidden frequencies when considering whether to provide service to user equipments from a new tracking area or a certain access technology. The base may also transmit a list of allowed frequencies or the list of forbidden frequencies to user equipments to be used thereof. By introducing the possibility to set an amount of frequencies as forbidden in the area and access restriction information of user equipments, operators would be able to offer services like home base station in a simple way to customers.05-19-2011
20110117917METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR DETERMINING A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICE TO WHICH A HAND-OVER OF A MOBILE TERMINAL HAS TO BE CONDUCTED - The present invention concerns a method for determining a wireless telecommunication device to which a hand-over of a mobile terminal has to be conducted, wherein plural wireless cellular telecommunication devices transfer the same physical cell identity to mobile terminals. The method comprises the steps of: 05-19-2011
20110244864Methods And Apparatus For Selecting A Base Station Transceiver System Based On Service Communication Type - Techniques for use in selecting a base station transceiver system for communication with a mobile station are described. The mobile station is connected to a first base station transceiver system, and scans to identify a second base station transceiver system for communication. The mobile station further identifies that the second base station transceiver system provides a predetermined communication service, and that the first base station transceiver system fails to provide the predetermined communication service. In response to identifying, the mobile station causes the second base station transceiver system to be selected for communication over the first base station transceiver system even if the signal quality of the second base station transceiver system is worse than that of the first base station transceiver system. Identifying whether the first and second base station transceiver system provide the predetermined communication service is based on parameters transmitted from the first and second base station transceiver systems.10-06-2011
20110244862MOBILITY CONTROL SYSTEMS AND MOBILITY CONTROL METHODS - Base stations notify the mobile terminal of area information that represents communication areas; a mobile terminal decides a handover destination base station based on position information of the mobile terminal and the area information concerning which the base stations notify the mobile terminal and transmits a handover request to the base station; the base stations request a base station with which the mobile terminal is communicating for communication information of the mobile terminal if the base stations receive the handover request that the mobile terminal transmits; the base stations notify a base station of the communication information of the mobile terminal if the base stations are requested for the communication information of the mobile terminal; and the base stations perform a handover process for the mobile terminal based on the communication information if the base stations acquire the communication information concerning which the base station notifies the base stations of the communication information of the mobile terminal.10-06-2011
20110086638METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POWER AND HANDOVER MANAGEMENT IN A MULTIPLE WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Method and apparatuses for power and handoff management in a multiple wireless technology communication device are disclosed. One method includes a wireless device communicating using a first technology, and detecting availability of a second technology. Logic control of the wireless device receives a power level indicator of communication signals of the first technology, and determining an acceptable power level of communication signals of the second technology based on the power level indicator. The logic control determines a requested power level of communication signals of the second technology based on a request from a base station. The logic control provides a modified link quality representation to the base station if the requested power level is greater than the acceptable power level. The wireless device transmits to the base station with the second technology at the acceptable power level.04-14-2011
20110086639Method and Apparatus for Handover Procedure in Communication Network with Relay Extension - An enhanced solution for controlling a handover procedure for handing a terminal device over from a source cell to a target cell in a communication network with relay nodes is provided. In the solution, the relay nodes actively assist in the handover procedure by, for instance, initiating the handover procedure, configuring a relayed link and buffering user data at the relay node.04-14-2011
20100029279METHOD FOR COMPULSORILY PERFORMING HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for enabling a mobile station existing in a serving cell area to perform a handover procedure in a broadband mobile communication system including the mobile station, a serving base station providing a service to the mobile station, and one or more target base stations containing at least one target cell area overlapping with the serving cell area occupied by the serving base station. The method includes transmitting a handover request message from the mobile station to the serving base station when it is detected that a performance of a handover is necessary; and transmitting a handover indication message containing handover cancel information to the serving base station when the mobile station determines a cancel of the handover while the mobile station is being handed over to one or more target base stations by the serving base station.02-04-2010
20110130143MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, GENERAL BASE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND BASE STATION STATUS CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communications system is disclosed. The mobile communications system includes a first unit, provided at a base station apparatus, which controls a base station status by determining a request from an upper-layer general base station apparatus; and a second unit, provided at the general base station apparatus, which monitors for one or more mobile station apparatuses entering into/appearing in, or exiting/disappearing from a cell formed by the general base station apparatus, and, if at least one of the mobile station apparatuses enters into/appears in the cell formed by the general base station apparatus, requests for changing the base station apparatus to a service status, and, if all of the mobile station apparatuses exit/disappear from the cell formed by the general base station apparatus, requests for changing the base station apparatus to a radio unit stop status.06-02-2011
20090233601METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVED HANDOVER OF MOBILE STATIONS OUT OF UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS NETWORKS - The present invention provides a system and various methods for handover of a mobile station (MS) (09-17-2009
20090312021METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA FOR HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A data transmission method in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The present invention is suitable for retaining continuity of a data service in case that a mobile subscriber station carries out handover. The present invention includes the steps of receiving a message information (S12-17-2009
20110086640MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention is to communicate between a mobile station (UE) and a radio base station (eNB) by using a certain key generated using a first key. The mobile communication method includes the steps of: updating, at the mobile station (UE), the first key upon receiving a handover command signal from the radio base station (eNB); transmitting, from the mobile station (UE) to the radio base station (eNB), a handover complete signal by using the certain key generated using the updated first key; and performing, at the mobile station (UE), a cell selection processing when failing to transmit the handover complete signal and detecting a radio link failure, and transmitting, from the mobile station to a selected re-establishment target cell, a re-establishment request signal by using the first key before being updated.04-14-2011
20110244865METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR USER DETACHMENT WHEN A HANDOVER OR CHANGE OCCURS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A method for user detachment when a handover or change occurs in a heterogeneous network is provided. The method includes: a user equipment (UE) is handed over or switched from a source network to a target network; a network element on a network side determines whether to detach the UE from the source network, and if yes, the network element on the network side detaches the UE from the source network. A system and a device for user detachment when a handover or change occurs in a heterogeneous network, and another method for user detachment when a handover or change occurs in a heterogeneous network are also provided.10-06-2011
20090247167WIRELESS DEVICE - A wireless device and technology operable to optimize communications during an emergency is disclosed. The wireless device can detect communication congestion in a base station, and search for alternate base stations that can provide annunciation information during the emergency. If a suitable base station can be found, handoff is made and the annunciation information is acquired.10-01-2009
20090239538BASE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A base station includes data storing unit configured to store data addressed to a mobile station transmitted from a transfer route control apparatus, and data transfer unit configured to transfer the data addressed to the mobile station to a handover destination base station according to a request of the data addressed to the mobile station from the handover destination base station, wherein, when the base station receives a handover confirm complete report for reporting handover completion from the handover destination base station, the data storing unit ends storing the data addressed to the mobile station, so that the object is achieved.09-24-2009
20110244861METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A MOBILE DEVICE HANDOFF FROM A MACRO BASE STATION TO A FEMTO BASE STATION - A method for managing a mobile device handoff from a macro base station to a Femto Base Station includes receiving periodically a subscriber list from each of neighboring Femto Base Stations by the Macro Base Station. The method also includes storing Femto Base Station information and corresponding subscriber list and establishing connection with the mobile device. Further, the method includes identifying the mobile device to a corresponding Femto Base Station. The method includes transmitting a unicast message to the mobile device. Furthermore, the method includes receiving a scan request by Macro Base Station from the mobile device and sending scan response by the Macro Base Station to the mobile device. Further, the method includes receiving a handoff request from the mobile device and sending a handoff response to the mobile device. The system includes a macro base station for receiving periodically a subscriber list from neighboring Femto Base Stations.10-06-2011
20120190366Methods and Devices for Improving Session Continuity - A method for improving session continuity for a terminal (07-26-2012
20120190365METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A method for operating a terminal for supporting a handover in a heterogeneous network is provided. The method includes measuring received signal strength from a target small base station, so that a Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is estimated, when the SNR of the target small base station that considers a biased value for range expansion is greater than an SNR of a serving macro base station, determining whether an SNR of the target small base station that does not consider the biased value for the range expansion is equal to or less than a threshold, and when the SNR of the target small base station that does not consider the biased value for the range expansion is equal to or less than the threshold, transmitting indication information, informing that a low SNR is expected when the terminal performs a handover to the target small base station, to the serving macro base station.07-26-2012
20120190364APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR REPORTING AVAILABILITY OF MEASUREMENT LOG - A mobile communications device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided. The wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a first service network and a second service network. The first service network and the second service network are in compliance with a first communication protocol and a second communication protocol, respectively. The controller module performs measurements on the first service network via the wireless module, and generates a measurement log according to the measurements results. Also, the controller module receives a handover request from the second service network via the wireless module for handing over from the second service network to the first service network, and transmits a handover response indicating availability of the measurement log to the first service network via the wireless module.07-26-2012
20120190369METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING POSITION OF MOVING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method and system for determining the position of a moving wireless communication device, the method comprising: recording moving path of the wireless communication device in cells of a cellular wireless communication network; recording moving path and GPS information of a GPS wireless communication device moving in the cellular wireless communication network in cells of the cellular wireless communication network; determining the GPS wireless communication device whose moving path matches with the moving path of the wireless communication device; and determining the position of the wireless communication device based on the GPS information of the matching GPS wireless communication device.07-26-2012
20090312023Handling of Idle Gap Commands in a Telecommunication System - The invention relates to methods and arrangements for the reliability handling of idle gap commands received in a unit of a mobile telecommunication system. A user equipment located in a cell of a mobile telecommunication network receives signalling gap commands used to activate or deactivate idle gaps for downlink measurements in the neighbour cells. It is determined whether the received gap command is reliable or not. Downlink measurements are then performed in accordance with a predefined rule in case the received gap command is determined as unreliable.12-17-2009
20090312022Self Organizing Network - A method for implementing a self organizing network includes establishing a connection between a femto base station and a network access device operable to provide the femto base station with Internet access. The method also includes establishing a backhaul connection between the femto base station and a wireless service provider's network via the Internet. The method further includes establishing a wireless connection with one or more endpoints via a radio frequency (RF) channel. The method additionally includes transmitting, from the femto base station to the wireless service provider's network, neighborhood RF interference information via the backhaul connection. The method also includes receiving RF channel re-provisioning information from the wireless service provider's network and re-provisioning the RF channel. The method further includes participating in a hand-off procedure to hand-off the endpoints to the re-provisioned RF channel.12-17-2009
20100056152METHOD OF DYNAMICALLY CONTROLLING THE NUMBER OF DATA STREAMS TRAVELING THROUGH A NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - The invention relates to a method and a system of communication between at least one first communications terminal (03-04-2010
20100015980Mobile Terminal and Communication Method - A mobile terminal and communication method capable of increasing the communication continuity and maintaining the communication quality of real-time communications are provided.01-21-2010
20100015979Communication Method, Mobile Terminal and Base Station - A mobile terminal according to the present invention is provided with: a data communication unit configured to transmit, to a handoff source base station executing data communication, a candidate base station notification notifying a handoff candidate base station having communication capability different from a base station currently executing communication, and to receive, from the handoff source base station, a communication setting change request requesting a change to a handoff destination communication setting corresponding to a communication capability supported by the handoff source base station and all of the handoff candidate base station; and a communication setting execution unit configured to change, on the basis of the communication setting change request, a handoff source communication setting set for the handoff source base station to a communication setting corresponding to the communication setting change request.01-21-2010
20090036132Method And System For Radio Network Environment Detection And Reporting, And Media Independent Handover Apparatus - A method and a system for radio network environment detection and reporting in a network handover and a media independent handover (MIH) apparatus are provided. The method includes the following: an MIH function (MIHF) at a terminal side initiates a network scan, and generates a parameter report on a radio network environment around the terminal including dynamic information and static information of a scanned point of access (PoA) after the scan is completed; the MIHF at the terminal side sends the parameter report on the radio network environment to an upper layer at the terminal side or to an MIHF at a network side. The method and system support homogeneous and heterogeneous network environments at the same time.02-05-2009
20090036131SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING VOICE SERVICE IN A MULTIMEDIA MOBILE NETWORK - User Equipment (UE) receiving non-voice packet switched services in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Terrestial Radio Access Network (eUTRAN) cell undergoes handover to a circuit switched GSM/Edge Radio Access Network (GERAN)/UTRAN cell in response to a voice service page. An eNodeB of the active eUTRAN cell uses a measurement report history for the UE to select an available circuit switched cell for handover. The voice service is established in the circuit switched domain of a GERAN/UTRAN cell to ensure service continuity regardless of UE mobility that would otherwise not be possible if the voice service was established in the eUTRAN cell. A Gs-like interface between a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the CS Core Network and the Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the Evolved Packet Core provides an interface for page requests and location update procedures to be performed.02-05-2009
20100062769Base Station Apparatus, Wireless Communication Terminal Apparatus, Communication Method and Computer Readable Medium Thereof - A base station used in a communication system including the base station for broadcasting service information to a wireless communication terminal, and the wireless communication terminal for receiving the service information during an idle state, the base station includes: a storing section for storing information of other base stations existing nearby the base station and service compliant information indicative of whether the other base stations are compliant with transmission of the service information.03-11-2010
20100056151Reducing Buffer Overflow - A method of reducing buffer overflow in a cellular radio network caused by a transfer of data from a buffer in a first cell to a buffer in a second cell when a handover of mobile equipment from said first cell to said second cell occurs. The method comprises temporarily increasing an amount of temporary buffer space required to handle data transferred from the buffer of the first cell to the buffer of the second cell. In one embodiment of the method, prior to increasing the amount of temporary buffer space, the amount of temporary buffer space required is calculated.03-04-2010
20100056153CONTROL OF ACCESS TERMINAL OPERATION BASED ON INTERFERENCE INFORMATION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate distributing and utilizing interference information in a wireless communication environment. Interference information can be generated by a base station by evaluating uplink conditions, and disparate interference information can be collected from neighbor base station(s). Interference information associated with the base station and the neighbor base station(s) can be transmitted by the base station to access terminal(s). An access terminal that receives that interference information associated with the base station and the neighbor base station(s) can control an operation based at least in part upon the interference information. For example, the access terminal can adjust a transmit power, select a target serving base station for handover, and/or choose a random access channel (RACH) resource to use for random access as a function of the interference information associated with the base station and the neighbor base station(s).03-04-2010
20100056150Method for triggering inter-RAT idle handoff - A method for inter-RAT idle handoff is provided by transmitting a handoff initiation signal from a cell associated with a carrier for a first Radio Access Technology (RAT) area, the cell being located in an overlap coverage area with a second RAT area and adjacent to the second RAT area. Spatial hysteresis is provided by the new triggering method to eliminate the ping-pong issue when a mobile move along the border area. The invention also reduces network resource consumption due to ping-ponging.03-04-2010
20100056148MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A mobile communication network comprises a home agent supporting mobility of a mobile entity by generating bindings between a home address of the mobile entity and a care of address of the mobile entity. A mapping processor provides at least one set of mappings between a potential future care of address for a mobile entity and a real time characteristic criterion. The mappings may for example be determined in response to previous movements of the mobile entity in the communication network. A processor determines a real time characteristic and the home agent is arranged to change a binding between the home address and a current care of address in response to the at least one set of mappings and the real time characteristic, and without receiving binding updates from the mobile entity. The approach may allow support for mobility of a mobile entity while reducing signalling in support of mobility.03-04-2010
20090163208Uplink carrier handoff and method for path loss based triggering of uplink carrier handoff - In one embodiment, the method of carrier handoff includes receiving a measurement report from a mobile providing information regarding path loss as measured at the mobile for a serving one of the multiple carriers on the downlink. The serving carrier is the carrier over which the mobile communicates on the uplink. The method further includes selectively sending an instruction to the mobile to handoff to a non-serving one of the multiple carriers depending on whether a threshold requirement associated with the serving carrier has been met. Meeting the threshold requirement is based on the received measurement report, and each of the multiple carriers has an associated threshold requirement.06-25-2009
20130157661MAINTAINING SIGNALING REDUCTION MODE IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a method comprises activating a signaling reduction mode on a wireless access node for a mobile device in an idle state where the signaling reduction mode permits the mobile device to switch radio access technologies while maintaining registration with both the wireless access node and a peer wireless access node, exchanging with the peer wireless access node a first control tunnel identifier of the wireless access node and a second control tunnel identifier of the peer wireless access node, selecting at the wireless access node a second gateway to replace a first gateway, establishing a control connection with the second gateway, transmitting to the second gateway the second control tunnel identifier of the peer wireless access node so that the second gateway may establish a control connection with the peer wireless access node, and continuing the signaling reduction mode.06-20-2013
20100062770MOBILE HANDSET EXTENSION TO A DEVICE - System(s) and method(s) are provided for extension of mobile operation to a device. An extension interface comprises a client component within a mobile that is linked to a client component within the device. Extension of mobile operation is secured via delivery of credentials associated with the mobile to the device. Delivery of credentials is temporary and typically spans the period during which mobile operation is extended to the device. Mobile's application(s) and content(s) can be conveyed to the device for utilization therein. An emulation component that can reside at least in part on the client component within the device can emulate mobile operation. Client component within the mobile can include at least in part (i) a component that downloads drivers for communication with, and utilization of, the device to which mobile operation is extended, and (ii) a component that can scan for wireless-capable devices to extend mobile service thereto.03-11-2010
20090215459Method and Apparatus for Improving Random Access Procedure for Handover - A method of improving a random access procedure for handover in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes steps of initiating a random access procedure for handover when performing a handover procedure, and repeating a random access preamble transmission when no valid random access response is received within a certain period of time or when contention of the random access procedure is considered not successful until the handover procedure succeeds or operation time of the handover procedure expires no matter whether a maximum number of the random access preamble transmission has been reached.08-27-2009
20090029703Handover Between Mobile Networks - When a mobile station MS01-29-2009
20100069071METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR HANDOVER IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for handling a handover in a more efficient way. The invention relates to a method in a mobility controller (03-18-2010
20100069072USING SIGNAL MONITORING TO RESOLVE ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER AMBIGUITY - Ambiguity (e.g., confusion) associated with access point identifiers may be resolved by querying candidate target access points and/or by using historical records indicative of one or more access points that the access point has previously accessed. For example, messages may be sent to access points that are assigned the same identifier to cause the access points to monitor for a signal from an access terminal that received the identifier from a target access point. The target access point may then be identified based on any responses that indicate that a signal was received from the access terminal. In some aspects the access points subject to being queried may be selected using a tiered priority. In addition, it may be determined based on prior handoffs of a given access terminal that when that access terminal reports a given identifier, the access terminal usually ends up being handed-off to a particular access point. Accordingly, a mapping may be maintained for that access terminal that maps the identifier to that access point so that the mapping may be used to resolve any future confusion associated with the use of that identifier by that access terminal.03-18-2010
20110250888METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CELL RESELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of performing cell reselection in a wireless communication system is provided. A mobile station determines whether first priority information for the first RAT is provided by the serving cell, and receives second priority information of a second RAT from the serving cell. The mobile station performs inter-RAT cell reselection based on the first and second priority information if the first priority information for the first RAT is provided. The mobile station performs cell reselection toward the second RAT based on measured values of cells of the second RAT without considering the second priority information if the first priority information for the first RAT is not provided.10-13-2011
20110250890METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NEIGHBOR CELL CONFIGURATION AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEMTOCELL BASE STATION CONFIGURATION - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for neighbor cell configuration and a method and an apparatus for femtocell base station configuration. The neighbor cell configuration method includes: obtaining information of at least one macro cell; obtaining neighbor cell information of the at least one macro cell; and performing neighbor cell configuration according to the information of the at least one macro cell and the neighbor cell information. With the method and apparatus for neighbor cell configuration and the method and apparatus for femtocell base station configuration, complete femtocell base station neighbor cell information is obtained so that a femtocell base station can be configured automatically. This avoids call drops during handovers and increases the success rate of handovers, and the implementation is easy.10-13-2011
20110250889MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - The present invention relates to a mobile communication method in which a mobile station performs a handover from a handover source radio base station to a handover target radio base station. The mobile communication method includes the steps of: (A) acquiring, at the handover target radio base station, from the handover source radio base station or a switching center, a key for calculating a first key for generating a certain key used in a communication between the handover target radio base station and the mobile station; and (B) acquiring, at the handover target radio base station, from the switching center, a second key for calculating a first key for generating a certain key used in a communication between a next handover target radio base station and the mobile station.10-13-2011
20110250887METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTINUITY OF POSITIONING DETERMINATION AT HANDOVER - Methods and devices are provided for observed time difference of arrival (OTDOA) continuity at handover. In one embodiment, the method may involve, in response to being served by a first serving cell, receiving a first set of timing offsets provided in assistance data from the network. The method may involve, in response to being handed over to a second serving cell, deriving a second set of timing offsets from the first set of timing offsets. The method may involve adjusting measured time difference of arrival (TDOA) values of detected first signals according to the first set of timing offsets, and/or adjusting measured TDOA values of detected second signals according to the second set of timing offsets.10-13-2011
20110070889System and Method for Inter-Femto Access Point Handoffs - A system and method for inter-femto access point handoffs are provided. A method for gateway operations includes receiving a handoff required message, determining a handoff target based on information in the handoff required message, sending a handoff request to the handoff target, performing a bearer update, and initiating a handoff. The handoff target and a handoff source are anchored by a gateway.03-24-2011
20110151875HANDOVER TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING BROADCAST DATA IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION OF SERVING BASE STATION - A mobile communication apparatus is provided. The mobile communication apparatus includes an information receiver to receive, from a serving base station, target base station information corresponding to at least one target base station located in a neighboring cell, and a controller to examine the target base station information and to perform a handover to the at least one target base station based on whether the at least one target base station supports a multi-band, and whether the at least one target base station provides a broadcast service.06-23-2011
20110151873METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF PROXIMITY RELATIONSHIPS ON LAND MOBILE NETWORKS - Method for configuration of proximity relationships of cells (06-23-2011
20110151874LINK REPORT RELAY IN ACCESS DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SYSTEMS - Relevant radio-link related information is transferred through a wireless terminal (06-23-2011
20100261475METHOD OF INITIALIZING AND ESTABLISHING LINKS IN A MULTI-MODE MOBILE TERMINAL - A method of performing a handover with at least one of a homogeneous and heterogeneous network is disclosed. More specifically, the method comprises establishing a heterogeneous network handover module for converging information from the at least one network interface module associated with the at least one of a homogeneous and heterogeneous network into a unified presentation and receiving a message for powering on at least one network interface module in a mobile terminal from the heterogeneous network handover module. The method further comprises performing a power on operation for activating the at least one network interface module and transmitting a confirmation message for indicating a power on operation status to the heterogeneous network handover module.10-14-2010
20100062771Mobile Station with a Semi-Active Mode - In a mobile station for use in a cellular radio system, the mobile station is adapted to increase radio measurements relating to the currently best cell at times when the user is preparing to set up a call in order to increase the likelihood that a mobile station is camping in the correct cell when setting up a call. This is obtained by adding a third mode to the already existing idle and active modes. The additional mode provides for an increased amount of idle mode measurements compared to the conventional idle mode.03-11-2010
20100297997MINIMIZING INTERFERENCE TO NON-ASSOCIATED USERS - A method for reducing interference to wireless communication devices is described. A handoff request is received from a wireless communication device. A femto access point that is a hand-in target of the handoff request is determined. A handoff information message is sent to the femto access point. The method may be performed by a core network apparatus.11-25-2010
20100120433METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING CONTENT ON A BROADCAST SERVICES COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An outer decoder and an inner decoder encode a block of information to be transmitted, to improve protection by adding redundancy. The redundancy permits decoding of the information from less than a complete encoded block of information. Time re-alignment of two transmissions of the same content from two base stations can mitigate the problem of duplicated frames. The user of the subscriber station can experience seamless service without repetition of content, even when handing over to a new cell while receiving a buffer of broadcast content.05-13-2010
20100113027Apparatus, Method, And Tangible Machine-Readable Medium Thereof For CallBack HandOver Procedure In A FemTo-Network - An apparatus, a signaling method, and a tangible machine-readable medium thereof for callback handover procedure in a femto-network are provided, wherein the femto-network comprising a plurality of femto base stations. The apparatus comprises a storage module, a receiving module, a transmission module, and a determination module. The storage module is configured to store and restore information of the femto BS, the information indicating a relation between the apparatus and the related stations. The receiving module is configured to receive the inbound handover signals and outbound handover signals. The transmission module is configured to transmit the inbound handover signals and outbound handover signals. The determination module is configured to determine whether generating inbound handover signals or outbound handover signals.05-06-2010
20100062772METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND GROUP MOBILITY CONTROLLER FOR PROCESSING GROUP MOBILITY - A method, a wireless communication system, and a group mobility controller (GMC) for processing group mobility are provided by the exemplary embodiments of the present invention. In the method, a fixed GMC paging group identifier (PG-ID) is assigned to the GMC when the GMC starts up a group mobility function; and a target network obtains group information of the GMC, and updates a PG-ID list of the target network with the group information of the GMC during a message interaction process when the GMC hands over from a serving network to the target network, and then utilizes the updated PG-ID list during a subsequent interaction process with a group node. The system includes a GMC, a serving network, and a target network. The signaling storm raised when numbers of terminals in an idle mode perform location update at the same time during the group mobility can be avoided according to the above technical solutions, thereby realizing the economy of air interface resources and signaling overheads.03-11-2010
20100056149Hard handoff dynamic threshold determination - A system and method for dynamic threshold determination. The system and method of operating a base station. A base station is configured to transmit a first message to a subscriber station. The first message including a first threshold for use in measuring against the serving frequency strength and a second threshold for determining one or more target base stations. The mobile station responds with messages listing zero or more target base stations. Further, the base station is configured to dynamically adjust a value of at least one of the first threshold parameter and second threshold parameter in response to a call event.03-04-2010
20100003981RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN TARGET CELL AFTER HANDOVER - A system is proposed to provide handover in a mobile telecommunications environment, particularly applicable to 3GPP networks, in which a user device, such as a mobile telephone provides a buffer status report to the target base station during a handover procedure. The target base station uses this status report to allocate appropriate resources for uplink data to be transmitted from the user device to the target base station.01-07-2010
20100003985APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for handover in a wireless communication system are provided. The handover method includes, when handing over to another Base Station (BS) while being serviced by a serving BS, determining whether there exists data to transmit in an uplink, and, when the data to transmit in the uplink exists, requesting bandwidth from the serving BS before commencing a network re-entry to a target BS for the handover.01-07-2010
20080207206MEDIA INDEPENDENT PRE-AUTHENTICATION SUPPORTING FAST-HANDOFF IN PROXY MIPv6 ENVIRONMENT - This document describes a proactive mechanism to provide fast-handover involving PMIPv6. In particular, it describes how one can achieve fast handoff for PMIPv6 using Media-independent Pre-Authentication (MPA) technique. It discusses the need for a fast-handoff for PMIPv6 environment. It then describes how MPA techniques could be used during different steps involving both intra-domain and inter-domain handoff for PMIPv6. MPA-based fast-handover takes advantage of the pre-authentication mechanism so that the mobile can perform the access authentication while in the previous local mobility (PMA) domain and thus would be able to complete many of the handoff related operations while still in the previous network.08-28-2008
20090318152METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITIZING STATUS MESSAGES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate scheduling for transmissions of status messages, such as Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) status messages or Radio Link Control (RLC) acknowledgement messages, in a wireless communication system. As described herein, at time periods at which transmission of status messages is desired, respective status signaling associated with a set of radio bearers, logical channels, or the like can be configured to be transmitted prior to conducting transmission(s) of data. By doing so, a receiving entity can obtain the status signaling at substantially the earliest possible opportunity, allowing the receiving entity to avoid unnecessary bandwidth and/or memory expenditure associated with re-transmissions of information. As further described herein, status information can be prioritized by the use of separate status bearers, respective indicators provided within information elements queued on respective radio bearers, a maintained list of respective radio bearers containing status information, and other similar mechanisms.12-24-2009
20120202501METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for performing a handover from a first base station to a second base station by a user equipment that is performing a radio communication over a communication channel formed by aggregating a plurality of component carriers. The method includes a step of transmitting a handover command for a component carrier for which a handover has been approved by the second base station among the plurality of component carriers from the first base station to the user equipment and a step of trying to make an access from the user equipment to the second base station for each component carrier in response to the handover command.08-09-2012
20120202499MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, HIGHER-ORDER APPARATUS, GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A mobile communication system including: a terminal, a movement-origin base station to which the terminal connects before movement of the terminal; a movement-destination base station to which the terminal connects after movement of the terminal; and a higher-order apparatus that has the movement-origin base station and the movement-destination base station under its control. Control information for voice encoding is set in advance in the movement-origin base station and the movement-destination base station, the movement-origin base station includes the control information of its own station in a first message and transmits the first message to the higher-order apparatus, and the higher-order apparatus includes the control information of the movement-origin base station in a second message and transmits the second message to the movement-destination base station.08-09-2012
20080287130Base Station Base Methods and Apparatus For Supporting Break Before Making Handoffs In A Multi-Carrier System - A mobile communications device initiates a handoff from its current base station (BS) sector network attachment point to a new BS sector. The mobile sends a handoff request over its current wireless link to the current BS sector, which forwards the request to the new BS sector, e.g., via a network link. The new BS sector processes the request assigning dedicated resources, e.g., an identifier and dedicated uplink segments. Information identifying the allocated resources is conveyed from the new BS sector via the current BS sector to the mobile. The mobile determines the time of the allocated dedicated segments based upon a received beacon signal from the new BS sector with known timing relationships to dedicated segments. The mobile breaks the original wireless link just prior to the time of the first assigned dedicated segment. The mobile communicates information on the assigned dedicated segments to perform registration operations, e.g., timing synchronization and power control, establishing a new wireless link.11-20-2008
20090209256MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE UNIT, BASE STATION UNIT AND METHOD THEREFORE - In mobile communication system having a plurality of mobile traits and a plurality of base station units, the system of the present invention is characterised in that the base station unit has a gap period length setting section for setting the length of the gap period for the mobile unit depending on the type of the radio access technology to be monitored by the mobile unit.08-20-2009
20080268847METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A SERVER TO OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT USER PREFERENCES AND SUBSCRIPTIONS - An apparatus and method makes a decision whether or not to handover a wireless transmit-receive unit to a new network in a wireless or fixed network communication system. In a specific embodiment, a media-independent handover application server, operating according to IEEE 802.21 protocol, exchanges information with a server by using a Third Generation Partnership Project standardized interface. The method allows for an IMS based handover server to extract user preference and subscription information from a subscription server. The improvement allows new kinds of information to be exchanged between the handover and subscription server for optimized handover decisions.10-30-2008
20090137250MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND MOBILE STATION - In a mobile radio network in which synchronous base stations and asynchronous base stations coexist, according to handover destination base station candidate information transmitted from a base station to a mobile station, effective time information indicating either an effective time during which it is guaranteed that a signal from a base station candidate included in the handover destination base station candidate information can be detected when, after a lapse of an integral multiple of a fixed time interval from a time when the mobile station could detect a reference signal which were transmitted at the fixed time intervals from the base station candidate, the mobile station detects the same base station candidate again, the effective time depending on the base station candidate, or an index for enabling the mobile station to drive the effective time is provided to the mobile station, and the mobile station carries out the detection by setting up the detection time intervals at which the mobile station detects a signal from the base station candidate on the basis of the effective time information.05-28-2009
20110177819WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication terminal and a wireless communication method for appropriately controlling handover when performing handover according to a received power level, even under a circumstance that frequent handover occurs between base stations because of the terminal being located at a cell edge and the like. A wireless communication terminal (07-21-2011
20090286542Method and Apparatus for Transitioning From a First RAT to a Second RAT - A method, in a wireless communications device having a first protocol stack for use with a first radio access technology and a second protocol stack for use with a second radio access technology, the method for transitioning from a first radio access technology to a second radio access technology, the method comprising: maintaining a list of available communication cells associated with the second radio access technology, and transferring information associated with more than one available communication cell associated with the second radio access technology from the first protocol stack to the second protocol stack.11-19-2009
20110177816METHODS OF PERFORMING CELL CHANGE WITHOUT RECEIVING DESCRIPTION OF RESOURCES IN A TARGET CELL - Methods and systems of performing cell change for a circuit-switched call without a mobile station receiving a description of resources in a target cell are provided. In some embodiments, a command is generated at the serving cell which indicates to the mobile station to perform a cell change without first receiving a description of resources in the target cell. In some embodiments, a command is generated at the target cell which may be like a handover command, but which indicates to the mobile station to perform the cell change without an allocation of resources.07-21-2011
20090111468Hand-off trigger at access technology borders - A method for hand-off trigger at access technology borders may include triggering a mobile station in communication with a first carrier having a first technology type to acquire synchronization with a second carrier having a second technology type if the mobile station enters a border area, the border area including at least one sector covered by at least two carriers having different Radio Access Technologies (RATs) including the first technology type and the second technology type.04-30-2009
20080242303RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO MOBILE DEVICE AND RADIO BASE STATION ACCOMMODATION APPARATUS - In a radio communication system in which sequence numbers of radio packets transmitted to first and second radio base stations are managed independently to perform hand-off, when the hand-off is performed while a plurality of fragmented radio packets are transmitted, a mobile device applies sequence numbers of radio packets managed by the first radio base station after the hand-off is performed and applies sequence numbers of radio packets managed by the second radio base station after completion of transmission of the plurality of radio packets. The radio base station managing radio packets is identified on the basis of the sequence numbers managed in each base station upon restoration and data is restored.10-02-2008
20080242301Reducing access latency while protecting against control signaling data processing overload - A control signal data processing load associated with mobile terminals currently having a connection with a radio access network is regulated. The connection is terminated when the control processing cost for maintaining the connection exceeds the benefit of maintaining the connection to achieve shorter access latency. A connection activity level is determined for current connections between multiple mobile terminals and a base station. A current data processing load in the base station associated with the mobile terminal control signaling is calculated. A decision is made whether one or more of the mobile terminals is likely to request a handover of its respective connection to a neighboring base station. Based on the current load, the likelihood of requesting handover of the respective connection, and the connection activity level determined for the respective connection, a decision is made whether to terminate the respective connection.10-02-2008
20080311915SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for performing a handover in a wireless communication system are provided. In the system and method an MS receives a mobile neighbor advertisement message including PDR information about a serving BS and neighbor BSs from the serving BS, selects candidate BSs based on a location of the MS and the PDR information, determines communication states of the candidate BSs, determines a target BS for the handover according to the determined communication states, and performs the handover to the target BS.12-18-2008
20100178923Method For Relocating SRNS In A Mobile Communication System - A system and method for performing SRNS relocation in a communications system transmits radio resource information including a ciphering parameter from a source RNC to a target RNC, modifies the ciphering parameter to coincide with a deciphering parameter which a user terminal uses when out-of-sequence data is received, ciphers a data unit based on the modified ciphering parameter, and transmits the ciphered data unit from the target RNC to the user terminal. The method may be modified to operate in UM mode or AM mode and to transmit data over one of several radio bearers. In accordance with another embodiment, the system and method transmits radio resource information from a source RNC to a target RNC and then transmits a data unit from the target RNC to a user terminal. In this case, the data unit including a transmission sequence number which consecutively follows a transmission sequence number of a data unit last transmitted from the source RNC to the user terminal. In accordance with another embodiment, the system and method resets ciphering and state variables in a target RNC and then transmits a message instructing a user terminal to reset a deciphering and state variables to the same or similar values. All the embodiments are advantageous because they ensure successful communications will take place between the target RNC and user terminal after a serving radio network sub-system relocation procedure is performed.07-15-2010
20080214193METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING INFORMATION USING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving additional information through a random access procedure by mapping at least one additional information element to random access codes to be used in a random access procedure between a UE and an ENB in a mobile communication system. According to the method, a random access code selected based on additional information to be transmitted and a triggering cause of the random access procedure is transmitted from the UE to the ENB. Each random access code is differently mapped to at least one additional information element according to a class of a cause for which a corresponding random access procedure is triggered, and the additional information elements are mapped to different ranges of random access codes according to the classes of the cause.09-04-2008
20100304747METHOD FOR LOAD BALANCING OF DEVICES IN IDLE MODE - The invention discloses a method for a cellular communications system, in which there is a first plurality of cells and a second plurality of base stations, each base station controlling the traffic to and from user terminals in a cell. User terminals can assume an idle mode, where a user terminal when in an idle mode performs cell reselection, comprising an evaluation of the cells which are available to the user terminal. The base stations of a number of cells in the system transmit a set of reselection probabilities, each probability in said set being the probability with which a terminal when in idle mode may carry out a reselection from its present cell to the cell to which the probability refers.12-02-2010
20120202502METHOD FOR INFORMATION NOTIFICATION AND METHOD AND ACCESS NODE FOR FORWARDING DATA MESSAGE DURING HANDOVER PROCEDURE - An information notification method is applied in a network with separated identity identifier and location to notify the correspondent node to update the location identifier of the terminal. The method includes: a terminal establishes a communication with a correspondent node, a first access node which the terminal accesses reports to a home identity location register (ILR) of the terminal the mapping information about the identity identifier and location identifier of the correspondent node of the terminal, and the ILR stores the mapping information about the correspondent node of the terminal; and after having acquired a new location identifier of the terminal, the ILR sends a notification of updating the location identifier of the terminal to one or more access nodes which the correspondent node accesses according to the stored mapping information about the correspondent node of the terminal, carrying the identity identifier and new location identifier of the terminal.08-09-2012
20120202498Technique For Instructing Mobile Stations Communicating With Cooperating Access Nodes - A technique for instructing at least one mobile station communicating with a serving access node, the serving access node being capable of cooperating with a plurality of supporting access nodes and the at least one mobile station being capable of additionally communicating with the plurality of supporting access nodes is provided. A method implementation of this technique comprises the steps of obtaining at least one backhaul parameter relating to a backhaul capacity of at least one of the serving access node and a supporting access node, generating at least one of a handover command and a system information parameter based on the obtained at least one backhaul parameter, and providing the at least one of the handover command and the system information parameter to the at least one mobile station.08-09-2012
20080254797SEAMLESS AND VERTICAL CALL HANDOFF SOLUTION ARCHITECTURE - A system, method and apparatus for facilitating handoff of communications with a user device between a first communication network having a first domain technology, and a second communication network having a second domain technology different from the first domain technology, the system, method and apparatus includes an anchor point that establishes a first service flow with the first communication network, and a second service flow with the second communication network based upon a triggering event respectively, with the user device, and a handoff device that receives at least one handoff parameter for determining a handoff operation of the user device from the first communication network to the second communication network.10-16-2008
20080254799MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a mobile communications system including a plurality of base station apparatuses which are located at geographically dispersed locations and perform a wireless communication with a mobile device. The system further includes a maximum ratio combining unit which performs maximum ratio combining processing regarding a signal the base station apparatuses receive from the mobile device, and a selection combining unit which performs selection combining processing regarding the signal from the mobile device. A selection unit included in the system selects one or both of the maximum ratio combining unit and the selection combining unit according to at least one of an external factor and a change of a distribution state of the mobile device under communication.10-16-2008
20110053599SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER PROCEDURE - A method for a handover procedure comprises detecting a status of a backhaul connection between an original femto base station and a backbone network, and sending a handover request message including a reason code and/or flag to at least one mobile station served by the original femto base station, then the at least one mobile station re-associates with at least one base station other than the original femto base station.03-03-2011
20110053598SIGNALLING OF RESOURCE STATUS INFORMATION BETWEEN BASE STATIONS FOR LOAD BALANCING - A mobile communications system is described in which base stations communicate with each other using a Master/Slave protocol to exchange load balancing information that can be used to control the handover of mobile devices amongst neighbouring base stations and/or neighbouring cells. The Master base station requests the Slave base station to provide a load status report to it either at a defined time or periodicity or in response to certain events.03-03-2011
20110053597METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL RESELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing cell reselection in a wireless communication system includes receiving cell load information and performing cell reselection by using the cell load information. It is possible to achieve traffic balancing on user equipments using a wireless network.03-03-2011
20110053596FEMTOCELL ORIGINATING DOMAIN SELECTION - A system and methodology that facilitates same-domain handovers between a femtocell and a surrounding macro cell is provided. In particular, the system can determine a domain of the surrounding macro cell and select a preferred domain for user equipment (UE) communication based in part on the determined domain. Moreover, a preferred domain selection component can be employed to determine the preferred domain based in part on various factors including a probability that a handover will occur, geographical location of femtocell and/or UE, motion of UE, communication history, user and/or service provider preferences and/or policies, service requirements, UE behavior patterns, etc. Further, the selected preferred domain can be utilized during communication with the UE, for example, while initiating voice calls.03-03-2011
20110053595ACCESS PROCEDURE FOR CALL RE-ESTABLISHMENT - An access procedure for call re-establishment is provided. In a first method, a mobile station, in at least some instances of detecting radio link failure, attempts call re-establishment on multiple cells concurrently. In a second method, a mobile station performs a first random access channel procedure when the mobile station is not aware of at least two cells with enabled call re-establishment, and performs a second random access channel procedure when the mobile station is aware of at least two cells with enabled call re-establishment.03-03-2011
20100285804APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PERMITTING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TRANSITION BASED UPON SIGNAL THRESHOLD DETERMINATION - A method and apparatus of optimizing transitioning between EVDO and CDMA 1X systems in a hybrid access terminal, the method having the steps of: preventing a reconnect data call from being sent from the hybrid access terminal. The preventing step including checking whether a transition between an EVDO and a CDMA 1X system is successful; and if not blocking the data call, and/or checking whether an EVDO received signal strength indication is greater than or equal to a receiver sensitivity on the hybrid access terminal; and if yes, allowing the hybrid access terminal to connect to the EVDO system, and/or delaying a connection timer for connecting to the EVDO system and/or applying fast dormancy to the hybrid access terminal in an EVDO state.11-11-2010
20100285803Offered Bit Rate At Handover - The invention relates to a method in a second communication node within a communications network supporting a handover process of a first communication device from a first cell in the communications network to a second cell of the second communication node in the communications network. The second communication node determines (11-11-2010
20110263259MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station (UE) according to the present invention includes: a control unit (10-27-2011
20110263255DETECTION OF EARLY INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) HANDOVER TRIGGERING - A device detects poor coverage associated with a source radio access technology (RAT) with which the device is connected, and connects to a target RAT. The device also measures the source RAT for a time period after connecting to the target RAT, and sends, based on the measurements, one or more measurement reports to the target RAT, where the target RAT forwards the one or more measurement reports to the source RAT. Alternatively, or additionally, the target RAT may detect that the handover was triggered too early and may inform the source RAT or command the UE to return to the source RAT. The device further stops the measuring and the sending when the time period expires. In this way, IRAT handover parameters may be automatically or manually tuned to minimize the number of handovers triggered too early, which may result in a more efficient cell configuration.10-27-2011
20110263257Handover control apparatus, handover control method, and program product - In a handover control apparatus, a terminal is wirelessly connected with one of base stations to establish a wireless data communications connection. The terminal executes a handover process using a handover process section when an electric wave state becomes lower than a threshold value, which is variable. The threshold value can be adjusted according to a moving speed of the terminal. Furthermore, the threshold value is corrected according to the past electric wave state. The threshold value is corrected according to a difference of (i) a minimum electric wave state in a preceding handover process, and (ii) a lower limit. The correction is executed so as to reduce an excessive decline of an electric wave state in a succeeding handover process. Deterioration of a communications quality during a handover process can be thereby suppressed.10-27-2011
20110263256DETERMINING HANDOVER PARAMETER FOR TRANSMISSION BY ACCESS POINT - A parameter for transmission by an access point is determined in a manner that facilitates access terminal mobility. For example, a cell reselection parameter and/or a handover parameter may be determined based on the quality of a signal from one access point (e.g., a macro cell) at another access point (e.g., a femto cell). In addition, a cell reselection parameter and/or a handover parameter may be determined based on the proximity of one access point (e.g., a femto cell) to another access point (e.g., a macro cell). Through the use of these techniques, a parameter may be determined in a manner that mitigates access terminal ping-ponging between access points and that mitigates outages that may otherwise occur as a result of an access terminal remaining on an access point too long.10-27-2011
20110263254Tracking Cells for Cell-Reselection in a Cellular Communications System - A user equipment (UE) in a cellular communication system tracks neighbor cells by periodically performing a signal measurement process and periodically performing a signal tracking process. Neighbor cells are ranked according to measured signal level, and the number of cells that are tracked is variable, and is based on the stability of the radio environment in which the UE is operating. The rate at which a neighbor cell changes from the status of not being the strongest neighbor cell to the status of being one is an indicator of environment stability. When a neighbor cell newly becomes the strongest ranking neighbor cell, the ranking that that neighbor cell had a predetermined time period ago can be used as an indicator of how many neighbor cells to track. The predetermined time period can be an average amount of time that it takes to track a neighbor cell.10-27-2011
20110077009CELL SELECTION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A cell selection method includes steps of: (A) determining, at a mobile station (UE), whether or not a first CSG cell satisfies a predetermined condition, when using a first macro cell as a camped cell; and (B) changing, at the mobile station (UE), the camped cell from the first macro cell to a first CSG cell, when determined that the first CSG cell satisfies the predetermined condition.03-31-2011
20110077008MOBILE STATION REATTACHING METHOD, SYSTEM, GATEWAY AND BASE STATION - A mobile station (MS) reattaching method, an MS reattaching system, a gateway, and a base station (BS) are provided. The method includes: determining, according to mobility restriction information, whether an MS is allowed to access a target BS; and if the MS is allowed to access the target BS, returning a handover response (HO_Rsp) indicating that MS reattachment is allowed to the MS. An MS reattaching system, a gateway, and a BS are further provided. An access service network-gateway (ASN-GW) or a serving BS determines, according to mobility restriction information, whether a current target BS is an appropriate target BS to allow the MS to access, so as to satisfy the mobility restriction.03-31-2011
20110077006METHOD OF HANDLING MOBILITY IN MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE SINGLE FREQUENCY NETWORK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling mobility in multimedia broadcast multicast service single frequency network (MBSFN) for a user equipment of a wireless communication system includes when the user equipment proceeds with an MBMS service and performs handover from a source cell to a target cell, checking whether a target MBSFN area which the target cell belongs to is the same as a source MBSFN area which the source cell belongs to, when the target MBSFN area is different from the source MBSFN area, receiving a multicast control channel (MCCH) corresponding to the target MBSFN area, checking whether the MBMS service is provided in the target MBSFN area, and when the MBMS service is provided in the target MBSFN area, sending a service join request to a target network of the wireless communication system, for continuing to receive the MBMS service.03-31-2011
20110077007WIRELESS LOCATION MEASUREMENT METHOD - A method for a base station to search terminals broadcasts a search initiated message for notifying searching, receives a response message from a terminal having received the search initiated message, and determines whether the terminal having transmitted the response message is a search target. A method for a simplified base station installed in an event zone to perform a location measurement process with a terminal broadcasts a search initiated message for notifying searching to an event zone, and performs a location measurement process with a terminal having received the search initiated message. A method for a terminal to perform a location measurement process receives a search initiated message for notifying searching, and performs a location measurement process by using information included in the search initiated message.03-31-2011
20100323700NON-3GPP TO 3GPP NETWORK HANDOVER OPTIMIZATIONS - The invention relates to a method for a handover of a mobile node from a non-3GPP to a 3GPP network, and of a mobile node, which is located in a non-3GPP/3GPP network. The handover is improved by discovering an appropriate MME and registering the mobile node at the discovered MME, in advance. This includes to first determine the location of the mobile node in the non-3GPP network, so as to be able to detect an MME in the vicinity of the mobile node's location. The 3GPP contexts are then transmitted to the new MME before the handover is performed. Moreover, the invention teaches to change the Serving-Gateway in the 3GPP network before performing a handover, thereby accelerating the handover. When a handover gets likely, the mobile node's location is determined and a new Serving-Gateway is selected. The data path is changed to go via the new Serving-Gateway.12-23-2010
20100323697NODE ALLOCATION WITHIN A CORE NETWORK COMPRISING LOCAL POOL AREAS - A method of allocating users to core network nodes of a cellular telecommunications System, where users access the core network via a radio access network and where the nodes of the core network are grouped into a plurality of local pool areas and the local pool areas are further grouped into one or more pool areas, and each local pool area corresponds to a geographic area covered by the access network. The method comprises allocating a user to a core network node of a local pool area corresponding to the geographic area within which the user is located, maintaining the core network node while the user moves within the local pool area, and, in the event that the user moves out of the local pool area but remains in the same pool area, maintaining said allocation at least temporarily.12-23-2010
20100330995COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND BASE STATION - A communication terminal adjusts the transmission timing of data transmitted to a base station so that the base station can receive the data within a predetermined delay time. The communication terminal includes a reception section 12-30-2010
20100178920HANDOVER TO ANY CELL OF A TARGET BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for performing handover of a user equipment (UE) in a cell-to-base station manner are described. The UE may receive a handover command to perform handover from a source base station to a target base station. The source base station may send context information for the UE to the target base station, and the context information may be available to all cells of the target base station. The UE may attempt handover from a serving cell of the source base station to a first cell of the target base station. The UE may attempt handover to a second cell of the target base station if the handover to the first cell fails. The UE may (i) receive the first and second cells from the source base station or (ii) receive only the first cell from the source base station and determine the second cell based on broadcast system information.07-15-2010
20110014914Systems and Methods of Bandwidth Allocation During Handoff - Systems and methods of uplink bandwidth allocation for a handoff are provided. A mobile station can transmit a handoff request message to a serving base station. The mobile station and the target base station can exchange synchronization messages and the mobile station can then subsequently receive an unsolicited allocation of a number of uplink sub-channels from the base station.01-20-2011
20110256873MAINTAINING CURRENT CELL LOCATION INFORMATION IN A CELLULAR ACCESS NETWORK - A system, method, and User Equipment, UE, for providing a current LTE cell location to a Generic Radio Access Network Controller, GANG, based on different triggers depending on the UE state. The GANC ensures that the correct GANG is serving the UE, and also maps the LTE cell location to an associated GAN Cell Global Identifier, GAN-CGI. The GANG provides the GAN-CGI to a Mobile Switching Center, MSC, or other serving core network node to support location-based services and other mobile originated or mobile terminated calls and transactions.10-20-2011
20110256872APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR A HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for a handover in a mobile communication system are provided. A method for an operation of a gateway in a mobile communication system includes receiving a message informing of a handover of a User Equipment (UE) from a Base Station (BS), determining whether the handover could be terminated at the gateway, and if it is determined the handover could be terminated at the gateway, performing the handover with the handover being terminated at the gateway.10-20-2011
20110256871Mobility Influenced by Radio Uplink Failure - An intelligent subscriber and method of the subscriber roaming between base stations is presented. An unexpected uplink, such as a request to initiate communication, a SMS communication or request to change talkgroup, is transmitted to a base station. When a predetermined number of such uplinks remain unacknowledged by the base station, the subscriber determines that terminal failure of the base station has occurred. An ordered list of available base stations able to serve the subscriber is maintained in subscriber memory. The ordering is based on service level and within each service level by radio measurements. The list is manipulated such that the service level of the original base station is minimized A new base station is selected using the manipulated ordered list. The service level of the original base station is then restored. A communication is sent to an external host to record information about the terminal failure.10-20-2011
20110256870Method and System of Handover Based on Channel Quality and Loading - A base station may decide to initiate a handover of a communication with a mobile station from a first wireless link to a new wireless link and identify one or more wireless links for the handover. For each identified wireless link, the base station may then determine a channel-quality metric, a wireless-link loading metric, and perhaps a coverage-area loading metric. In turn, the base station may then select the new wireless link based on the channel-quality metric and one or both of the wireless-link loading metric and the coverage-area loading metric. For example, the base station may apply a linear function that includes as variables the channel-quality metric and the wireless-link loading metric, and the base station may select the identified wireless link that best satisfies this function. The base station may then facilitate the handover of the communication from the first wireless link to the selected new wireless link.10-20-2011
20100178921Interference Avoidance In A WCDMA System - A method for a cellular system comprising base stations of a first and a second kind, which control cells of a first and second kinds, and a control function for the base station of the first kind. The control function maintains a list of cells in the vicinity of the first cell, a Neighbour Cell list, and a UE in the first cell measures transmissions from Neighbour Cells and reports them, and said UE makes Detected Set, DS, measurements, and reports them to the control function. The control function searches DS measurement reports for cells of the second kind, and if a cell of the second kind is found, a hand over of the UE is initiated, to prevent transmissions from the UE to cause interference in the base station of the second kind.07-15-2010
20090186614RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - It is possible to provide a radio communication terminal device, a radio communication base station device, and a radio communication method capable of rapidly completing a handover even during DRX/DTX. In the devices and the method, a terminal (07-23-2009
20120309395Carrier Aggregation Support for Home Base Stations - Home base station nodes (12-06-2012
20120309394APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR HAND-IN TO A FEMTO NODE - Methods and apparatuses are provided for causing active hand-in of a device from a macrocell base station to a femto node, which can be an inter-frequency hand-in. The femto node can broadcast a beacon, which can be received and reported by a device to a source base station along with one or more parameters for disambiguating a target femto node. The source base station can communicate a handover message to the femto node or a related femto gateway along with the one or more parameters. The femto node or femto gateway can disambiguate the intended target femto node based in part on the one or more parameters, which can include applying one or more filters. Additionally, the femto node can broadcast multiple beacons to assist in disambiguation of the target femto node. Also, where complete disambiguation is not possible, the femto gateway can prepare multiple femto nodes for hand-in.12-06-2012
20090176494HANDOVER CONTROLLING PROCESS CAPABLE OF DETECTING LOST HANDOVER MESSAGE - The behavior of an MS and Serving BS is clarified in a situation where a handover message, such as a handover request message or an indication message, is lost. By setting a timer and an acknowledgement of the handover message, a handover control process is capable of detecting the loss of the handover message. When the loss is detected, the MS or the Serving BS can resend the lost message or perform some repairing steps to avoid asynchronous states of the MS and the Serving BS.07-09-2009
20090176495Provision of a Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service (MBMS) for a User Equipment Moving Along Cells in a Cellular Mobile Communication System - Procedures are provided for the establishment of MBMS services in different cells of a cellular telecommunications network, in particular, for maintaining the transmission of MBMS data to a particular user equipment, even when it moves from one cell to another when the service is provided in different ways in different cells. In particular, when a user equipment receives a multimedia data service in a first cell via a certain type of connection (i.e., a point-to-point connection/while requiring an RRC Connection, a point-to-multipoint connection without/while requiring an RRC Connection), and moves to a second cell where the type of connection used to provide the service is different, specific actions are undertaken (e.g., request for an RRC Connection, release of an RRC Connection, etc), depending on the type of connection change carried out. Embodiments for the establishment of the most adequate connection (p-t-p, p-t-m) in a cell are disclosed as well (e.g., by sending a message from a SRNC to a CRNC).07-09-2009
20090176493Radio Communication Apparatus and Communication Control Method - An objective of the present invention is to provide a radio communication apparatus and a communication control method capable of executing processing including a handover appropriate for a communication quality of a radio link while suppressing an increase in development cost, when a handover controller is provided between a mobility manager and a link controller. An MIH function unit sets a communication quality threshold of a radio link in a radio link controller, the communication quality threshold being associated with a service quality requirement value notified by the mobility manager. The MIH function unit also notifies a mobility manager that the service quality requirement value corresponding to the communication quality threshold is satisfied, when being notified by the link controller that the communication quality of the radio link reaches the communication quality threshold.07-09-2009
20090176492COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DATA USING COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION RELAY - A mobile station which connects to a base station having a plurality of relays belonging thereto is provided. The mobile station includes a receiving unit which receives a first preamble signal from a first relay and receives a second preamble signal from a second relay, the first relay belonging to a first cluster including an N1 number of relays and the second relay belonging to a second cluster including an N2 number of relays, a control unit which selects the first cluster as an access cluster to connect to the base station, based on the first preamble signal and the second preamble signal, and a transmission unit which transmits an access request message to the first relay, wherein the access request message is transmitted to the base station via the first relay.07-09-2009
20090197604METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RF HANDOFF IN A MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network. A method includes generating a handoff table that comprises RF channels of current and neighboring local operations infrastructures (LOIs) carrying the same content as a current RF channel; detecting a handoff event; disqualifying one or more of the RF channels from the handoff table based on disqualification criteria; selecting a selected RF channel from remaining RF channels in the handoff table that have not been disqualified; and performing a handoff from the current RF channel to the selected RF channel. Another method includes detecting a handoff event; identifying a start of a handoff time interval; determining if RSSI measurements are available at the start of the handoff time interval for RF channels carrying desired content; and performing a handoff to a selected RF channel having a greatest RSSI measurement.08-06-2009
20100190499Method of Handling Cell Change and Related Apparatus - A communication device of handling cell change for a mobile device includes performing a cell change order procedure from a source cell of a first radio access technology to a target cell of a second radio access technology, establishing a returning condition corresponding to access barring of the target cell, and determining that the cell change order procedure is failed when the returning condition is conformed.07-29-2010
20100190501MOBILE TERMINAL, SERVER, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile terminal is configured to perform a hard handover process to switch a base station to which the mobile terminal is connected from among a plurality of base stations and to perform wireless communication with the base station to which the mobile terminal is connected. A terminal-side counting section is configured to perform a counting process for counting time until a session established for wireless communication with the base station is timed out. A terminal-side application processing section is configured to perform a predetermined application process for the mobile terminal. A start signal transmitting section is configured to transmit a handover start signal indicating the start of the hard handover process. An end signal transmitting section is configured to transmit a handover end signal indicating the end of the hard handover process. A terminal-side counting process controlling section controls the progress of the counting process by the terminal-side counting section such that the timeout does not occur during a period from receiving the handover start signal to receiving the handover end signal. The terminal-side application process controlling section interrupts the application process by the terminal-side application processing section during the period.07-29-2010
20110201339Cell Type Information Sharing Between Neighbor Base Stations - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for cell type information sharing between neighbour base stations (08-18-2011
20110201338Method and apparatus for coordination of handoff among MMSS and RAT priorities - A method is provided whereby wireless system operators broadcast each other's carriers in an inter-RAT neighbor list according to protocols that minimize conflicts with carrier-selection algorithms provisioned in served mobile terminals. According to the method of the invention, Access Networks (ANs) broadcast neighbor lists for their own carriers and carriers of different operators serving the same geographical area, the neighbor list being used for inter RAT reselection. The carrier-selection priorities broadcast in the neighbor list are established to be consistent with the priority policy respecting home network and non-home networks as provisioned in the mobiles by their operator. In case of conflict, the cross-RAT priority broadcast by the AN shall take precedence over the cross-RAT priority provisioned in the mobiles. A network ID, such as PLMN_ID, may be broadcast for each carrier in the neighbor list to support reselection precedence followed by the mobile terminal between home network carriers and the carriers of a non-home network.08-18-2011
20110201335METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A LOCATION-BASED VERTICAL HANDOFF OVER HETEROGENEOUS MOBILE ENVIRONMENTS - A multi-radio mobile device receives data transmissions for a wireless communication session from a current serving access network in a coupled heterogeneous network system comprising a plurality of different access networks. The multi-radio mobile device initiates a handoff for the wireless communication session based on the current mobile location. The multi-radio mobile device acquires location based network connection information such as call drop in the current mobile location from a location server so as to make a handoff decision. When the handoff is to be performed, a target access network or a different base station in the current serving access network associated with the lowest call drop rate is selected. The wireless communication session is received from the selected target access network, as a new serving access network, or from the different base station in the current serving access network with the completion of the handoff.08-18-2011
20110201334Energy-Efficient Network Methods and Apparatus - Methods and apparatus for changing the transmission/reception setup of a base station (BS) in a communication network to another transmission/reception setup (such as one using fewer transmit antennas and/or lower channel bandwidths) without affecting communication with user equipments involve “replacing” the existing BS with a “virtual” BS that has the other transmission/reception setup. Replacement can be performed by, for example, ramping down the power of the existing, or first, BS, which has a respective first cell identification (ID), and simultaneously ramping up the power of the virtual, or second, BS, which has a respective second cell ID.08-18-2011
20100029282RESOURCE PARTITIONING IN HETEROGENEOUS ACCESS POINT NETWORKS - Providing for dynamic resource provisioning in wireless communication is described herein. By way of example, various wireless performance metrics are collected by respective network access points as an aggregate measure of wireless network performance. Aggregated data can be utilized to generate a performance model for the network and for individual access points. Changes to the data are updated to the model to provide a steady-state characterization of network performance. Wireless resources are generated for respective access points in a manner that optimizes wireless performance. Additionally, resource assignments can be updated at various intervals to re-optimize for existing wireless conditions, whether event driven or based on performance metrics. Accordingly, a robust and dynamic optimization is provided for wireless network resource provisioning that can accommodate heterogeneous access point networks in a changing topology.02-04-2010
20100029280PDCP BEHAVIOUR AT HANDOVER AND CONNECTION RE-ESTABLISHMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate configuring a flush timer within a wireless environment in order to provide robust communications in regards to handover or re-establishment. The flush timer can be triggered upon successful completion of reconfiguration re-establishment. Moreover, the flush timer can be triggered upon successful completion of handover. In the case of handover and re-establishment, a separate indication of handover to packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) from the start of PDCP flush timer can be utilized.02-04-2010
20100029276METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for performing a handover in a wireless telecommunication system. The present invention measures a signal strength of a serving base station and a neighbor base station, and triggers an anchor base station update when the signal strength of the neighbor base station is higher than the signal strength of the serving base station by a predetermined triggering value, thereby preventing the signal strength of the serving base station from being rapidly decreased and capable of efficiently performing a handover.02-04-2010
20100029277Method and Arrangement in a Radio Access Network - The present invention provides a method in a base station for transmitting cell information. The base station is comprised in a radio access network. The base station is adapted to communicate over a radio link with a user equipment located in a cell in the radio access network. The cell is served by the base station and is surrounded by neighbour cells. The method comprises the step of sending a message to the user equipment, using a point-to-point connection over the radio link. The message comprises neighbour cell information to assist the user equipment in handling mobility in idle mode02-04-2010
20100029275Migration of TCP connections with layer 2 support in wireless environments - Example embodiments provide methods of transparently migrating a reliable transport layer connection between a user and a first base station and a second base station in a wireless network. The method includes receiving at least one transport layer connection state information parameter from the first base station at the second base station. The second base station then determines at least one new transport layer connection parameter based on the at least one transferred transport layer connection state information parameter and at least one network condition at the second base station.02-04-2010
20100022247MEASUREMENT REQUEST REPORT EXTENSIONS FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for generating a measurement report request including media independent handover (MIH) information at a medium access control (MAC) device for use in configuring a physical layer measurement device to measure the physical layer and generate a MIH event report are provided. The request is sent to a physical layer measurement device which is configured using the MIH information. A physical channel is then measured based on the MIH information. A MIH event is generated at the physical layer device and sent to a higher layer device.01-28-2010
20100022246WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A communication terminal device and method operable to control a handover is disclosed. A connection is made to a first wireless communication network. If occurrence of a handover factor is detected, a search is made for a second wireless communication network based on a detection order, and handoff is made.01-28-2010
20100022245RADIO BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio base station for communicating with a mobile station using a radio frame includes a receiver which receives a predetermined code from the mobile station using a predetermined region of the radio frame, and a transmitter which, when the receiver receives the predetermined code, broadcasts structure information indicating a structure of the radio frame.01-28-2010
20100022244METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SUPPORTING CONTINUOUS ACCESS TO CONTENT TRANSMITTED OVER TWO OR MORE NETWORKS - A system and method of supporting access to content over first and second networks that allows a user to access content over different networks, either on the same device or with different devices. The access may be supported in a continuous or seamless matter without substantially interrupting access to the content, such as by instigating the transition during a period of time when minimal, if any content, or content of value, is likely to be missed.01-28-2010
20110217981NETWORK INITIATED CONTEXT ESTABLISHMENT - The invention relates to a method for configuring a context for a connection delivering a packet data service to a mobile terminal via a target wireless access network. The mobile terminal is initially connected to an originating wireless access network and the packet data service may be provided to the mobile terminal via the originating wireless network. Moreover, the invention provides an authentication server, a packet data gateway and a packet data service support node which participate in the context configuration method. To provide a method that allows establishing connection for packet service delivery to a mobile terminal from a wireless access network, as for example a UMTS, as fast as possible the invention suggests to preconfigure service provision of the packet data service via the target wireless access network by establishing a context prior to the mobile terminal connecting to the target wireless access network.09-08-2011
20120302243METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING RADIO ACCESS INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method of transmitting and receiving radio access information that allows a faster and an efficient way of establishing a radio connection between a terminal and a target base station while performing a handover for the terminal to a cell of the target base station. The network transmits in advance, the radio access information and the like, to the terminal so that the terminal can be connected with the target cell in a faster manner which minimizes the total time for the handover process.11-29-2012
20120302242Handover Proactive Association Provisioning Support Method and System - The “HO Proactive Association Provisioning Support, HOPA-ProvS” method/system supports minimizing the handover times of netsurfing smartphones controlled by home Internet Access Devices (IADs) to shared IADs and optimizing earnings from these shared devices. The shared services are provisionable right at the HOs. A Sxyzjkm is made-up from the service of at least one Internet-app with a particular network service quality potentially restricted by given HOPA provisioning systems PSxyzjkm designed such as to optimize e.g. their common earnings from the shared IADx, x, y, z, j, k, m=0, 1, 2, . . . . This enables for any shared-IADx a pre- (and/or post-) HO automatic auction of its service capacity controlled by e.g. a PSxyzjkm and/or a HOPA clearing system. A further innovation is that the sharedIADx automatically generates lucrative clicks on services of location based Internet-apps issued by Ayz passing through sharedIADx's reach. A further innovation facilitates the competitive marketing needs of Internet-apps, as it enables running several such provisioning (and clearing) systems concurrently, even as to any sharedIADx—thus enabling high flexibility as to instant and local/regional system restructuring, e.g. on behalf of pricing strategy adaptations and/or version control. The application of the invention needs no change of the networks between which the above described pre-HO support of their HOs/MHOs shall be performed, i.e. it may work on top of all networks between which HOs or MHOs may be executed.11-29-2012
20120302241TRANSITIONING OF MOBILE DEVICES WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK BETWEEN MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - Network re-selection by an idle mobile device between multiple radio access technologies (RATs) is provided for communication networks without a network-based solution. When a user equipment (UE) enters idle mode while camped to a first RAT network, it initiates an out of service search procedure that causes the UE to search for other RATs within a same public land mobile network (PLMN). If another RAT network is detected, the UE determines whether the priority of the detected RAT is higher than the priority of the first RAT. When the detected RAT has a higher priority than the first RAT, the UE re-selects and camps to that detected RAT network. If the detected RAT does not have a higher priority or no other RAT is detected within the PLMN, the UE re-camps to the first RAT network.11-29-2012
20120302240APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR GROUP WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT (WTRU) HANDOVER - Apparatus and methods of handing over a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) that belongs to a group of WTRUs from an originating base station to a target base station are described. A method includes the WTRU obtaining information regarding a group to which the WTRU has been assigned and the WTRU receiving at least one of handover reconfiguration information that is common to the group and handover reconfiguration information that is specific to the WTRU. On a condition that the WTRU receives the handover reconfiguration information that is specific to the WTRU, the WTRU initiates a synchronization procedure with the target base station based at least on the received handover reconfiguration information.11-29-2012
20120302239LONG-TERM EVOLUTION CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK ENHANCEMENTS - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can provide enhancement with respect to circuit switched fall back. In particular, the architecture can reduce the signaling and delay of conventional systems that are necessitated by establishing a radio resource control connection prior to establishing the circuit switched fall back connection. For example, when user equipment is not in a radio resource control connected state at the time of a circuit switched fall back call, the radio resource control connection can be at least partially avoided by responding to a radio resource control connection request message with a radio resource control connection reject message that includes target cell reselection information.11-29-2012
20090047955AUTOMATED AND SEAMLESS CHANGE OF REPORTING CELL IDENTITY - The technology described here allows a cell to change a cell identity without disrupting ongoing communication in that cell. In one non-limiting example embodiment, a cell identity change message is sent by a base station to one or more UEs being served in that base station. That message includes at least a new cell identifier and preferably also includes information indicating when that new cell identifier becomes active. In another non-limiting example embodiment, a cell identity change message is sent by a base station changing its cell identity to one or more neighboring base stations.02-19-2009
20080268846METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOFF FROM GPRS/GERAN TO LTE EUTRAN - A method and apparatus for supporting a handoff (HO) from a general packet radio service (GPRS), global system for mobile communication radio access network (GERAN), and long term evolution (LTE) evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (EUTRAN) includes receiving an LTE measurement report. An HO is initiated to the LTE network and a relocation request signal is transmitted. A relocation command signal that includes an evolved Node-B (eNB) identifier (ID) is received.10-30-2008
20090264128TERMINAL STATION, BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - An uplink quality information collecting unit transmits, when there is no uplink data transmission from a terminal station for a predetermined time, dummy data to a base station that is currently connected to the terminal station, and collects uplink-quality information that is generated by transmitting the dummy data to the base station. A handover determining unit determines whether to perform a handover based on the uplink-quality information collected by the uplink quality information collecting unit.10-22-2009
20100267388AUTO CONFIGURATION OF MOBILITY ENTITY - Extend the S1-AP protocol to include signaling where the eNodeB's reports all identified geographical relationship between TAs to the MME. When the MME is required to populate a Restriction List it will use the acquired information to only consider TAs that are adjacent to the TAs of the TAI List.10-21-2010
20100190500SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING USER EQUIPMENT INITIATED AND ASSISTED BACKWARD HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to the field of mobility in heterogeneous wireless networks. In particular, the invention proposes a system and method of providing User Equipment (UE) initiated and assisted backward handover in the heterogeneous wireless networks. Depending on certain criteria, the UE may decide that if it needs a handover from a serving network to a target network. The UE initiates the backward handover by sending handover request message to the target network through the serving network. The serving network checks for the capabilities of the UE and authorizes the backward handover. The target network prepares for the backward handover and informs the UE when the target network is ready. The UE then starts the handover procedure.07-29-2010
20090197603SERVING BASE STATION SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for selecting a serving base station for a terminal in a wireless communication network are described. In one design, multiple candidate base stations for the terminal may be identified, with each candidate base station being a candidate for selection as the serving base station for the terminal. The multiple candidate base stations may include base stations with different transmit power levels and/or may support interference mitigation. One of the multiple candidate base stations may be selected as the serving base station. In one design, the serving base station may be selected based on at least one metric for each candidate base station. The at least one metrics may be for pathloss, effective transmit power, effective geometry, projected data rate, control channel reliability, network utility, etc. The selected candidate base station may have a lower SINR than a highest SINR among the multiple candidate base stations.08-06-2009
20110039560SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ACCESS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes evaluating geolocation information associated with a mobile node and using the geolocation information to identify a femtocell capable of providing network access to the mobile node. A primary scrambling code is provided to the mobile node for operation in an idle mode. The method also includes communicating a secondary scrambling code to initiate access to the femtocell by the mobile node when operating in an active mode. In more particular embodiments, the secondary scrambling code is included in a broadcast message that includes a femtocell identifier associated with the femtocell. The femtocell is identified from a plurality of femtocells based on geolocation information associated with the femtocell. The primary scrambling code is part of a range of primary scrambling codes allocated to a plurality of femtocells within a macro network coverage area.02-17-2011
20110306344APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR HANDLING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (INTER-RAT) MOBILITY - A mobile communications device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided. The wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a first service network being an LTE system. The controller module receives, from the first service network, a handover request message for handing over from the first service network to a second service network via the wireless module, and determines whether all configurations in the handover request message are compliable or whether there is a protocol error in the handover request message. Particularly, the second service network utilizes a wireless technology other than the LTE technology, and the handover request message is a MobilityFromEUTRACommand message. Also, the controller module transmits a connection re-establishment request message indicating a reconfiguration failure to the first service network via the wireless module, in response to one of the determinations is positive.12-15-2011
20110306345METHOD FOR REPORTING MDT LOG AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE UTILIZING THE SAME - Methods and mobile communication devices for reporting an MDT log are provided. The method is used in a mobile communication device in a service network comprising a plurality of cells. The method comprises transmitting, by the mobile communication device, an MDT log to the service network via a serving cell upon receiving a request message for the MDT log; and terminating, by the mobile communication device, the transmission of the MDT log in response to a change of the serving cell from a first cell to a second cell in the service network.12-15-2011
20080268845Method and System for Efficient DRX Operation During Handover in LTE - A method and system for efficient DRX operation during handover in LTE in which a user equipment expects handover to occur, the method having the steps of: checking whether a no handover initiation decision is received within a predetermined time period; if no, performing the steps of: ensuring the user equipment is not in a DRX sleep period during reception of a handover grant; checking whether a handover grant is received, and if yes, performing a handover procedure; and if no, resuming a DRX sleep interval; and if yes, ending the process.10-30-2008
20100120429Using Mobility Statistics to Enhance Telecommunications Handover - A method of operating a communications network (05-13-2010
20080293416METHOD FOR RELOCATING SRNS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for performing SRNS relocation in a communications system transmits radio resource information including a ciphering parameter from a source RNC to a target RNC, modifies the ciphering parameter to coincide with a deciphering parameter which a user terminal uses when out-of-sequence data is received, ciphers a data unit based on the modified ciphering parameter, and transmits the ciphered data unit from the target RNC to the user terminal. The method may be modified to operate in UM mode or AM mode and to transmit data over one of several radio bearers. In accordance with another embodiment, the system and method transmits radio resource information from a source RNC to a target RNC and then transmits a data unit from the target RNC to a user terminal. In this case, the data unit including a transmission sequence number which consecutively follows a transmission sequence number of a data unit last transmitted from the source RNC to the user terminal. In accordance with another embodiment, the system and method resets ciphering and state variables in a target RNC and then transmits a message instructing a user terminal to reset a deciphering and state variables to the same or similar values. All the embodiments are advantageous because they ensure successful communications will take place between the target RNC and user terminal after a serving radio network sub-system relocation procedure is performed.11-27-2008
20080287129CELL RESELECTION AND HANDOVER WITH MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE - A method and apparatus for providing wireless communication services, (e.g., multimedia broadcast multicast services (MBMS)), are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) detects a plurality of target cell evolved Node-Bs (eNodeBs) that neighbor a serving cell eNodeB. The WTRU evaluates cell reselection criteria and determines a neighboring target cell eNodeB to reselect. The WTRU receives and reads master information block (MIB) and system information messages of the neighboring target cell eNodeB, and confirms that the determined neighboring target cell eNodeB is not part of a multimedia broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN). The WTRU identifies the neighboring target cell eNodeB to the serving cell eNodeB. The WTRU then receives and reads MIB messages of the neighboring target cell eNodeB again to determine whether the system information has changed and, if so, the WTRU reads the system information and reselects to the neighboring target cell eNodeB, which provides the wireless communication services.11-20-2008
20090318150APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for handover in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes, upon handover execution, estimating a channel, controlling a transmission power of a Mobile Station (MS) depending on the channel estimation result, and transmitting a handover message using the controlled transmission power.12-24-2009
20090149180HANDOVER FAILURE PROCEDURES IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - When a handover failure occurs and/or is anticipated to occur, an optimized cell can be selected and user equipment can transfer to the optimized cell. This optimized cell can differ from a previous cell based upon various factors such as anticipated interference and load balancing. Once there is identification of a handover failure a cell can return to a previous frequency and an appropriate cell can be determined. Instruction of the cell that should be used can be determined by user equipment as well as from a network entity.06-11-2009
20120040676METHOD AND APPRATUS FOR AVOIDING INTEFERENCE IN TERMINAL WITH PLURAL HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION MODULES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for avoiding mutual interference when heterogeneous communication modules such as LTE, wireless LAN, Bluetooth, and GPS coexist in a terminal in a wireless communication system is provided. The terminal may reduce mutual interference when a plurality of communication modules simultaneously operate to efficiently communicate therewith.02-16-2012
20120040678RADIO BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - An LTE base station (02-16-2012
20120040677Handling Radio Resource Control Connection Reconfiguration and Related Communication Device - A method of handling RRC connection reconfiguration for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The mobile device has a RRC connection. The method comprises receiving a first configuration in an RRC message from a network, wherein the first configuration is used for a first secondary cell; ignoring the first configuration when the mobile device is unable to comply with all of the first configuration; and maintaining the RRC connection.02-16-2012
20120040675METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WINDOW SIZE SELECTION TO OPTIMIZE INTER RAT HANDOVER - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a system for optimizing pilot search window size selection for inter RAT handovers is implemented. An IWS may receive a message including at least one measurement value for each 1x pilot PN in a 1x network, obtained from measurements requested by an eNB and performed by a UE. The IWS may select one or more parameters for pilot search based on the at least one measurement value for the UE to use for pilot searching in the 1x network. Further the IWS may transmit the selected one or more parameters for pilot search to the UE for pilot searching in the 1x network.02-16-2012
20120040674Handover Latency Reduction - A UE is provided. The UE includes a processor configured such that the UE receives one or more wireless signals providing handover synchronization information of a first network component relative to one or more second network components. In another embodiment, a first network component is provided. The first network component includes a processor configured to transmit one or more signals providing handover synchronization information of the first network component relative to one or more second network components. The first network component and the one or more second network components are in different radio access networks.02-16-2012
20120040673Method of Handling Measurement Procedure and Related Communication Device - A method of handling a measurement procedure for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The mobile device is equipped at least one receiver. The method includes camping on a serving cell; detecting a type of measurement; using the at least one receiver to perform the measurement according to the type of the measurement and receive system information; and performing a handover procedure to a target cell according to measurement results of the measurement and the system information. The serving cell is served by a first network, and the target cell is served by a second network.02-16-2012
20120040672Uplink Synchronization of TD-SCDMA Multiple USIM Mobile Terminal During Handover - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for uplink synchronization of a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) multiple Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) mobile terminal during a handover. For certain aspects, a method of wireless communication generally includes transmitting, to a Node B, at least one uplink synchronization code from a UE comprising at least a first subscriber identity and a second subscriber identity, receiving timing information for uplink synchronization to the Node B, wherein the timing information is measured based on the at least one uplink synchronization code, and applying the timing information to calls for both of the first and second subscriber identities to synchronize uplink transmissions to the Node B.02-16-2012
20100124930INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT AND DECENTRALIZED CHANNEL ACCESS SCHEMES IN HOTSPOT-AIDED CELLULAR NETWORKS - A system and method are provided wherein one or more femtocell base stations are deployed within a range of a cellular base station and utilize substantially the same frequency band as the cellular base station. Each femtocell base station may be configured to employ one or more interference avoidance techniques such that coexistence between the cellular and the corresponding femtocell base station is enabled. The interference avoidance techniques employed may include use of randomized time or frequency hopping; randomly selecting a predetermined number, or identifying one or more unutilized, frequency subchannels for signal transmission; using two or more transmit and two or more receive antennas; nulling one or more transmissions in a direction of a nearby cellular base station user; handing off at least one cellular user to one of the femtocell base stations and vice versa; and/or reducing the transmission power of at least one femtocell base station.05-20-2010
20100003987Radiophone Apparatus, Hand-Off Method in Radiophone Apparatus, and Communication System - A wireless telephone device, a hand-off method in a wireless telephone device and a communication system are provided to enable the occurrence suppression of instant disconnection in a MAHHO as much as possible. A wireless telephone device (01-07-2010
20090280815Method and System for Transitioning Between Radio Access Technologies (RATS) - A method in a wireless communications device having a first protocol stack for use with a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second protocol stack for use with a second RAT, the first protocol stack comprising a reordering component associated with a first layer of the first protocol stack and arranged to implement a data reordering queue, the method for transitioning from the first RAT to the second RAT, the method comprising: determining that the device should transition from the first RAT to the second RAT; in response to determining that the device should transition, determining that data is present in a reordering queue implemented by the reordering component; sending the data present in the reordering queue to a second layer which is higher than the first layer; and attempting transitioning from the first RAT to the second RAT.11-12-2009
20090061871BASE STATION NEIGHBOR LIST OPTIMIZATION - A method, information processing system, and wireless communication system for optimizing neighbor lists. A set of target communication sectors (03-05-2009
20100015982Method for Recovery from a Failed Handover Procedure in a Telecommunication System - The present invention relates to a method, a user equipment and a network node in a cellular radio network. According to the method of the present invention, the network units detects a failed transmission of a handover command to the UE, which is still having a uplink channel available, and further receives a RRC message from the UE indicating the loss of a serving cell and indicating the strongest cell. The network unit prepares and initiates a new serving cell re-establishment and sends to the UE a RRC reconfiguration message. The UE can then continue normal operation in the new cell.01-21-2010
20120309396MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD12-06-2012
20110319080METHOD OF CELL RESELECTION AND CELLULAR RADIO TERMINAL - A method of cell reselection and a cellular radio terminal are provided. A method of cell reselection comprises measuring, while a mobile station is camped on a network cell, signals of neighboring network cells irrespective of a signal strength and a signal quality of the network cell, and performing a cell reselection of the mobile station if a cell reselection criterion is fulfilled according to a result of the measuring. A cellular radio terminal is configured to carry out the method of cell reselection.12-29-2011
20110319085CONTROLLER, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - User equipment terminal includes a first user equipment terminal capable of communication in a first communication system and a second user equipment terminal capable of communication in a second communication system whose radio access technology is different from those of the first communication system. The first communication system is capable of communication in first and second frequency bands, and the second communication system is capable of communication in the first frequency band. A controller includes a determining unit configured to determine whether a user equipment terminal under the control of the controller is the first user equipment terminal or the second user equipment terminal; a standby system and frequency band specifying unit configured to specify, for the user equipment terminal determined to be the second user equipment terminal, that a communication system and a frequency band in which the user equipment terminal should be in the standby state are the first communication system and the first frequency band, respectively; and a reporting unit configured to report the specified communication system and the frequency band.12-29-2011
20110319084METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING INTERFERENCE IN FEMTOCELL DEPLOYMENTS - Methods and apparatuses are provided for mitigating interference among access points, and/or devices communicating therewith, in unplanned network deployments. Based on determining that one or more served devices potentially interfere with one or more access points, an inter-frequency handover (IFHO) threshold or data rate can be adjusted for the device to cause IFHO or reduce occurrence of interference, and/or a coverage area can be modified so the device can communicate with one or more other access points to mitigate potential interference. Based on determining interference from one or more devices served by other access points, an access point can switch operating modes to a hybrid or open access point to allow the one or more devices to handover to the access point, and/or can boost downlink transmit power to cause the one or more devices to perform IFHO from the other access points to mitigate potential interference.12-29-2011
20110319083SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDOFF IN AN INTEGRATED CELL - A system and method for handoff in an integrated cell. A user equipment selects an integrated cell as a target cell supporting a target network based on a white list and physical cell identities. A cell-to-cell handoff is performed to the target cell. After the cell-to-cell handoff, a base station of the target cell establishes a communication session directly to a service. Then, the user equipment determines whether or not a physical cell identity of a base station of the target cell is an integrated physical cell identity. The user equipment turns on a module for the target network when the physical cell identity of the base station is determined to be the integrated physical cell identity. A heterogeneous-network handoff is then performed, and the base station communicates directly with a service server using a mapping table in order to seamlessly provide the service to the user equipment.12-29-2011
20110319081FAST CELL SELECTION IN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE - A method and apparatus for fast cell selection by a mobile wireless device. The mobile wireless device detects when a first wireless cell fails a set of stored suitability criteria and searches for and locates a set of candidate wireless cells to associate with. The mobile wireless device measures at least one received signal metric for each candidate wireless cell in the set of candidate wireless cells. When a candidate cell in the set of candidate wireless cells is identically the first wireless cell, the mobile wireless device evaluates the suitability of the candidate wireless cell using the stored set of suitability criteria for the first wireless cell and the measured at least one received signal metric for the candidate wireless cell. The mobile wireless communication device associates with the candidate wireless cell when the candidate wireless cell meets the stored set of suitability criteria.12-29-2011
20110319082METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SOURCE IDENTIFICATION FOR SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - An apparatus for enabling source identification for single radio voice call continuity (SR-VCC) in relation to a handover between different RATs may include at least one processor and at least one memory including computer program code. The at least one memory and the computer program code may be configured, with the processor, to cause the apparatus to perform at least receiving an indication of handover between a first radio access technology and a second radio access technology, defining an identity value for source identification associated with the first radio access technology by utilizing a source identification format associated with a third radio access technology, and providing the defined identity value to a network device associated with a target of the handover. A corresponding method and computer program product are also provided.12-29-2011
20110105119RADIO BASE STATIONS, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICES, METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A RADIO BASE STATION, AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In an embodiment, a radio base station is provided. The radio base station may include a message generator configured to generate a message including information specifying whether the radio base station is a radio base station which allows handover to another radio base station.05-05-2011
20120252459Neighbour Cell List in a Private Network - The invention is related to an apparatus including a processor and a memory including a computer program code, the memory and the computer program code configured to, with the processor, cause the apparatus at least to: configure a private network; determine cells belonging to the private network to form a mobility priority group; store neighbouring cell information on at least the cells of the private network; and convey the neighbouring cell information and information on the determined mobility priority group to an authorized user device accessing the private network for providing mobility management control to a user device, the mobility management control being based on the neighbouring cell information and the information on the determined mobility priority group.10-04-2012
20100222060ANCHOR CARRIER RESELECTION AND CELL RESELECTION IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION-ADVANCED - A method and apparatus for performing anchor carrier reselection measurements and ranking in Long Term Evolution-Advanced are disclosed. The measurements are first determined by whether a non-serving anchor carrier has a higher reselection priority than a serving anchor carrier. Other non-serving anchor carrier measurements are started by checking the serving anchor measured results against non-serving anchor carrier measurement thresholds, including the parameter S-IntraCellSearch for measuring and ranking the intra-cell anchor carriers ahead of other non-serving anchor carriers.09-02-2010
20120046037SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING VOICE SERVICE IN A MULTIMEDIA MOBILE NETWORK - User Equipment (UE) receiving non-voice packet switched services in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Terrestial Radio Access Network (eUTRAN) cell undergoes handover to a circuit switched GSM/Edge Radio Access Network (GERAN)/UTRAN cell in response to a voice service page. An eNodeB of the active eUTRAN cell uses a measurement report history for the UE to select an available circuit switched cell for handover. The voice service is established in the circuit switched domain of a GERAN/UTRAN cell to ensure service continuity regardless of UE mobility that would otherwise not be possible if the voice service was established in the eUTRAN cell. A Gs-like interface between a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the CS Core Network and the Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the Evolved Packet Core provides an interface for page requests and location update procedures to be performed.02-23-2012
20120046036PRIMARY CONNECTION STRATEGY FOR VEHICLE ORIGINATED CELLULAR COMMUNICATION TO A CALL CENTER - A system and method for making vehicle originated calls to a telematics service provider or other call center. The method includes identifying a call type associated with a desired wireless communication of speech or data to the call center, and then carrying out one of a number of different call connection processes depending on the call type. For voice channel cellular connections, an in-band modem cellular connection is preferably established in most instances using a connection retry strategy that includes primary, secondary, and possibly tertiary connection attempts. The system and method can be carried out in connection with various cellular system technologies, but is especially suited for use with GSM systems.02-23-2012
20120003978METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL SELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A Mobile Station (MS) operation method for cell selection at initial access in a wireless communication system in which one or more small Base Stations (BSs) are included within a macro BS service coverage area is provided. The method includes performing synchronization based on a preamble signal, after performing the synchronization, transmitting a ranging code to a first BS, after transmitting the ranging code, transmitting a ranging request message including position information of the MS, to the first BS, and receiving a ranging response message including information on at least one candidate BS from the first BS. Thus, the MS can select a BS using position information of the MS in a wireless communication system in which various types of BSs coexist.01-05-2012
20120003977MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes steps of: performing, at a mobile station (UE) having established a first connection in a first cell, a cell selection process when detecting failure in the first connection; transmitting, from the mobile station (UE) to a second cell selected by the cell selection process, a connection re-establishment request signal; determining, at the radio base station managing the second cell, whether or not to have stored context information of the mobile station (UE) having transmitted the connection re-establishment request signal; acquiring, at the radio base station managing the second cell, the context information of the mobile station from a radio base station managing the first cell, when the radio base station managing the second cell determines that it does not store the context information of the mobile station (UE).01-05-2012
20120208540METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS AND USER EQUIPMENT APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method of performing a handover between heterogeneous networks and user equipment apparatus for the same are disclosed. The user equipment apparatus includes a first type communication module configured to transceive a signal with a first type base station (BS) using a first wireless communication scheme, a second type communication module configured to transceive a signal with a second type BS using a second wireless communication scheme, and a processor configured to control the handover to be performed on a second type BS operating in an idle state with the second type communication module when a signal is received from a first type BS operating in an active state with the first type communication module, wherein the signal request that the UE performs the handover to the second type BS operating in an idle state with the second type communication module from the first type BS.08-16-2012
20120009928Method and System for Efficient DRX Operation During Handover in LTE - A method and system for efficient DRX operation during handover in LTE in which a user equipment expects handover to occur, the method having the steps of: checking whether a no handover initiation decision is received within a predetermined time period; if no, performing the steps of: ensuring the user equipment is not in a DRX sleep period during reception of a handover grant; checking whether a handover grant is received, and if yes, performing a handover procedure; and if no, resuming a DRX sleep interval; and if yes, ending the process.01-12-2012
20120009927APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR QUERYING FOR RAT HANDOVER SYSTEM INFORMATION IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A mobile telecommunications system comprises a network of a plurality of cells and at least one user equipment device operable to communicate in the system and to operate in a first RAT and a second RAT. The method comprises, in the user equipment device, determining whether the validity of data stored on the user equipment device will expire within an expiry period, the stored data being for use in handover of operation of the user equipment device from the first RAT to the second RAT.01-12-2012
20120015659Cognitive Interference Management in Wireless Networks with Relays, Macro Cells, Micro Cells, Pico Cells and Femto Cells - Cognitive interference management in Cellular wireless network with relays and micro/pico/femto cells operated in distributed scheduling mode. A cellular system may use RS to improve capacity or for coverage extension. A RS relays the signals between BS 01-19-2012
20120015657MANAGING POWER CONSUMPTION IN BASE STATIONS AND REMOTE ACCESS POINTS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in communication with a wireless network that may include a base station (or base node) and a cell that may be in a dormant mode is contemplated. The WTRU may determine that the WTRU may be within a vicinity of the cell and may generate a report that includes one or more measurements related to a location of the WTRU. The WTRU may transmit the report to the network and may receive an indication to perform one or more measurements related to the cell. The one or more measurements related to the cell may be based on a Common Pilot Channel (CPICH), a Synchronization Channel (SCH), and/or a Broadcast Channel (Primary Common Control Physical Channel) (BCH P-CCPCH) that may be transmitted by the cell upon a command from a base node.01-19-2012
20120015656Method of Handling Multicall Functionality and Related Communication Device - A method for handling multicall functionality for a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes sending an information element (IE) from a first core network node to a second core network node through a first message, wherein the IE contains multicall capability of the first core network node connected to a first network; forwarding the IE from the second core network node to a second network through a second message, the second network connected to the second core network node; and forwarding the IE from the second network to a mobile device through a handover procedure.01-19-2012
20100159929Method and Apparatus for Improving Success Rate and Time of Call Setup for a Mobile Station Experiencing High Interference - A method and apparatus may improve success rate and time of call-setup while a mobile station is experiencing high interference. The method checks (06-24-2010
20120015658METHOD OF PERFORMING ACTIONS RELATED TO HANDOVER BY A MOBILE STATION THAT IS IN POWER SAVING MODE IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing actions related to handover by a mobile station (MS) in a wireless mobile communication system is disclosed. More specifically, the MS receives information from a base station (BS), wherein the information includes at least one action for performing handover and at least one condition corresponding to the at least one action. Furthermore, the MS transmits a request message to perform the at least one action based on the received information from the BS and receives a response message in response to the request message. Lastly, the MS performs the at least one action according to the received response message.01-19-2012
20110165877DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURABLE IP BASED WIRELESS DEVICE AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless communication and control system including a wireless device. There is a central server for storing communication protocols and control protocols and communicating the communication protocols and selectively communicating the control protocols between the wireless device and the central server. A communication protocol configures the system for communication and control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of intelligent appliance controllers. Alternately the control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of Internet terminals. The wireless device is any hand-held communication device, such as a hand-held computing device, wireless telephone, or cellular phone.07-07-2011
20110165878METHOD AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A CELLULAR NETWORK WITH FEMTOCELLS - The present invention provides method and arrangements for dynamically and automatically obtaining a macro layer TA footprint for a femtocell, i.e. the femtocell's location in relation to the macro layer TAs, and to use this information to minimize signaling load from Tracking Area Updating in conjunction with femtocells.07-07-2011
20110165876MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND EXCHANGE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step of causing a mobile station 07-07-2011
20110165875METHODS TO CONFIGURE PROXIMITY INDICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method and system configures proximity indication in a wireless device as part of a network handover procedure to handover the wireless device from a first radio access network (RAN) using a radio access technology (RAT) to a second RAN using a different RAT. The first RAN may use third generation (3G) wireless technology to initiate a process to hand over a wireless device to the second RAN, which utilizes long term evolution (LTE) technology. As part of the handover process, the second RAN generates a handover command message that additionally includes proximity indication configuration information to enable the wireless device to configure proximity indication reporting. The handover command message is sent through the first RAN to the wireless device, where the handover command message is utilized to configure proximity indication reporting and to perform the handover from the first RAN to the second RAN.07-07-2011
20100081439DYNAMIC SECTORS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for dynamic sector creation is disclosed. The method may include determining that a first sector of a cell is overloaded. The method may also include creating a second sector within the first sector. The method may further include transferring one or more mobile stations from the first sector to the second sector.04-01-2010
20120178456METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and arrangements in a base station and a User Equipment are provided. The methods and arrangements relates to the scenario when the UE is handed over from a source base station to a target base station in a handover scenario, and wherein the target base station may not support functionalities which the source base station and the UE support. The method in the UE comprises receiving (07-12-2012
20120178455RADIO BASE STATION AND HANDOVER INSTRUCTING METHOD - A radio base station wherein when UE connected to an LTE access network performs a CS Fallback, the time required for the CS Fallback can be reduced. An eNB (07-12-2012
20120178454METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING IDENTIFIER OF SMALL CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING HIERARCHICAL CELL STRUCTURE - A method and an apparatus for obtaining a small cell identifier in a wireless communication system having a hierarchical cell structure are provided. The method includes obtaining a small cell identifier of a terminal in a wireless communication system of a hierarchical cell structure, transmitting resource information allocated for a Random Access Channel (RACH) of a terminal to a small base station, receiving state information regarding the RACH of the terminal from the small base station, determining at least one small base station adjacent to the terminal using the state information regarding the RACH, and transmitting cell IDentifier (ID) information of the determined small base station to the terminal.07-12-2012
20120115484COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A system that selects an optimum codec flexibly adapting to a change in the communication environment and to switch to the optimum codec during communication. A communication control system includes a handover detection unit detecting a handover in which a communication terminal present in a communication area formed by a BTS moves from the communication area to a communication area formed by another BTS, an information acquisition unit acquiring, if the handover detection unit detects a handover, information based on the handover for use in codec switching, a codec selecting unit selecting a codec after switching based on the information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and a codec switching unit controlling such that the codec after switching that is selected by the codec selecting unit is applied to the communication currently performed.05-10-2012
20120115483Method for Transferring a Communication Session in a Telecommunications Network From a First Connection to a Second Connection - The invention relates to an application server in a telecommunications network for transferring a communication session from a first connection between a first client and a remote client to a second connection between a second client and the remote client. The communication session comprises a media path and a signalling path. The application server being arranged to a) receive a transfer request, b) send a set-up request to the second client, for setting up the second connection, c1) transfer the signalling path, c2) transfer the media path, d) send an update message towards the remote party, the update message comprising an indication that the transfer has been executed, and e) send a termination message to the first client to terminate the first connection.05-10-2012
20120115482METHOD IN WHICH A MOBILE STATION RECEIVES INFORMATION ON A PERIPHERAL LEGACY BASE STATION IN A LEGACY SUPPORT MODE - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method and an apparatus for acquiring system information in a mobile communication system in which a legacy system and an advanced system coexist. A method of receiving system information on a peripheral base station in a mobile communication system includes receiving a second message containing time information for receiving, through a second region of a serving base station, a first message broadcasted through a first region of the serving base station and receiving the first message through the first region of the serving base station using the time information, the first message containing system information on neighbor legacy base stations and/or on the first region of neighbor advanced base stations which operate in a mixed mode.05-10-2012
20100222059OPTIMIZED SERVING DUAL CELL CHANGE - A method and apparatus for implementing serving cell change in a multi-cell wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) are disclosed. Serving cell information is received and stored by the WTRU to preconfigure a primary and secondary serving cell of an added cell to an active set. At least one of the preconfigured primary and secondary serving cells are monitored for a handover indication. Serving cell change is to the primary and secondary serving cells us performed using the preconfigured serving cell information upon receipt of a handover indication.09-02-2010
20120058768SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESTRICTING MOBILITY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - This invention provides a method, system and apparatus for controlling mobility on a wireless network, which includes retrieving a network mobility preference, the network mobility preference indicating a level of mobility service for the mobile station, the level of mobility service indicating the extent to which the mobile station can handoff among base stations of the wireless network, and establishing a level of mobility service for the mobile station based on the retrieved network mobility preference. The method and apparatus may further include determining the level of mobility service for the mobile station to be fully or partially restricted based on the mobility preference.03-08-2012
20120058767SIGNALING SUPPORT FOR ANTENNA SELECTION USING SUBSET LISTS AND SUBSET MASKS - A communication device is described herein that has control (or at least partial control) over which virtual antenna(s) in one or more base stations to use for transmissions. In one embodiment, the mobile phone performs the following steps: (03-08-2012
20120058766METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING USER SERVICE CONTINUITY - A method, a system and a device for maintaining user service continuity are provided in an embodiment of the present invention. The method includes prohibiting a UE from accessing a forbidden network before handover is complete when the UE needs to perform network handover if the UE adopts a SIM access technology, thus avoiding service interruption of a SIM user due to access to an incorrect network. A system and a device for maintaining user service continuity are provided in an embodiment of the present invention.03-08-2012
20120028642CODEC RATE ADAPTATION FOR RADIO CHANNEL RATE CHANGE - Speech signals to be sent between a first node and a second node via a wireless communication system are Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) encoded. A need to change the first node's first data transmission rate over a radio interface to a second different data transmission rate is determined. A new AMR source bit rate is then determined for both nodes. Information is sent to the second node, in advance of changing the data transmission rate over the radio interface, requesting the second node to change towards the new AMR source bit rate. After a predetermined time period sufficient for the second node to change from the current AMR source bit rate to the new AMR source bit rate expires or after the second node indicates a change to the new AMR source bit rate, the first node starts transmitting at the second data transmission rate over the radio interface.02-02-2012
20120028644MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INTERFERENCE OF NEIGHBORHOOD SUPPRESSION METHOD AND BASE STATION IN THE SYSTEM - A mobile communication system, a neighboring cell interference suppression method and a base station in the mobile communication are disclosed. When a NodeB establishes a non-serving radio link for a UE, only a control plane connection is established, and contribution of the UE to uplink load in a cell is estimated by means of an established uplink channel so that contribution of UEs in neighboring cells to the uplink load becomes predictable, and the transmit power of the UE can be controlled by means of an established downlink channel based on the estimation result, and thereby interference from the neighboring cells to which the overlap area belongs can be suppressed effectively, and the system stability and accuracy in fast dispatching by the NodeB can be improved. If the non-serving radio link becomes a serving radio link during the handover, a channel for carrying data is added to the radio link.02-02-2012
20120028643METHOD AND SYSTEM TO SUPPORT USER-CENTRIC SELECTION OF POINT OF ATTACHMENT THROUGH MOMENTARY INTERACTIVE MULTIMEDIA EXPERIENCE CONVEYANCE AND THROUGH CORRELATION OF WEB LINKS TO QUALITY AND EXPERIENCE METRICS - A system and method for improving quality of experience (QoE) of using a mobile device can comprise utilization of stored information relating to RANs of service providers and QoE ratings, receiving an event related to the RANs or to mobile Web browsing actions, receiving requests for QoE metrics based on the event, parsing and interpreting results of the QoE metrics; preparing and beginning an emulation session of the RANs, choosing a presentation style, rendering QoE in accordance with the browser actions and the presentation style which can be purely quantitative comparison, pre-recorded session, limited interaction-emulated session, live interactive session and live automatically controlled non-interactive session, and enabling user input according to the presentation style. The method can comprise standardizing information to allow comparison of the information, rendering network-related information on a display and updating the presentation of the network-related information to maintain a fair representation of the RANs being emulated.02-02-2012
20120064896METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING LOAD INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for acquiring load information. In one method, a source access controller and a target access controller can interact through inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) handover related messages so that a source RAT system can acquire load information of a target RAT system when an inter-RAT Packet Switched (PS) handover is performed. This enables load balancing between different RAT systems so as to guarantee communications quality of the systems. In another method of the present invention, the source access controller and the target access controller interact through a Radio Access Network (RAN) Information Management (RIM) based load information request message and an RIM based load information response message, so that the source RAT system can acquire load information of the target RAT system before an inter-RAT PS domain handover is performed.03-15-2012
20120064897INTER-RAT/ FREQUENCY AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR RELATION LIST MANAGEMENT - A telecommunications system comprises a serving radio base station and a candidate radio base station which are different with respect to at least one of frequency and radio access technology. The serving radio base station comprises a radio base station to which a wireless mobile station provides measurement reports. A method comprises the serving radio base station allowing the mobile station to obtain information broadcasted by the candidate radio base station. The information is either information for locating Cell Global Identity (CGI) of the candidate radio base station or the Cell Global Identity (CGI) itself of the radio base station. The mobile station obtains the information from the candidate radio base station during at least one reading gap. The reading gap is a time period in which the mobile station does not receive information from the serving radio base station.03-15-2012
20120064895RESOURCE CONTROL METHOD, RELEVANT DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A resource control method, a relevant device, and a relevant system are disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. The resource control method includes: determining another network suitable for a User Equipment (UE) according to resource information requested by the UE when the UE accesses multiple networks using a same Access Point Name (APN) and sends a resource request in a current network, and notifying information about the determined another network to the UE. By using the technical solutions provided in the embodiment of the present invention, a network-side device can properly control resources.03-15-2012
20120064893PREDICTION OF MOBILE BANDWIDTH AND USAGE REQUIREMENTS - Techniques for determining data requirements for cellular phone use within one or more cells of a cellular network. A central processing repository receives user information identifying a cellular phone user within a cell of the network. In response, the central processing repository accesses usage profile information. The usage profile information specifies historical data usage in the cell for a given location and time. The central processing repository determines, based on the usage profile information, a current mode of operation and a probability that the current mode of operation will change. The central processing repository provides the current mode of operation and probability of mode change to a cell tower of the cell.03-15-2012
20120157101COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - In a communication system in which a mobile station apparatus is connected to a base station apparatus simultaneously using a plurality of frequency bands, an event is efficiently determined concerning measurement of reception qualities of the frequency bands. The mobile station apparatus includes: a reception unit that receives from the base station apparatus an event condition for measuring a reception quality of at least one carrier component defined in the frequency bands different from each other and a parameter used for determining whether or not the event condition is satisfied; a measurement processing unit that measures the reception quality of the at least one carrier component; a cell determination unit that determines whether to adjust the received parameter; and an event determination unit that sets the event condition based on the received parameter or the adjusted parameter and that determines whether or not the set event condition is satisfied.06-21-2012
20120064894ANTENNA MATCHING STRUCTURE, ANTENNA MATCHING METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - The present invention relates to an antenna matching structure, an antenna matching method and a wireless communication terminal. In which, the antenna matching structure comprising: a measuring unit configured to measure a RSSI value; a control unit configured to generate a first switching control signal when the RSSI value measured by the measuring unit is less than a predetermined threshold; and a parameter switching unit configured to select one set of matching parameters from predetermined at least one set of matching parameters according to the first switching control signal, and switch current matching parameters of the adjustable antenna matching circuit to the selected matching parameters. According to the embodiments of the present invention, a higher RSSI value can be acquired to ensure the signal transmission quality.03-15-2012
20120157102Handover Method and Handover Device - The present invention discloses a handover method and a handover device. An attachment point is handed over from a service station of a first access network to a handover server of the first access network before a UE hands over from the first access network to a second access network. The handover server of the first access network is interacted with through the tunnel to enter an idle mode of the first access network after completing network access in the second access network. Attachment to a destination station of the first access network is performed to quit the idle mode and re-access the first access network when the UE hands over back to the first access network.06-21-2012
20100144352METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING MOBILE TERMINATED CALL SET UP PERFORMANCE - An apparatus and method for improving mobile-terminated call set-up performance comprising triggering an inter-radio access technology (IRAT) transition from a source cell to a target cell, remembering the deterministic timing of a plurality of paging occasions in the source cell, and using the deterministic timing for checking at least one paging channel in the source cell during transition to the target cell and before starting to monitor at least one paging channel in the target cell.06-10-2010
20090069012METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL HANDOFF - A method for handoff between cells in a communication system includes the network sends a cell individual offset preset for a cell in the active set relative to each of its neighboring cells respectively to a terminal; after measuring the cell in the active set and its neighboring cells, the terminal evaluates the measurement in accordance with the measurement result and the cell individual offset for the cell in the active set relative to its each neighboring cell; the terminal then submits a measurement report to the network in accordance with the measurement evaluation result; the network instructs the terminal to perform a handoff between cells in accordance with the measurement report. The invention also discloses a network controller and a terminal corresponding to the method. With the invention, the cell individual offset for a cell is set relative to its each neighboring cell so that the handoff between cells can be more accurate. As a result, user of the terminal can obtain better experience.03-12-2009
20110092213METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING FRESH SECURITY CONTEXT DURING INTERSYSTEM MOBILITY - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to provide fresh security context during intersystem mobility. A method is provided which includes receiving an indication of handover of a remote device from a source system to a target system. The target system may implement a communications standard different from that of the source system. The method also includes determining a current sequence number value of a security context maintained in the source system. The method additionally includes deriving a fresh mapped security context for the target system based at least in part upon the determined sequence number value. The method further includes providing the derived fresh mapped security context to the target system.04-21-2011
20110092212BASE STATION CONTROL MODULE, WIRELESS BASE STATION, BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, AND BASE STATION CONTROL METHOD - A wireless base station that solves a problem in which both the suppression of a power consumption of a wireless base station and the reduction of the period that a mobile terminal takes to identify a cell cannot be satisfied at a time is provided. Determination section 04-21-2011
20110092211SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING EXTENDING FEMTOCELL COVERAGE - Femtocell coverage can be extended across a coverage area by providing a cluster of femtocell access points (FAPs). Each FAP is independently registered with a core network and provisioned with a location area code common to each FAP. At hand-in from the macrocell network, an association is made between the mobile station and the hand-in FAP, which becomes an anchor FAP for the duration of the mobile station's presence within the cluster. Calls between the mobile station and the core network are routed via a servicing FAP of the cluster and the anchor FAP.04-21-2011
20110092210METHOD OF DETERMINING WIRELESS HAND OFF PARAMETERS - The present invention provides a method of determining handoff parameters. One embodiment of the method includes determining values of a hysteresis for a handoff from a serving cell, one or more pairwise offset values for hand off between the serving cell and one or more neighbor cells, and one or more times-to-trigger (TTTs) for hand off between the serving cell and the neighbor cell(s). The values may be determined So that hand off is triggered beyond a first distance from the serving cell selected to avoid ping-ponging and within a second distance from the serving cell selected so that a mobile unit moving at a selected velocity does not travel beyond a third distance within the TTT.04-21-2011
20110092209SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING HANDOVER CONTROL USING RESOURCE RESERVATION WITH FREQUENCY REUSE - Systems, methods and apparatus for facilitating handover control using resource reservation with frequency reuse are provided. In one embodiment, the method can include: transmitting scheduling information for the transmission of information on frequencies corresponding to an unreserved portion of a frequency band. The method can also include transmitting scheduling information for the transmission of information on frequencies corresponding to a reserved portion of the frequency band. A frequency reuse scheme can be employed over the frequencies corresponding to the reserved portion of the frequency band, and the information transmitted on the frequencies corresponding to the reserved portion of the frequency band can be handover signalling information.04-21-2011
20110065438METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR SUPPORTING FAST CARRIER RESELECTION - In order to utilize uplink multi-carrier communication more efficiently and to support fast inter-frequency handovers and other types of carrier reallocations, carrier reallocation decisions are performed by the serving base station. Various non-limiting example embodiments are described for executing the base station carrier reallocation decision.03-17-2011
20110065437MOBILE STATION AND METHOD OF RECONNECTION PROCESS - There is provided a mobile station that minimizes a pause or a silent period during communication at the time of a reconnection process of communication, thereby to improve the user's convenience and achieve the reduction in the load applied onto the communication network or the mobile station. When an out of synchronization detection unit 03-17-2011
20110065436INTER-PLMN HANDOVER IN A SHARED RADIO NETWORK - Handover control in a control node, said control node controlling allocation of radio resources in a first set of cells belonging to at least two different Public Land Mobile Networks, said first set of cells including at least a first subset of cells belonging to a first Public Land Mobile Network and a second subset of cells belonging to a second Public Land Mobile Network. Traffic load exceeding a predefined level is detected (03-17-2011
20110065435BEARER CONTROL MODE (NW-ONLY OR USER-ONLY) HANDLING IN INTERSYSTEM HANDOVER - A method, a gateway node, a policy control node and a infrastructure network for handling a handover of a User Equipment communicating wirelessly with the infrastructure network. A first gateway node receives handover information indicative of a handover of the user equipment between two radio access networks the first gateway node determining a bearer control mode on the basis of the handover information the first gateway node transmitting control information determined on the basis of the bearer control mode to a policy control node the first gateway node controlling the bearer binding on the basis of the bearer control mode.03-17-2011
20110105124MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - The present invention relates to a mobile communication method in which a mobile station performs a handover from a handover source radio base station to a handover target radio base station. The mobile communication method includes the steps of: (A) acquiring, at the handover target radio base station, from the handover source radio base station or a switching center, a key for calculating a first key for generating a certain key used in a communication between the handover target radio base station and the mobile station; and (B) acquiring, at the handover target radio base station, from the switching center, a second key for calculating a first key for generating a certain key used in a communication between a next handover target radio base station and the mobile station.05-05-2011
20110105123APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of reporting a measurement result in a wireless communication system is provided. An user equipment receives a measurement parameter for measurement of a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell and measures signal quality of at least one CSG cell on the basis of the measurement parameter. The user equipment determines at least one CSG cell's CSG identity (ID) by using system information of the at least one CSG cell and determines at least one member CSG cell having the user equipment as a member thereof from the at least one CSG cell on the basis of the at least one CSG cell's CSG ID. The user equipment selects a member CSG cell to send a measurement report from the at least one member CSG cell, and transmits the measurement report comprising signal quality for the selected member CSG cell.05-05-2011
20110105122Method of Handling Handover Measurement in a Discontinuous Reception Mode and Related Communication Device - A method of handling measurement in a DRX mode is for a mobile device in a wireless communication system. The method comprises being requested to perform inter-frequency measurement or inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurement after the mobile device performs a handover procedure or a re-establishment procedure and performing the inter-frequency measurement or inter-RAT measurement when the mobile device stays in a DRX period of the DRX mode.05-05-2011
20110105121E-UTRAN AND HANDOVER - The present invention relates to a method, a base station and an interface for handover in a wireless communication network. Handover is initiated when the signal quality falls below a predetermined value. Random access serves as an uplink procedure to enable the UE to make handover from a first base station (eNodeB) to a suitable second base station (eNodeB). In the present invention, random access parameters are exchanged between second and first base station before said first base station signals said random access parameters to said user equipment.05-05-2011
20110105120METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MONITOR A CHANNEL TO DETERMINE NEIGHBOR CELL INFORMATION - Methods and apparatus to monitor a channel to determine neighbor cell information are disclosed. An example method for a first mobile station to determine cell information for a first cell disclosed herein comprises monitoring a channel for messages containing cell information, receiving a first message via the monitored channel and addressed to a second mobile station, the first message including first cell information, and storing the first cell information for a time period after receiving the first message.05-05-2011
20110034172Mobile Communication System, Mobile Station Device, Base Station Device and Handover Method - A mobile station which performs a soft handover from a serving base station to a base station in which frame synchronization is established in the uplink direction with the base station calculates the time difference between the receive timing of a downlink signal sent from the base station and the receive timing of a broadcast control channel sent from the base station at S02-10-2011
20090280810METHOD FOR TRANSITIONING SUPPORT OF COMMUNICATION SESSIONS FOR A USER ELEMENT BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF SUBSYSTEMS OF DIFFERENT GENERATIONS - The present invention provides a method for transitioning a local access leg of a communication session for a user element from a serving access network of one generation to a target access network of another generation, where one access network is in a circuit-switched subsystem domain and the other is in a packet subsystem domain. To transition the local access leg for the user element between the first access network and the second access network, a transitional cell is employed. The local access leg is first transferred to a transitional cell from a serving cell of the serving access network, and is then immediately transferred to a target cell of the target access network, while maintaining continuity of the communication session across both transfers. Maintaining continuity of the communication session means that there is no interruption in the communication session during the transitions.11-12-2009
20100093354SYSTEM AND METHOD TO UTILIZE PRE-ASSIGNED RESOURCES TO SUPPORT HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION FROM A MACRO BASE STATION TO A FEMTO BASE STATION - Apparatus and methods of hand-in of a call from a macro node to a femto node include receiving, at a target interface to a plurality of access points, a handoff request to handoff a call of a mobile station, wherein the handoff request comprises a cellular identifier corresponding to a pilot identifier of a pilot signal. Further, the apparatus and methods include determining that the plurality of access points share the cell identifier, and forwarding the handoff request to the plurality of access points that share the cell identifier. Additionally, the apparatus and methods include generating a handoff request acknowledgement comprising a pre-reserved resource that is common to the plurality of access points, wherein the pre-reserved resource enables the mobile station to communicate with the plurality of access points, and transmitting the handoff request acknowledgement to initiate the hand-in to one of the plurality of access points.04-15-2010
20100093355METHOD FOR ENABLING THE DETERMINATION OF A CELL IN WHICH A MOBILE TERMINAL IS LOCATED AMONG A GROUP OF CELLS OF A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention concerns a method for enabling the determination of a cell in which a mobile terminal is located among a group of cells of a wireless cellular telecommunication network. Each cell of a group of cells is managed by a base station. The method comprises the steps of:—detecting the presence of the mobile terminal in the group of cells,—enabling the mobile terminal to transfer data to at least a part of the base stations which manage a cell of the group of cells,—receiving data from the mobile terminal through a base station which manages one cell of the group of cells,—determining the cell managed by the base station through which the data are received as the cell in which the mobile terminal is located.04-15-2010
20100093351 CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station (04-15-2010
20100093353METHOD FOR DETACHMENT OF MS MOVING BETWEEN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for detachment of a mobile set within the equivalent route area moving between the communication systems comprising steps of: during the detachment process is implemented between a mobile set and a service node in one communication system, the service node generates one or more messages and transmits it to the service nodes in one or more communication system within the ERA. If the message is transmitted to the service node within the ERA of only one communication system, this service node transmits this message or the message generated according to this message to the service nodes within the ERA of the other communication system. With the method proposed in present invention, when a mobile is detached from two or more communication systems which share the same ERA, the service nodes in all communication systems within the ERA can still correctly manage the relevant information on this mobile set.04-15-2010
20100093352System and Method Providing Notifycation of Selected Service in Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service - The present invention aims to reduce the likelihood of congestion occurrence and allow performing appropriate radio resource management at the session start of an MBMS broadcast service, and provides a system of notifying a selected service in a Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service standardized in 3GPP; the system comprises: a mobile device which, when MBMS Selected Services information of interest is available, provides notification of the MBMS Selected Services information; and a radio network controller which, upon receipt of the MBMS Selected Services information from the mobile device, stores and utilizes the same for radio resource management of a concerned MBMS Service.04-15-2010
20100093350PROCEDURES FOR OPERATING IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION IDLE MODE - Various procedures for operating a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in Long Term Evolution (LTE) Idle mode are described. The procedures include: methods for applying cell reselection priorities in the WTRU, methods for converting a mobility state of the WTRU between operating modes, a method for assigning a mobility state to the WTRU, and a method for determining whether the WTRU may access a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell. Also described are methods and an apparatus on the operations of the LTE mobility state transition mechanism between LTE WTRU Idle mode and Connected mode, a definition of the Pcompensation parameter for LTE, inter-frequency and inter-radio access technology cell reselection priority validity definitions, and coverage extension principles for CSG cells.04-15-2010
20120315907Methods and Mechanisms to Enable Priority Calls in a Cell Through Pre-Emption of Other Calls - A method is provided for managing a priority call in a serving cell. The method comprises, when a priority call is in progress in the serving cell, an access device in the serving cell determining an amount of resources available in the serving cell. The method further comprises when the amount of resources available in the serving cell is below a threshold, the access device causing at least one non-priority call in the serving cell to be handed over to a target cell.12-13-2012
20120122457RADIO BASE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - An LTE base station (05-17-2012
20120122456Method and System for a Transmitting Mobility State - A method for transmitting a mobility state is provided in the present invention, the method includes: when an source evolved NodeB (eNB) performs a handover of a user equipment (UE) in a connectivity state, it sends the UE historical information to a target eNB; the target eNB decides a mobility state of the UE according to the UE historical information. Alternatively, when the source eNB performs a handover of the UE in a connectivity state, it decides the mobility state of the UE according to the UE historical information, sets the corresponding mobility state instruction information and sends it to the target eNB; the target eNB acquires the mobility state corresponding to the UE according to the received mobility state instruction information. A system for transmitting a mobility state is also provided in the present invention.05-17-2012
20120122455Method and Arrangement in a Radio Communications System for Dynamic Carrier Mode Switching - A method in a radio network node for dynamic carrier mode switching is provided. The radio network node is comprised in a radio communications system. The radio network node is configured to operate in a legacy mode and is further configured to operate in a non legacy mode. At least one carrier is operated so that it switches (05-17-2012
20090131057NEIGHBORING CELL INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN SC-FDMA - The invention relates to a method for reconfiguring zones of a cell sector in a cellular mobile communication system employing a frequency division multiplex access scheme comprising the steps of separating a cell sector into zones of a predetermined size, allocating radio resources to users located in the zones, and altering the predetermined zone size upon a change of a radio resource management parameter. The invention also relates to a base station of a cellular mobile communication system.05-21-2009
20090131055METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SIGNALING AND PROCEDURE FOR SEQUENCE HOPPING PATTERN CHANGE DURING HANDOVER - A method and apparatus are provided for updating a sequence hopping (SH) pattern of an uplink channel during handover from a current cell having a current SH pattern. At least one downlink channel of each neighbor cell of the current cell is monitored. Information indicative of the monitored downlink channels of the neighbor cells is transmitted to the current cell. Prior to receiving a handover command from the current cell a target cell from among the neighbor cells is anticipated and a common downlink channel of the anticipated target cell is monitored to determine information representative of a target SH pattern of the target cell.05-21-2009
20090131053Internetworking of Cellular Radio Networks and Wireless Data Networks - The invention provides a method, to be used by a RNC (05-21-2009
20110183672METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus of a serving base station for determining handover of a terminal in a mobile communications system are provided, including determining whether a measurement report message is received from a User Equipment (UE); when receiving the measurement report message, determining whether a channel status value of the UE satisfies a preset condition during a certain time; and determining whether to hand over the UE according to the determination result.07-28-2011
20110183675COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER TO FEMTO BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR THE SAME - A wireless communication system for performing a handover to a femto base station is provided. The system includes user equipment, a femto subscriber information storage, a core network entity or a macro base station or a serving base station. The femto subscriber information storage stores a list of femto base stations that allows the access of user equipment, i.e., an accessible list. The core network entity or the macro base station receives and stores the accessible list. When any of the user equipment requests a handover toward a femto base station as a target base station, and the target base station is included in the accessible list stored, the core network entity or the macro base station requests a handover toward the target base station. A method for performing a handover to the core network entity and the macro base station is also provided.07-28-2011
20110183674TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER THEREOF - A method for handover of the present invention is a method for handover of a terminal supporting a multi-carrier including a first carrier and a second carrier, the method including: transmitting a handover request message to a serving base station; receiving a handover response message from the serving base station according to a handover response message transmitted from a target base station to the serving base station; after receiving the handover response message from the serving base station, transmitting and receiving data to and from the serving base station using the first carrier; and performing a handover signaling process to the target base station using the second carrier.07-28-2011
20110183673RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE TERMINAL - To provide a radio base station apparatus and mobile terminal for enabling cell selection to be performed in a faster cell switching period in handover, the radio base station apparatus of the invention has a plurality of transmission/reception sections capable of being extended to remote sites, an FCS application determining section that determines whether to apply fast cell selection in handover based on information from the mobile terminal, and a multi-cell scheduling control section that controls transmission/non-transmission of the first and second transmission/reception sections when the FCS application determining section determines that FCS is applied.07-28-2011
20110183671MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOVER METHOD FOR THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal and a handover method for the mobile terminal are disclosed. A mobile terminal according to an embodiment of the invention may include a control unit configured to control the mobile terminal to perform a handover to a base station based on at least one of an on-off traffic characteristic of downlink data received from the base station and an on-off traffic characteristic of uplink data transmitted to the base station. When certain aspects of the invention are applied, the amount of data loss during a handover can be minimized.07-28-2011
20120129529Method and System for Cell Update - The present invention discloses a method and system for cell update. The method comprises: a target home NodeB receiving cell update signaling sent by a User Equipment (UE)); the target home NodeB sending signaling carrying cell update information to a Source Radio Network Controller (SRNC) through a home NodeB gateway and a core network, or sending the signaling carrying the cell update information to a source home NodeB through the home NodeB gateway; the target home NodeB receiving signaling carrying UE. Context and returned by the SRNC or the source home NodeB; and the target home NodeB allocating corresponding radio resources to the UE and sending a cell update confirmation message to the UE. The system is used to implement the method for cell update. The method and system enables the UE to perform cell update without restriction.05-24-2012
20120129531METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING A LOCAL SWITCHING OF A LOCAL CALL - The present invention provides a method for implementing local call local switch, which includes that: a source MSC receives a handover request from a source BSS; the source MSC transfers a local reference to a destination BSS; and the destination BSS judges whether local switch can be triggered according to the received local reference, and executes the local switch if a judgment result is that the local switch can be triggered. The present invention further provides a system for implementing local call local switch, which includes a MSC and a BSS, wherein the MSC includes a MSC request module and a MSC processing module, and the BSS includes a BSS request module and a BSS processing module, so as to support for implementing the local call local switch in a handover scenario. The method and the system solve the problem of unsuccessful local switch due to BSS connecting multiple MSCs.05-24-2012
20120129528BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes a receiver which receives a piece of state information indicating whether or not a mobile station passes through a location on a fixed route, and a processor which performs processing which determines that the mobile station is moving on the fixed route when the received state information of the mobile station performing a handover to a cell formed by the base station indicates that the mobile station passes through a location on the fixed route.05-24-2012
20120129527WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - When a femto cell base station detects an intense uplink interference, the femto cell base station autonomously extends the femto cell so as to raise a probability that a mobile terminal around the original femto cell may be connected to the femto cell base station. If the mobile terminal connects to the femto cell base station, the uplink interference is reduced and total throughput is improved. Additionally, if a resultant effect of interference reduction is low, the femto cell base station returns the mobile terminal, which is connected to the femto cell base station due to the extension of the femto cell, to the original connection destination. If an evaluative criterion meets a predetermined condition, the femto cell base station restores the extended femto cell to the original size. These actions prevent degradation of performance caused by concentration of the connections of mobile terminals to the femto cell base station.05-24-2012
20120165020MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile station UE according to the present invention comprising a gist thereof is to include, a measurement configuration acquisition unit 06-28-2012
20120165019METHOD FOR MANAGING CS IRAT HANDOVER FROM 2G/3G NETWORK TO LTE NETWORK - The invention relates to a method to manage a CS IRAT (Circuit Switch Inter RAT) handover of a user equipment (UE) from a 2G/3G network to a LTE (Long Term Evolution) network in which: the UE transmits its CS IRAT handover from 2G/3G to LTE capabilities to the BSC/RNC node; the BSC/RNC node selects a routing paths among said different routing paths based on the UE capabilities for CS IRAT handover from 2G/3G to LTE and transmits to a MSC/VLR node (Mobile services Switching Center) of said 2G/3G network a Handover message comprising an information indicative of the selected path corresponding to the selected CS handover technology; and the MSC/VLR node transfers said Handover message to said target eNodeB through a MME (Mobility Management Entity) node or through an IWF node (Interworking Function) depending on the selected CS handover technology.06-28-2012
20120165017METHOD OF OPERATING CLOSED-MODE BASE STATION AND NON-SUBSCRIBER TERMINAL - A method of operating a closed-mode base station, includes broadcasting an interference preamble for providing a notification of an interference situation via a broadcast of system information; checking current service status of the closed-mode base station when the interference situation is reported from a non-subscriber terminal entered a service area of the closed-mode base station; and avoiding the interference situation based on the checked current service status.06-28-2012
20120165015METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE MEDIA OPTIMIZATION - A method and apparatus for optimizing the mobile media received by a mobile device is disclosed. The apparatus operates with a radio access network, a mobile device operating in the radio access network, and a media server providing mobile media data to the mobile device wherein the mobile device connects to the media server using the radio access network. The apparatus includes a optimization application server coupled to the radio access network. The optimization application server includes positioning indexed performance information based on the positioning information and performance of a plurality of mobile devices operating in the radio access network. The optimization application server triggers adjustments to a parameter at least one of the radio access network, the mobile device and the media server by comparing the location of the mobile device in the radio access network to the optimization application server and sending a message to the radio access network to adjust the parameter.06-28-2012
20120129525Enterprise Controller Handover Management of Wireless User Devices Between Radio Access Point Devices - Techniques are provided for transmitting and receiving communications on behalf of wireless user equipment devices between a plurality of radio access point (RAP) devices and a gateway apparatus through a controller apparatus. A controller apparatus generates a plurality of first identifiers used for communications on behalf of corresponding wireless user devices between the controller apparatus and respective RAPs. Each first identifier identifies a wireless user device and a RAP to which the wireless user device is associated. The controller apparatus maps each first identifier to a corresponding one of a plurality of second identifiers for communications exchanged on behalf of the wireless user devices between the controller apparatus and a gateway apparatus in the wireless cellular communication network. The controller apparatus remaps a new first identifier to an existing second identifier when a particular wireless user device has handed over from a first RAP to a second RAP.05-24-2012
20120129526SESSION SUSPEND AND RESUME USING A TRANSIENT BINDING OPTION MESSAGING - The present invention uses a message with a suspend/resume flag setting sent to the local mobility anchor from the foreign agent that was supporting downlink transmissions to the mobile node. Namely, a transient binding option is proposed for creating a transient BCE state at the home agent/local mobility anchor during an inter-MAG handover, which will suspend down-link traffic from the home agent/local mobility anchor until the transient BCE (suspend) state is cleared by the foreign agent previ-ously supporting downlink transmissions. After the transient BCE (suspend) state is cleared, the downlink traffic from the home agent/local mobility anchor can resume with forwarding of downlink traffic to the mobile node through the foreign agent. The present invention can be implemented using a new protocol application or modified messages from prior registration applications.05-24-2012
20120214491BANDWIDTH CONTROL SYSTEM - A bandwidth control system is provided, enabling the prevention of a resource shortage in the base station, caused by preliminary authentication which reserves resources in advance. The bandwidth control system limits a bandwidth of a communication path used for the preliminary authentication, in the case where a count of successful authentication of the wireless terminal belonging to the first wireless system and a count of successful preliminary authentication transmitted from the wireless terminal belonging to the second wireless system establish a predetermined relationship.08-23-2012
20120315909MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK APPARATUS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network apparatus 12-13-2012
20120315906NETWORK ELEMENTS PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS WITH POOLED SWITCHING CENTERS AND RELATED METHODS - A network element may provide communications with a wireless communications network including a plurality of pooled mobile switching centers coupled to a base station controller so that each of the plurality of pooled mobile switching centers is configured to control communications with respective wireless terminals communicating through the base station controller. Operations of the network element may include transmitting a ping message from the network element to a primary pooled mobile switching center of the plurality of pooled mobile switching centers. Responsive to receipt of a ping response message at the network element from the primary pooled mobile switching center, a communication may be transmitted from the network element to the primary pooled mobile switching center. Responsive to non-receipt of a ping response message at the network element from the primary pooled mobile switching center, the communication may be transmitted from the network element to a secondary pooled mobile switching center of the plurality of pooled mobile switching centers.12-13-2012
20120214490APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A base transceiver station receives first and second reception power values from a plurality of user equipments. The first reception power value is a reception power value at which a user equipment receives a radio signal from another base transceiver station without using a reception beam formation function that allows a radio signal transmitted from a predetermined direction to be selectively received with increased reception sensitivity. The second reception power value is a reception power value at which a user equipment receives a radio signal from another base transceiver station using the reception beam formation function. The base transceiver station selects, from among the plurality of user equipments, a user equipment to be handed over based on the first and second reception power values, and performs handover processing on the selected user equipment.08-23-2012
20120214489Method and Apparatus for Avoiding In-Device Coexistence Interference with Keeping Time Update for Handover - A method, system and device are provided for avoiding in-device coexistence interference between different radio technologies deployed in adjacent bands on the same device by providing coexistence mode handover procedures which establish an updateable “keeping time” parameter to prevent premature switch back or handover to an interfering network node after handoff.08-23-2012
20110177818System and Method for Transferring an Ongoing Communication from A Wireless Handheld Telephony Device - Devices, methods, and programmed instructions useful for transferring an end of an existing call session from a wireless handheld telephony device to a second device, such as a desk phone. The second device provides information useful for transferring the call directly to the handheld device on which the call session is established.07-21-2011
20120135738COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, CONNECTION DESTINATION EVALUATING METHOD, CONNECTION DESTINATION EVALUATING PROGRAM, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - A priority storing unit (b05-31-2012
20120135736Connection Re-Establishment in a Communication System - A method is disclosed where information is sent to at least one mobile device in a connected mode first system. The information is indicative that a deliberate connection re-establishment is to be used to access at least one second system at least in certain situations when the at least one mobile device is in connected mode. The mobile device in the first system can process the information, and based on the processing, initiate a deliberate connection re-establishment procedure to access a second system.05-31-2012
20120135737CELL RESELECTING METHOD AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - The mobile station device has: a first step of selecting a plurality of base station devices meeting a predetermined handover condition, based on reception levels of a plurality of signals transmitted from the plurality of base station devices; and a second step of reselecting, if the plurality of base station devices selected in the first step include a plurality of base station devices for specific subscribers, a base station device to be accessed from among the plurality of base station devices for specific subscribers, by using a predetermined correlation between frequencies and priorities. Accordingly, the number of frequencies can be reduced, and the ping-pong phenomenon can be suppressed.05-31-2012
20120135735Method of a Serving Base Station for Facilitating a Mobile Station to Perform a Fast Handoff - A method for facilitating a mobile station to perform a fast handoff in a wireless communication system allows a handoff procedure to be anticipated (by the mobile station, its serving base station, or both) based on historical information regarding prior successful handoff procedures. In operation, the serving base station monitors (05-31-2012
20120135734METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DATA TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A method for providing data to a mobile device, includes predicting a list of cells to which a mobile device is to be handed over during a predetermined time period; determining bandwidth that is available to the mobile device from at least one cell in the list; calculating traffic that is available to the mobile device from the at least one cell in the list based on the bandwidth; and providing data to the mobile device based on a coding scheme that matches the traffic. There is also provided an apparatus for providing data to a mobile device.05-31-2012
20120135739COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A mobile communications system is described in which an E-UTRAN base station dynamically changes its handover and/or its cell reselection parameters to control the load on the base station and which transmits a message to a non E-UTRAN neighbouring cell, so that it can adapt its handover and/or its cell reselection parameters to avoid repeated handover and/or cell reselection of a mobile communications device between the non E-UTRAN cell and the E-UTRAN cell.05-31-2012
20100173633HANDOVER FAILURE MESSAGING SCHEMES - Handover parameter settings are automatically adapted in access points in a system to improve handover performance. Reactive detection techniques are employed for identifying different types of handover-related failures and adapting handover parameters based on this detection. Messaging schemes are also employed for providing handover-related information to access points. Proactive detection techniques also may be used for identifying conditions that may lead to handover-related failures and then adapting handover parameters in an attempt to prevent such handover-related failures. Ping-ponging may be mitigated by adapting handover parameters based on analysis of access terminal visited cell history acquired by access points in the system. In addition, configurable parameters (e.g., timer values) may be used to detect handover-related failures.07-08-2010
20100173631Method of managing network traffic within a wireless network - A method of managing network traffic within a wireless network (07-08-2010
20120172042REDUCTION OF FLOW BREAK IN SR-VCC MOBILITY - In an embodiment, there is provided a method for the reduction of flow break in Single Radio Voice Call Continuity SRVCC mobility for a User Equipment UE, SRVCC mobility including Hand-Over HO execution procedure and Voice Call Continuity VCC procedure, said method comprising a step of: 07-05-2012
20120252453POWER CONTROL FOR A NETWORK OF ACCESS POINTS - A power calibration scheme adjusts power levels of network of femtocells based on macro signals seen at different points in and around a coverage area and based on the mutual positions of the femtocells (e.g., based on femtocell signals seen at these points). The power calibration scheme thus facilitates a good balance between providing a desired level of coverage and mitigation of interference to nearby macrocells and femtocells.10-04-2012
20120252458MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONSTITUENT APPARATUSES THEREOF, TRAFFIC LEVELING METHOD AND PROGRAM - A mobile communication system includes a traffic monitoring apparatus arranged between predetermined nodes in a mobile network for monitoring a traffic amount between the nodes; and a traffic control apparatus that outputs control information to the predetermined nodes based on a report from the traffic monitoring apparatus wherein the control information instructs the predetermined nodes to level the traffic amount.10-04-2012
20120252456MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication terminal 10-04-2012
20120172043Method and Apparatus for Returning During a Baton Handover - An apparatus and method enable mobile user equipment to return to a first cell after attempting a baton handover to a second cell. In one aspect of the disclosure, a method of wireless communication in a cellular network including a source cell and a target cell is disclosed. Here, the method includes switching transmission of an uplink from the source cell to the target cell while maintaining a downlink with the source cell, determining to return the transmission of the uplink to the source cell, and returning the transmission of the uplink from the target cell to the source cell. In some aspects, the method may further include switching reception of a downlink from the source cell to the target cell, determining to return the reception of the downlink to the source cell, and returning the reception of the downlink from the target cell to the source cell.07-05-2012
20120172041METHODS FOR CELL SEARCH IN SYNCHRONOUS INTERFERENCE LIMITED CHANNELS - The cell searcher module (CSM) of a wireless communication device detects that the device is in coverage region of an eNB by processing received signal associated with the primary synchronization (PSCH) and secondary synchronization (SSCH) sequences transmitted by the eNB. The wireless device determines whether candidate SCH signals from candidate neighbor cells are synchronous with SCH sequences from the serving cell by implementing one of three methods. In a first method, the CSM generates a joint estimate of the received power of SSCH sequences corresponding to already detected/identified serving cell and a hypothetical neighbor cell. In a second method, the CSM re-constructs SCH sequences corresponding to already detected cells and subtracts the re-constructed SCH sequences from the received signal to obtain a residual signal with reduced serving cell interference. In a third embodiment, the CSM performs a correlation of estimated channel responses to determine whether the neighbor cell is present.07-05-2012
20120172044METHOD OF IMPROVING SEMI-PERSISTENT SCHEDULING RESOURCES RECONFIGURATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of improving semi-persistent scheduling, abbreviated to SPS, resources reconfiguration for a user equipment in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a radio resource control, abbreviated to RRC, connection reconfiguration message corresponding to an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure; and forbidding performing SPS resources reconfiguration when the RRC connection reconfiguration procedure is not a handover procedure.07-05-2012
20120315905MULTI-RADIO HANDOVER MANAGER SYSTEM AND ALGORITHMS FOR HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKING - A multi-radio handover manager and supporting algorithms are disclosed. The multi-radio handover manager (MRHM) minimizes the “on” time of one radio when the other radio is connected to the Internet. The MRHM also prevents unnecessary inter-RAT (radio access technologies) WLAN-to-WWAN handovers in a “multi-AP” WLAN, where intra-RAT WLAN-to-WLAN (layer 2) roaming is possible. The MRHM minimizes the impact of IP address changes due to WWAN-to-WLAN handover on an active TCP/IP session. And, the MRHM optimizes its handover-triggering algorithm based on traffic and environment.12-13-2012
20100048211METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING SPECIFIC ZONE INFORMATION - A method, a device, and a system for acquiring specific zone information are provided. The method includes: commanding a mobile station to send a request, in which the request is adapted to notify a network side to identify whether a current cell of the mobile station belongs to preset specific zone; and receiving a response returned according to the request by the network side, in which the response includes information about whether the current cell of the mobile station belongs to the preset specific zone identified by the network side. The device includes an active command unit and a receiving unit. Thus, a subscriber can know whether the current location belongs to specific zone without any operation, unnecessary system load is reduced, and an end-to-end experience is provided for the subscriber.02-25-2010
20100048213METHOD OF SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN A MULTI-MODE MOBILE STATION - A method of discovering at least one of a homogeneous and a heterogeneous network module to perform handover with in a wireless mobile communication network is disclosed. More specifically, the method includes establishing a network handover module for converging information from at least one network interface module associated with at least one of a homogeneous and a heterogeneous network handover module into a unified presentation and transmitting a broadcast request message from a mobile station (MS) to a source point of attachment (PoA) which transmits the broadcast request message to at least one interface module to identify whether the at least one interface module supports at least one of the homogeneous and the heterogeneous network handover module and a capability of the at least one of the homogeneous and the heterogeneous network handover module. The method further includes initiating a timer for a specified time period when the broadcast request message is transmitted and receiving at least one response message from the at least one interface module via the source PoA prior to expiration of the timer, wherein the response message indicates that the at least one interface module supports at least one of the homogeneous and the heterogeneous network handover module and the capability of the at least one of the homogeneous and the heterogeneous network handover module.02-25-2010
20100048212GENERATING ACCESS POINT BEACONS AT DIFFERENT POWER LEVELS - An access point generates beacons at different power levels at different times to provide an acceptable tradeoff between coverage area associated with the beacons and outage experienced at nearby access terminals. For example, a femto access point may transmit beacons at a relatively low power for a relatively long period of time to reduce interference at nearby access terminals that are being served by a macro access point. The femto access point may then transmit beacons at a relatively high power for a relatively short period of time to enable nearby access terminals to receive the beacons. Also, a given transmit chain may be used to provide frequency hopping of high and low power beacons.02-25-2010
20100048210USER EQUIPMENT AND METHOD USED IN USER EQUIPMENT - Disclosed user equipment performs intermittent reception in a different frequency from a frequency of a serving cell belonging to a current radio access network or in a different radio access network from the current radio access network. The user equipment includes a receiving unit for receiving and demodulating a control signal and a cell search unit for performing a cell search in a specified frequency. When a release signal is received, the user equipment switches to a preliminary intermittent reception mode where the receiving unit intermittently receives the control signal in the serving cell and the cell search unit performs the cell search in the different frequency or the different radio access network between intermittent reception timings. Then, the user equipment switches to a normal intermittent reception mode where the receiving unit intermittently receives the control signal in the different frequency or the different radio access network.02-25-2010
20120258715SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FACILITATING EFFICIENT VERTICAL HANDOFFS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methods are provided for performing efficient vertical handoffs in a wireless user device are provided. The user device can comprise a mobile phone, computer table, handheld computer, or other computer system capable of connecting to more than one mobile wireless network that use different wireless communication protocols. Various efficient scanning methods are disclosed that are efficient in terms of battery usage, thermal performance, processing power, throughput performance, or a combination thereof.10-11-2012
20120258717METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER IN CELLULAR WIRELESS USING ROUTE PROGRAMMING AND TRAINING PROCESSES - A method and system for managing handover where a database that receives location information about a moving object includes information regarding which base station is used in a current radio link connection and which base stations were used from historic radio link connections. Using the base station radio link history of the object and an electronic map, a processor selects which physical path the moving object is using. Upon matching the object's path with a history of path routes on the list, the processor will apply an optimized handoff sequence to the moving object. The optimized route can be derived from an algorithm that processes previous historical data from moving objects traveling on the same route.10-11-2012
20120258716METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING SIGNAL IN MOBILE STATION IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A mobile station provided with multiple antennas in a wireless communication system is disclosed. More specifically, the mobile station displays an overlap zone entry notification message received from a macro base station if the mobile station enters an overlap zone between the macro base station and a femto base station, and an user selects an antenna driving mode of the multiple antennas. And then, the mobile station transmit and receive signals to and from at least one of the macro base station and the femto base station in accordance with the selected antenna driving mode.10-11-2012
20090111470REDUCTION IN HANDOVER INTERRUPTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In a wireless network, a mobile station is in a serving radio link with a serving base station. A handover is desired so that the mobile station can establish a target radio link with a target base station. When the handover process is initiated, the target base station is alerted about the impending handover by the serving base station. The target base station allocates a radio resource set and provides information on the radio resource set piggy backed onto an alert response message to the serving base station. The serving base station relays radio resource set piggybacked onto either a handover request or response message to the mobile station. The mobile station breaks the serving radio link with the serving base station and establishes the target radio link using the radio resource set.04-30-2009
20120178451Method for Automatic Neighbor Cell Relation Reporting in a Mobile Communication System - The invention concerns a method and an apparatus implementing the method. In the method is received a neighbor cell relation list and a request to report new cells not included in the neighbor cell relation list to the mobile node to a mobile node. The mobile node detects at least one new cell not included in the neighbor cell relation list and stores information regarding the at least one new cell not included in the neighbor cell relation list in a memory. The mobile node determines whether a threshold number of new cells not included in the neighbor cell relation list have been stored in the memory of the mobile node. In response to reaching the threshold number, the mobile node preparing for transmitting the information regarding the at least one new cell not included in the neighbor cell relation list to a radio network node.07-12-2012
20120178450AVOIDING PING-PONG HANDOVERS - The present invention provides a method and respective entities for avoiding handovers in a ping-pong manner in a communication network. The method comprises comparing, when a handover of a mobile station to a base station is intended, decision criteria of the intended handover with decision criteria of previous handovers of the mobile station to that base station, and deciding on allowing or preventing the intended handover based on the result of the comparison.07-12-2012
20120178453Local Switching - The invention proposes to introduce a method for a Radio Access Network for providing “Local Switching” between call legs of a call. Within said method the Radio Access Network receives a call identifier for a leg of a call from a Core Network to be handled by the Radio Access Network. The Radio Access Network stores said received call identifier, compares said received call identifier with stored call identifiers for call legs of calls via said Radio Access Network. If said received call identifier matches a stored call identifier the Radio Access Networks establish local switching of call legs identified by the matching call identifier. In an alternative embodiment, the invention proposes to introduce a method for a Core Network for providing local switching for call legs of a call. Within said method the Core Network receives or generates a call identifier for a leg of a call. The Core Network stores said received call identifier and identifies a respective Radio Access Network for said leg of said call. Thereafter, the Core Network compares said call received identifier with stored call identifiers for call legs of calls via said identified Radio Access Network. If said received call identifier matches a stored call identifier enforce local switching of call legs identified by the matching call identifier. The invention furthermore provides for respective Nodes of the respective Networks employing the invention.07-12-2012
20120178452SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REAL TIME ALLOCATION OF BANDWIDTH AT A FEMTOCELL - Systems and methods for real time allocation of radio devices in a femtocell that includes a plurality of software-defined radios (SDRs) are provided. The SDRs can be reconfigured in real time based on the changing network conditions and/or changes to contractual obligations of the femtocell provider. The femtocell can be reconfigured in real time either remotely from a network operations center (NOC) or the femtocell can be configured to automatically detect changing usage patterns and to automatically reconfigure the SDRs. The femtocell can also be configured to receive emergency override signals from the NOC to cause the femtocell to reconfigure one or more of the SDRs for use by emergency responders.07-12-2012
20100273489Method for Reselections in the Presence of Femto Cells - A method for performing cell reselection in a cellular communication network including determining a first receive power and a first pathloss of a signal from a first cell, determining a second receive power and an upper bound on a second pathloss of a signal from a second cell, and selecting the second cell when the difference between the first path loss and the upper bound on the second path loss is greater than a first threshold and the difference between the first receive power and the second receive power is smaller than a second threshold.10-28-2010
20100273487AUTOMATIC HANDOVER OSCILLATION CONTROL - A method and apparatus are provided for use in a cellular radio communication system for adjusting a handover parameter. Information is collected regarding actual handovers that have occurred between one or more pairs of cells as well as handover failures. The collected handover information is processed to determine a handover oscillation rate or a handover cost associated with the cell pair. If the handover performance is determined to be acceptable, the determined handover oscillation rate or the determined handover cost is compared with a predetermined target handover oscillation rate or a predetermined target handover cost, respectively. One or more handover parameters associated with at least one of the cells in the cell pair is adjusted based on the comparison.10-28-2010
20100003984METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING DUAL TRANSFER MODE FOR HANDOVER IN GSM SYSTEM - A method for operating a Mobile Station (MS) for maintaining a Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) and apparatus for supporting the DTM for a handover process in a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) system are provided. The method includes receiving a broadcast control message from at least one neighbor cell, determining whether the at least one neighbor cell supports the DTM by using the broadcast control message, and reporting the determination result on whether the DTM is supported and a received signal measurement result. Accordingly, a DTM service can be seamlessly maintained.01-07-2010
20100015983METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING AND/OR COMMUNICATING PARAMETER SWITCHING POINT INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS INCLUDING WIRELESS TERMINALS SUPPORTING MULTIPLE WIRELESS CONNECTIONS - Methods and apparatus for indicating parameter change points with respect to multiple connections (wireless links) by transmitting a single message, e.g., over one of the connections, is described. A base station corresponding to at least one connection, considers the approximate timing relationship between the connections, selects one of the connections, selects an intended parameter switching point for that connection, determines a symbol time offset from the selected switching point such that the other intended switching points of other wireless links can be unambiguously interpreted by the wireless terminal from information indicating the offset with respect to the selected link, and communicates information indicating the offset and the wireless link to which said offset applies. A wireless terminal receives the information, identifies a time referenced with respect the timing structure of the identified wireless link and then determines individual parameter switching points for the other wireless links.01-21-2010
20100291933SYSTEM AND METHOD OF HANDOVER DECISION FOR INTER RAT HANDOVER - The invention relates to the field of mobile communication systems. In particular, the invention discloses a method for handover decision making during an inter-radio access technology (RAT) handover. According to the method, the decision for inter-RAT handover may be taken by the serving network entity in a hierarchical manner beginning with a radio access network (RAN) entity and proceeding towards a core network (CN) entity. Further, the serving network entity may take the decision for the inter-RAT handover based on the information and knowledge of the target access system handover criteria and the ranking available in the network entity.11-18-2010
20100291932NETWORK CONTROL DEVICE AND NETWORK CONTROL METHOD - As a network control device which controls a call connection between a calling party terminal and a called party terminal, a network control device determines whether the own network control device is in a congestion state when a handover request is acquired from another network control device which is in the congestion state, and stops transmitting a busy tone to a mobile terminal which is the calling party terminal and transmits a ring back tone to the mobile terminal when it is determined that the own network control device is not in the congestion state.11-18-2010
20100291931MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND BASE STATION INSTALLATION METHOD - In a mobile communication system, a mobile station is configured to obtain data quality information, and provides the obtained data quality information to a base station A when it is quality information about data from the base station A, and provides the data quality information to a base station B when it is quality information about data from the base station B. The base stations A and B are configured to provide a base station host apparatus with the quality information from the mobile station as historical information about the mobile station, and the base station host apparatus is configured to compare the pieces of quality information sent from the two base stations, select one base station with better quality, instructs it to communicate with the mobile station, and instructs the other not to communicate with the mobile station.11-18-2010
20100291929PHYSICAL-LAYER CELL IDENTIFICATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for physical cell identification in a wireless communication system includes a first step 11-18-2010
20100291928WIRELESS CALL HANDOFF - A device is configured to detect a wireless device and determine if the wireless device is participating in a telephone call with a remote party. The device is further configured to establish a first voice communication link with the remote party, and establish a second voice communication link with the wireless device. In addition, the device is configured to bridge the first and second voice communication links together, thereby establishing voice communications between the wireless device and the remote party.11-18-2010
20090325578SUPPORT FOR MULTI-GROUP FREQUENCY DIVISION DUPLEX WIRELESS NETWORK - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, a method may include receiving, at a serving base station (BS) in a wireless network from a mobile station (MS), group preference information for the MS for each of one or more candidate BSs; obtaining, by the serving BS based on the group preference information, a group assignment for the MS from each of the one or more candidate BSs; and sending by the serving BS to the MS the group assignment from each of the candidate BSs.12-31-2009
20120220300METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REALIZING SESSION HANDOVER - A method is provided for realizing session transfer, comprising: a service continuity application server (SCC AS), after receiving a session transfer request, when judging that a state of a session needed to be transferred is in a held state, updating a remote leg by using a held state session state information, and notifying an enhanced mobile switching center (eMSC) that the state of the session needed to be transferred is the held state; and the eMSC completing a call setup of a target access network according to the held state. A system is also provided for realizing session transfer. The method and system can realize correct transfer of a held state voice session, realize correct service logic and improve user experience.08-30-2012
20120220299METHOD AND SYSTEM TO HANDLE A SIGNALING CONNECTION RELEASE PROCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for handling a signaling connection release process in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a reconfiguration message by a mobile device. The method also includes triggering a serving radio network subsystem (SRNS) relocation process for the mobile device based on the receiving. Further, the method further includes causing a timer to cease miming and resetting the timer to a predefined value. Moreover, the method includes clearing a variable associated with the timer from the mobile device. The system includes a mobile device, a radio network controller, and a communication interface.08-30-2012
20120315908METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN AN OVERLAPPING NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - The present invention relates to a method, apparatus and system for performing a handover in an overlapping network environment. Particularly, the present invention provides a method for performing a handover when a user terminal enters a femtocell from a macrocell. According to a preferred embodiment, a femtocell in which there is confusion caused by an allocation of a duplicate PCID is discriminated to perform a handover in an efficient manner when the user terminal moves from the macrocell to the femtocell.12-13-2012
20120083274RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system includes a relay station, a first radio base station, second radio base stations, and a mobile station. The relay station is connected by radio to the first radio base station and communicates with the second radio base stations via the first radio base station. When the relay station communicates with the second radio base stations, the relay station requests the first radio base station to communicate with the second radio base stations for the relay station. The requested first radio base station communicates with the second radio base stations for the relay station and transmits a communication result to the relay station.04-05-2012
20120083273WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HOME NODE-B IDENTIFICATION AND ACCESS RESTRICTION - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), including a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), for identifying a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell are disclosed. The WTRU receives a broadcast from a cell including a cell identifier (ID). If the cell ID is associated with a CSG cell, the WTRU determines whether the CSG ID is programmed in the USIM. The cell broadcast may include a single bit information element (IE) indicating that the cell is a CSG cell. If the cell ID is a CSG ID, the cell ID may further include a plurality of fields which indicate at least one of a country, a region, an operator, and a home evolved Node-B (HeNB) number. The cell broadcast may further include a bit indicating whether the CSG cell is public or private. The cell broadcast may further include a bit indicating that emergency calls are allowed from all users.04-05-2012
20120083272APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION POWER LEVEL OF A FEMTOCELL - An apparatus and method for setting a transmission power of a femtocell are provided. A range of a transmission power may be computed, and a minimum amount of power to be used by at least one communication terminal located within a cell coverage may be computed. Additionally, a suitable transmission power for communication may be determined using the computed range of the transmission power and the computed minimum amount of power.04-05-2012
20090047960Closed subscriber group cell handover - A radio terminal connection may be handed over from a serving base station associated with a serving cell to a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell served by a CSG base station in which only radio terminals belonging to the CSG are permitted to access and receive service from the CSG cell. Radio terminals in the serving cell are generally informed not to report to the serving base station signal quality measurements of signals transmitted by CSG base stations. But if a radio terminal in the serving cell is authorized to access and receive service from the CSG cell, then that radio terminal is instructed to report to the serving base station signal quality measurements of signals transmitted by the CSG base station. Based on that report, the connection may be handed over to the CSG base station. A central node provides a CSG authorization list identifying CSG authorized radio terminals to the serving base station when a listed CSG cell is a neighboring cell which the radio terminal is authorized to access.02-19-2009
20120190368MESSAGE HANDLING METHOD AND DEVICE - In the field of communications technologies, a message handling method and a message handling device are provided. The method includes: a notification indicating whether an X2 interface to a neighbor node is available is received; using an S1 interface to send information when the X2 interface is unavailable; and/or receiving a notification indicating whether an S1 interface to a neighbor node is available, and using an X2 interface to send information when the S1 interface is unavailable. The technical solutions can ensure normal communication, and reduce possibility of communication failure.07-26-2012
20090017822METHOD OF RELEASING LINK CONNECTION AFTER HANDOVER IN MULTI-MODE MOBILE TERMINAL AND TERMINAL THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method of releasing a network connection with a link of a medium access control layer previously accessed before performing a handover to a heterogeneous network in a mobile terminal configured with a multi-mode (e.g., interface between IEEE802.16 and IEEE802.il, interface between IEEE802.16 and 3GPP/3GPP2 or interface between IEEE802.il and 3gPP/3GPP2). In a multi-mode mobile terminal, the present invention includes the steps of creating a connection with a new link, generating a trigger event indicating a connection creation with the new link, and generating a trigger event instructing a connection release from an old link.01-15-2009
20120231792Method for Handing Over a User Equipment Connected to a Base Station from the Base Station to a femto Access Point - A method is described for handing over a user equipment connected to a base station from the base station to a femto access point. The method includes initializing a handover from the base station to the femto access point, sending parameters indicating the femto access point from the user equipment to the base station, wherein the parameters include a physical ID parameter and a further parameter based on time measurements, identifying the femto access point by comparing the parameters sent from the user equipment to the base station with a list stored in the base station, wherein the list includes a physical ID parameter, a further parameter based on time measurements and a global ID for a plurality of femto access points, and handing over the user equipment to the identified femto access point. Also described is a base station, a user equipment and a system.09-13-2012
20080311913METHOD FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN A SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE SUPPORTING MOBILITY BETWEEN DIFFERENT ACCESS SYSTEMS - One object of the present invention is a method for Mobility Management MM in a system architecture supporting mobility between different access systems having separate Core Network CN-level MM entities while using common MM Area, said method comprising a step of: 12-18-2008
20100330992Device, Method, and Apparatus for Offline Discontinuous Reception (DRX) Processing With Online Triggers in Cellular Systems - An apparatus and method for processing signals are disclosed. The apparatus may include a transceiver configured to receive a first paging signal during a first cycle, a memory, and a processor configured to store the received first paging signal in the memory, to switch the transceiver to an off state after the first paging signal is stored in the memory, to process the stored first paging signal while the transceiver is in the off state, and to determine whether to enter an online mode based on the processing.12-30-2010
20080299976Network controller messaging for channel activation in an unlicensed wireless communication system - An unlicensed wireless service is adapted to generate the interface protocols of a licensed wireless service to provide transparent transition of communication sessions between a licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. In one embodiment, a mobile station includes level 1, level 2, and level 3 protocols for licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. An indoor base station and indoor network controller provide protocol conversion for the unlicensed wireless service into a standard base station controller interface of the licensed wireless service.12-04-2008
20080299977Network controller messaging for release in an Unlicensed Wireless Communication System - An unlicensed wireless service is adapted to generate the interface protocols of a licensed wireless service to provide transparent transition of communication sessions between a licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. In one embodiment, a mobile station includes level 1, level 2, and level 3 protocols for licensed wireless service and an unlicensed wireless service. An indoor base station and indoor network controller provide protocol conversion for the unlicensed wireless service into a standard base station controller12-04-2008
20080299974HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-MODE MOBILE STATION - The present invention relates to efficient handover processing for a multi-mode mobile station supporting a licensed wireless system and unlicensed wireless system. A handover processing method using unlicensed mobile access (UMA) includes: checking, upon recognition of necessity of handover, neighbor cell information from a licensed wireless system; determining possibility of handover on the basis of the neighbor cell information; preventing, if handover is not possible, a handover-related operation, and maintaining an existing connection to the licensed wireless system; and performing, if handover is possible, handover to an associated unlicensed wireless system.12-04-2008
20080299972METHOD FOR SYNCHRONISING A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CORRESPONDING BASE STATION AND TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a method for synchronising a radio communication system comprising at least two base stations and a terminal adapted to perform a handover between said at least two base stations, the at least two base stations needing to be synchronised to the same time reference.12-04-2008
20080299973METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING A CONTROLLED HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Various embodiments are described to reduce latency delays and/or adverse impacts to real-time applications when a remote unit (12-04-2008
20110003595INTERWORKING AND HANDOVER BETWEEN WIMAX NETWORKS AND OTHER NETWORKS - Techniques to manage handovers between WiMAX and other networks are described.01-06-2011
20110003593Apparatus and Method for a Centrally Managed Handoff Between Two Technologies - An apparatus and method for a centrally managed handoff comprising originating a service using a first technology and connecting the service using the first technology; activating a second technology that is different from the first technology; receiving a first request for the handoff from the first technology to the second technology; sending a second request for the handoff from the first technology to the second technology, wherein the second request relates to the first request; receiving an acknowledgement that the second technology is available; implementing the handoff from the first technology to the second technology; and determining that the handoff is successfully implemented before terminating the first technology.01-06-2011
20120264431FEMTOCELL ACCESS CONTROL - The disclosure is related to handover for user equipment between femtocell base stations having different closed subscriber group (CSG) identifiers. A method may be provided for allowing handover of user equipment between base stations belonging to different organizations. The method may include collecting, by a first base station, information corresponding to identifiers of neighbor base stations, selecting handover-allowable base stations from the neighbor base stations having an organization identifier different from that of the first base station, and enabling handover for the user equipment from the first base station to a second base station based on the selected handover-allowable base stations for a handover request of the user equipment from the first base station to the second base station.10-18-2012
20120264432GSM Rescue Handover Utilizing Adaptive Multirate Half-Rate - Call handover in a cellular telecommunication system is improved by adjusting a rate-based parameter, such as that controlled by an adaptive multi-rate (AMR) codec in a time-division multiple access (TDMA) network, to increase call handling capacity when handover is indicated but the candidate handover cell does not have sufficient capacity to handle another call.10-18-2012
20120264430METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION OF BASE STATION, RELAY STATION AND TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a communication method of a base station, which includes the base station including an indication of whether the base station is a terminal acting as a base station or a base station acting as a relay station in an SCD message or DCD message, and transmitting the SCD message or the DCD message to a terminal.10-18-2012
20120264429COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - It is provided a communication apparatus connected to first and second wireless networks which performs handover between the first and second wireless networks, including first and second wireless functional units which obtain connection states and wireless quality of the wireless networks. A transmitter and a receiver of the first wireless functional unit are activated, a transmitter of the second wireless functional unit is deactivated, a receiver of the second wireless functional unit is activated and the wireless quality of the first wireless network and the second wireless network are obtained when a connection between the first wireless functional unit and the first wireless network is in a connected state. The transmitter and the receiver of the first wireless functional unit are deactivated, the transmitter and the receiver of the second wireless functional unit are activated and the data suppression process is canceled after the completion of the handover.10-18-2012
20110034171COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SINGLE-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION AND COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A communication system and method for single-point transmission and reception and coordinated multi-point transmission and reception are provided. The system and method include determining information associated with a channel status of a target terminal. The system and method also include selecting, with respect to the target terminal, one of single-point transmission and reception and coordinated multi-point transmission and reception based on the information associated with the channel status of the target terminal.02-10-2011
20110045832METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING USER SERVICE CONTINUITY - A method, a system and a device for maintaining user service continuity are provided in an embodiment of the present invention. The method includes prohibiting a UE from accessing a forbidden network before handover is complete when the UE needs to perform network handover if the UE adopts a SIM access technology, thus avoiding service interruption of a SIM user due to access to an incorrect network. A system and a device for maintaining user service continuity are provided in an embodiment of the present invention.02-24-2011
20110045831User Grouping Method For Inter-cell Interference Coordination in Mobile Telecommunication - A user grouping method for inter-cell interference coordination technology in mobile telecommunication systems using the handover information and measured data that were defined in existing mobile telecommunication systems to group cell users into cell center users and cell edge users. This method includes: (1) user equipment measuring the average signal strength of the serving cell and neighboring cells; (2) user equipment determining if it should reply with the average signal strength information it measures and if it should initiate the inter-cell interference coordination measuring and response system; (3) serving cell then groups the user equipment as cell center user or cell edge user according to the average signal strength information reported by the user equipment; (4) serving cell allocates a frequency subchannel from cell center subband or cell edge subband according to the grouping result.02-24-2011
20120322448RFSP Selective Camping - A user equipment (UE) is provided that includes one or more processors configured to perform one of an attach procedure, Routing Area Update (RAU), or Tracking Area Update (TAU), and then cause the UE to provide an indication to a network, wherein the indication indicates whether the UE has determined a voice solution in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN).12-20-2012
20120270551Resource Allocation Method and Apparatus for Multi-ModeTerminal - In a resource allocation method for a multi-mode terminal, a control network element of a first network technology type obtains information about a radio resource of a second network technology type. The radio resource of the second network technology type is used by the multi-mode terminal and the information about the radio resource of the second network technology type indicates a carrier frequency. The control network element of the first network technology type determines that a carrier frequency allocated to the multi-mode terminal serves as a radio resource of the first network technology type according to the carrier frequency indicated by the information of the radio resource of the second network technology type and according to a maximum spectral width between a service of the first network technology type and a service of the second network technology type.10-25-2012
20120270550Method and System for Managing Neighboring Cell Information - The present disclosure discloses a method and a system for managing neighboring cell information. The method includes: a radio network controller sends a notification message to user equipment (UE), wherein the notification message includes an indication which notifies the UE to measure inter-frequency cells which are not in an inter-frequency neighboring cell list or inter-system cells which are not in an inter-system neighboring cell list; after receiving the notification message, the UE measures the inter-frequency cells, which are not in the inter-frequency neighboring cell list, indicated in the notification message, or measures the inter-system cells, which are not in the inter-system neighboring cell list, indicated in the notification message, and reports the measurement result. In the present disclosure, the UE reports a measurement result to the network side after measuring the cells which are not in the neighboring cell list, to improve the capability of the network side to obtain neighboring cell information. Based on the measurement result reported by the UE, the network side decides inter-frequency handover or inter-system handover, so that the UE performs handover in time and the call drop is prevented effectually.10-25-2012
20110230191Methods and Systems for Causing a Mobile Station to Originate a Subsequent Call Via a Coverage Area Other than that Used for a First Call - Methods and systems are provided causing a mobile station to, after experiencing a dropped call, originate a subsequent call via a coverage area different than that used for the first call. In an embodiment, a mobile station detects that, when it was engaged in the first call at a first location via a first wireless coverage area, the mobile station experienced the first call being dropped. When the mobile station subsequently attempts to originate a second call, the mobile station determines that its current location is within a threshold distance of the first location, and responsively attempts to originate the second call via a second wireless coverage area different from the first.09-22-2011
20090029704METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING LOCATION OF INFORMATION SERVER AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING HANDOVER INFORMATION USING LOCATION OF INFORMATION SERVER - A method and apparatus for discovering a location of an information server using a router advertisement (RA) message that is utilized to automatically set an address in an IPv6 environment and receiving information necessary for determining mobility by using the location of the information server.01-29-2009
20120322449WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL, CONNECTION-TARGET SWITCH DETERMINING METHOD, AND CONNECTION-TARGET CHANGE DETERMINING METHOD - A wireless communication network system includes: a mobile terminal that transmits a switching request for requesting to switch a connection target from a currently connected first wireless communication apparatus to a second wireless communication apparatus mounted on a mobile body; and a wireless communication apparatus that determines permission or prohibition that the mobile terminal switches the connection target from its own apparatus to the second wireless communication apparatus, based on permission/prohibition setting of the connection target switching from the first wireless communication apparatus to the second wireless communication apparatus in accordance with a type of the first wireless communication apparatus.12-20-2012
20120322451APPARATUS, METHOD, AND TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM THEREOF FOR CALLBACK HANDOVER PROCEDURE IN A FEMTO-NETWORK - An apparatus, a signaling method, and a tangible machine-readable medium thereof for callback handover procedure in a femto-network are provided, wherein the femto-network comprising a plurality of femto base stations. The apparatus comprises a storage module, a receiving module, a transmission module, and a determination module. The storage module is configured to store and restore information of the femto BS, the information indicating a relation between the apparatus and the related stations. The receiving module is configured to receive the inbound handover signals and outbound handover signals. The transmission module is configured to transmit the inbound handover signals and outbound handover signals. The determination module is configured to determine whether generating inbound handover signals or outbound handover signals.12-20-2012
20120322447METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-RAT CELL RESELECTION - Certain aspects of the disclosure relate generally to search of radio access technologies (RAT). For example, certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for facilitating higher priority radio access technology (RAT) search and cell reselection in areas having a plurality of overlapping RATs, such as GSM and LTE. According to certain aspects, a user equipment (UE) may generate a local set of cell reselection parameters based on one or more default cell reselection parameters and/or stored system information received during previous connects with found cells. According to certain aspects, the UE may perform cell reselection based on the local set of cell reselection parameters.12-20-2012
20120322450Communicatively Coupling WLAN and Femtocell Networks Utilizing a Femtocell-to-WLAN Network Bridge and Controller - Aspects of a method and system for communicatively coupling WLAN and femtocell networks utilizing a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller are provided. In this regard, data communicated via one or more femtocells and one or more WLAN access points may be managed via a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller communicatively coupled between a femtocell controller and an access point controller. The femtocell controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more femtocells, and the access point controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more WLAN access points. The FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller, the femtocell controller, and the access point controller may intemperate to manage data communicated between a first end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the femtocells and a second end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the access points.12-20-2012
20120322446METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SEARCH - Certain aspects of the disclosure relate generally to search of radio access technologies (RAT). For example, certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for performing higher priority radio access technology (RAT) searches in areas having a plurality of overlapping RATs, such as Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) and Long Term Evolution (LTE). According to certain aspects, a user equipment (UE) may be configured to periodically search for higher priority RATs in neighboring cells. According to certain aspects, upon finding a higher priority RAT cell, the UE may be further configured to evaluate, or “pre-evaluate”, criteria for cell reselection from found cell to the currently camped cell, while still camped on the current cell. The UE may be configured to decide whether or not to switch to the found cell based on the evaluation.12-20-2012
20120322445METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING CONSUMPTION OF TRANSMISSION POWER IN BASE STATION BY ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION INTERVAL OF CONTROL SIGNAL - A method for reducing the consumption of the transmission power in the base station by adjusting the transmission interval between the control signals comprises the steps of: changing the interval between the control signals transmitted from the base station from a first interval to a second interval and transmitting the control signal; receiving a first message including transmission interval adjustment request information of the control signal; and changing the interval between the control signals to the first interval and transmitting the control signal.12-20-2012
20120094672CELL EDGE COVERAGE HOLE DETECTION IN CELLEULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A cell edge coverage hole detection method based on collecting (S04-19-2012
20110237257CELLULAR NETWORK ENERGY SAVING - Various arrangements for managing wireless network communication are described. Two cells using different radio access technologies (RATs), such as a 3G cell and a 4G cell, may provide overlapping coverage. A first cell using a first RAT, under certain circumstances, may be permitted to enter a powered down state such that less power is consumed. User equipment may communicate with the cell using the second RAT as the preferred network and only communicate with the cell using the first RAT when a service available through the first RAT but not the second RAT has been requested. Upon a request from the second cell, the first cell may enter a powered up state.09-29-2011
20110237256METHOD FOR SUPPORTING QUALITY OF SERVICE MECHANISMS DURING A HANDOVER PROCESS OR IN PREPARATION OF A HANDOVER PROCESS - A method for supporting quality of service (QoS) mechanisms during a handover process or in preparation of a handover process, wherein a user equipment (UE) attaches to an access network (AN) via points of attachment (PoA), wherein the handover process supports changing connection of the UE from one of the points of attachment—current PoA—to another one of the points of attachment—target PoA—while maintaining all ongoing connections of the UE, wherein signalling messages are exchanged between the current PoA and a second PoA during or in preparation of the handover process, the second PoA including the target PoA or a candidate for the target PoA, and wherein the AN supports inner QoS mechanisms on a communication path within the AN, the communication path being used for communication between one of the PoA and a core network (CN) or between one of the PoA and a network entity within the AN, is characterized in that a triggering message is sent to the second PoA by the current PoA, the triggering message being received by an UE proxy located on the second PoA, wherein the UE proxy, in reaction to the triggering message, controls the inner QoS mechanisms to ensure QoS on the communication path.09-29-2011
20110237255RELAY STATION AND BASE STATION - An object is to suppress interference with communication between a relay station and a radio communication terminal, by performing handover of a radio communication terminal causing the interference thereby performing proper communication connection.09-29-2011
20100203891METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING A HAND-IN OF USER EQUIPMENT TO FEMTO CELLS - Aspects are disclosed for facilitating a hand-in to a femto cell. An identifier is assigned to a femto cell in which the identifier is based on a scrambling parameter and a timing parameter. A relationship between the identifier and the femto cell is then communicated. In another embodiment, a user equipment report is received, which includes attributes related to a signal broadcast by a femto cell. An identifier associated with the femto cell is ascertained from an attribute included in the report. The femto cell is then identified based on the identifier. In a further embodiment, a timing parameter is received, and a scrambling parameter is set. A signal including the scrambling parameter is then broadcast according to an offset related to the timing parameter. In yet another embodiment, a femto cell is detected during an active call. An identifier associated with the femto cell is then ascertained and reported.08-12-2010
20100203890METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING A BEACON-ASSISTED HANDOVER TO A HOME NODE-B FOR USERS ON AN ACTIVE CALL - Methods, apparatuses, and computer program products are disclosed for facilitating a beacon-assisted handover from a macro network to a femto cell during an active call. A femto cell management system assigns a unique identifier to a femto cell, which the femto cell utilizes to broadcast a beacon at a frequency different than the operating frequency of the femto cell. A wireless terminal receives a control message from the macro network directing the wireless terminal to scan particular frequencies. The wireless terminal subsequently provides a report to the macro network identifying attributes ascertained from the scan, which includes attributes associated with the beacon. The macro network then performs a handover from the macro network to the femto cell as a function of the attributes.08-12-2010
20100203889METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING COMPRESSED MODE DURATION - An apparatus and method for optimizing compressed mode duration comprising collecting a first set of receive signal strength indication (RSSI) measurements from at least one 2G cell; determining a best 2G cell from the at least one 2G cell using the first set of RSSI measurements; identifying at least one second best 2G cells with at least one of the first set of RSSI measurements within a range threshold T08-12-2010
20120276902HANDOVER FOR CELLULAR RADIO SYSTEMS - In a cellular wireless system, power thresholds used for determining whether to add or drop servers held in a set of servers, such as an active set, for serving a user equipment (UE) are determined based on the motion of the respective UE. A lower threshold may be used with respect to the adding or dropping of a given server to or from a set of servers for serving a fast moving UE than would be used for the same server with respect to adding or dropping to or from a set of servers for serving a slow moving UE, while maintaining a given quality of service. As a result, the average number of servers held in sets is reduced in a typical network that comprises a plurality of UEs moving at different speeds, compared to a situation in which the threshold is set irrespective of the motion of a UE.11-01-2012
20100234027METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING CALL DROP CAUSED BY RADIO LINK FAILURE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for improving a call drop caused by a Radio Link Failure (RLF) before handover triggering in a mobile communication system are provided. The method of improving the call drop caused by the RLF in the mobile communication system includes detecting an RLF occurring before handover triggering (RLF_before_HO), generating one of an RLF_before_HO-dependent statistics and an RLF_before_HO-dependent log file, transmitting the one of the RLF_before_HO-dependent statistics and the RLF_before_HO-dependent log file to a serving Base Station (BS), and updating a Neighbor Relation Table (NRT) and optimizing a handover parameter using the one of the RLF_before_HO-dependent statistics and the RLF_before_HO-dependent log file.09-16-2010
20100234026RESOURCE SEARCH IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods, apparatus and computer program products are provided to facilitate the acquisition of radio recourses when an initial redirect attempt to acquire the necessary resources fails. The disclosed embodiments enable the determination as to whether or not a desired service is available on a target set of radio resources. Upon the failure to acquire the service, a preferential search of additional radio resources is conducted for acquisition of the service. The disclosed concepts are applicable to a variety of technologies, such as UMTS, GSM, 3GPP WCDMA and LTE, 3GPP2 1xRTT and HRPD, WLAN, WiMAX, DSL and passive optical network (PON). This Abstract is provided for the sole purpose of complying with the Abstract requirement rules that allow a reader to quickly ascertain the disclosed subject matter. Therefore, it is to be understood that it should not be used to interpret or limit the scope or the meaning of the claims.09-16-2010
20100234025System and Method for Initial Gateway Selection - A system and method for selecting a gateway upon mobile station initial network entry is provided. A method for controller operations includes determining that a criterion for gateway selection for a mobile station is met, selecting a gateway based on an allocation vector, and transmitting an allocation request to the selected gateway. The selecting being based on an allocation vector of selection probabilities for a plurality of gateways. The method also includes receiving a response message from the selected gateway, completing an initial network entry procedure if the response message indicates that the selected gateway will support the mobile station, and performing an alternate selection procedure if the response message indicates that the selected gateway will not support the mobile station.09-16-2010
20100234024SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GROUND STATION SELECTION - A communication system comprises a radio to transmit and receive communication signals to and from a selected ground station; and a management unit coupled to the radio and operable to dynamically set a threshold value for selecting another ground station based on a signal strength corresponding to the selected ground station. The management unit is operable to select another ground station when a signal strength corresponding to the other ground station exceeds the signal strength corresponding to the selected ground station by more than the threshold value set by the management unit.09-16-2010
20120276900ENHANCING CELLULAR NETWORKS VIA AN ADJUSTABLE HANDOVER BOUNDARY - A method for handing off handset in a mobile communication network that defines at a base station (11-01-2012
20120276905METHOD FOR MIGRATING USER PLANE FROM IUR-G INTERFACE TO A INTERFACE AND CORRESPONDING APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for migrating a user plane from an Iur-g interface to an A interface and an apparatus. The method includes: receiving, by a BSC, a migration commit notification that is sent by an RNC through an Iur-g interface, where the migration commit notification is sent by the RNC according to a notification message of finishing preparing resources by the BSC, and the notification message of finishing preparing resources by the BSC is sent by a core network; and migrating, by the BSC, a user plane from the Iur-g interface to an A interface according to the migration commit notification. In this way, the interruption duration in a process of migrating the user plane from the Iur-g interface to the A interface may be shortened.11-01-2012
20120276903METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING FEMTO CELL INFORMATION FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for allocating femto cell allocation information to support handover from a cell of a Base Station (BS) to a femto cell in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes setting a start frequency of a beacon signal to be different from a start frequency of a neighbor femto cell, sequentially hopping a beacon frequency beginning from the start frequency, and allocating new femto cell information based on the frequency hopping.11-01-2012
20120276904SLEEP-STATE FOR MOBILE TERMINAL AND SERVICE INITIATION FOR MOBILE TERMINALS IN SLEEP-STATE - The invention relates to the initiation of a service to a mobile terminal capable of communicating via at least a first and second access network. Further, the invention relates to a reduction of power consumption of mobile terminals supporting connectivity to at least two access networks. The invention also relates to mobile communication systems and in particular to mobile communications through heterogeneous access networks. In order to prove improved method for initiating services to mobile terminals and/or to reduce power consumption of mobile terminals, the invention introduces of a sleep state that can be entered by the terminal for an access system if same is not used. Upon requesting a service from/to the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal starts service initiation through a second access system and transits back to active state for the first access system for service provision.11-01-2012
20120276901WIRELESS DEVICE HANDOFF BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Examples are disclosed for a wireless device handoff between a first wireless network and a second wireless network.11-01-2012
20110250886Method and System of Determining Whether a Mobile Station is Located Inside a Coverage Area of a Narrowband Repeater and Using the Determination in a Handover Procedure - A method and system of determining whether a mobile station is located inside (or moving into) a repeater's coverage area and using the determination in a handover procedure. An access network may receive from a mobile station communicating on a first wireless link an indication of channel quality for the first wireless link and a second wireless link that serve the same coverage area. The access network may then use the channel quality indicators to determine whether the mobile station is located inside (or moving into) a repeater's coverage area, such as by comparing the channel quality indicators. If the access network determines that the mobile station is located inside (or moving into) the repeater's coverage area, it may also initiate a handover of the communication with the mobile station to the repeated wireless link (e.g., which may include suspending application of a load threshold to the repeated wireless link).10-13-2011
20110244863USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - In a user equipment (UE)(10-06-2011
20110269467METHOD FOR MANAGING RADIO LINKS WITHIN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH MOBILE UNITS, AND EQUIPMENT ADAPTED TO IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - In an access network infrastructure of a cellular radio communication network, comprising a first radio access point serving at least one radio cell and capable of communicating, over a radio interface, with at least one user equipment item located within the radio coverage of at least one of the radio cells, first and second criteria for establishing a radio communication link with a radio access point are defined, with these two criteria being distinct from one another, as well as a set of user equipment associated with the first radio access point. Whenever user equipment is located within the radio coverage of at least one of the cells of the first radio access point, and the first criterion for establishing a radio communication link or the second criterion for establishing a radio communication link is applied, depending on whether or not the user equipment belongs to the set of user equipment associated with the first radio access point, for the purposes of establishing a radio communication link between the user equipment and the first radio access point whenever the applied radio communication link establishment criterion is fulfilled.11-03-2011
20120088506METHOD FOR OPERATING A NETWORK AND A NETWORK - For allowing a reliable communication within a network by simple constructive features a method for operating a network is claimed, wherein a number of base stations are grouped into a cluster and are connected to a cluster controller and wherein the cluster controller is providing access of the base stations to a main network. The method is characterized in that the cluster controller is mitigating interference within and/or outside the cluster on the basis of a measurement information and/or report from at least one base station. Further, an according network is claimed, preferably for carrying out the above mentioned method.04-12-2012
20120329459Method for Allocating a Temporary Resource Request Identifier for Accessing a Target Base Station - The present disclosure provides for a method for allocating by a plurality of source base stations of a cellular wireless communication support infrastructure a temporary resource request identifier to a wireless communication device for accessing a target base station. The method includes identifying a list of temporary resource request identifiers associated with the target base station for use by one or more wireless communication devices, wherein the list includes a subset of one or more part time temporary resource request identifiers whose respective assignment to a corresponding grouping of one or more source base stations at a particular time is rotated between more than one of the plurality of corresponding groupings of one or more source base stations.12-27-2012
20120329458METHOD FOR REDUCING SIGNALLING - The present invention relates to a method for UE context setup in an eNodeB for a UE subscriber in an infrastructure network. The network comprises at least one eNodeB providing radio access for the UE and an MME connected to the eNodeB. The eNodeB/-s comprises an inactivity timer releasing the UE context being setup in the eNodeB after a defined time period. The network for each UE context setup performs the steps of: the UE sending a setup request to the eNodeB, wherein the eNodeB in response to said request sends an initial UE message to the MME to initiate the UE context setup, the UE message identifying the UE sending the setup request; the MME in response to said UE message sending an initial UE context setup request to the eNodeB, wherein the eNodeB responds to the MME with an initial context response complete to finalize the UE context setup; and the MME in the setup request sending timer setup information for said UE, on which basis the eNodeB configures the time period of the inactivity timer for the UE context being setup. The present invention also relates to a MME and an eNodeB adapted for the same purpose.12-27-2012
20120329460SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELF-OPTIMIZATION OF INTERFERENCE COORDINATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the present invention, a method, apparatus and system are provided for self-optimization of interference coordination in communication systems. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes a measurement and reporting subsystem configured to perform measurements regarding a status of the apparatus and to provide a reliability report to a base station as a function thereof. The apparatus is configured to notify a strongest interferer about the status via the reliability report. In another embodiment, the apparatus includes a measurement report handler configured to process a reliability report received from a user equipment and an interference coordination subsystem configured to adjust interference coordination parameters based on the reliability report received from the user equipment.12-27-2012
20120100857METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING THE HANDOVER BEHAVIOR IN A MOBILE RADIO NETWORK - A method for optimizing handover behavior in a mobile radio network includes: a) determining, during a first period of time, the handover behavior of at least one base station of the mobile radio network, with current configuration values of the handover parameters of the at least one base station; b) evaluating a current configuration of the at least one base station based on the determined handover behavior during the first period of time; c1) in the case that step b) does not indicate a need for optimization: repeating steps a) and b); or c2) in the case that step b) indicates a need for optimization: setting an optimization parameter A to a maximum value Amax; and d) modifying configuration values of at least one handover parameter.04-26-2012
20120100856MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND BASE STATION - In a mobile communication system, a handover of a terminal device (MT) from a macrocell base station (eNB) to a small cell base station (HeNB) is controlled via a host device (MME or HeNB-GW). Physical cell ID deployment map information (PCI deployment map information), which includes at least information (PCI/CGI map information) indicating the correspondences between physical cell IDs and unique cell IDs of CSG cells for which access is granted, is generated in the host device (MME or HeNB-GW). When the terminal device measures the reception quality for surrounding CSG cells for handover control to any of the CSG cells, the terminal device uses the PCI deployment map information to generate a measurement result report. Thus, a service interruption caused by handover control to an inaccessible small cell can be avoided, and the wait time for handover control can be reduced.04-26-2012
20120100855Handover Control Method, Apparatuses and Communication System - A handover control method, apparatuses and a communication system are disclosed. In embodiments of the present invention, a control base station (DeNB) of a Relay node is identified according to an established relation between the Relay node and the Control base station, and therefore, a handover request message can be routed to the correct DeNB and finally sent to the RN, and a User Equipment can normally hand over to a cell controlled by the Relay node.04-26-2012
20120100854Wireless Communication System, Wireless Communication Base Station Device, and Control Node - A used frequency, a used bandwidth, and others of a wireless zone in a base station are determined so as to be “a wired band between the base station and a gateway=a upper limit value of an operating bandwidth of a wireless zone of a femtocell” by cyclically collecting to recognize a band which is available for a wired line between the base station and the gateway, a power on/off state of the wired line, or others, and a peripheral base station is notified of the information of an unused wireless frequency, so that system switching in consideration of the state of the wired line is achieved, and at the same time, excessive radiowave transmission in the wireless line is prevented to reduce interference.04-26-2012
20120100853METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING TYPE OF LOCAL NETWORK OVER BASE STATION - The present application discloses a method and an equipment for processing the local network type of a base station (BS). The method comprises: when a BS has determined its local network type, it indicates to a user equipment (UE) said local network type; and when the UE receives the indication carrying said local network type of the BS, it can determine, according to said indication, the local network type of the BS. The present application solves the problem of a user being unable to acquire the type of network connected to a BS and accordingly being unable to determine the corresponding connection means, and enriches user experience.04-26-2012
20120100852METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INTRA CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP HANDOVER - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate initiating an intra-closed subscriber group (CSG) handover. Access points in the same or similar CSG can make determinations regarding one or more devices without requiring information from the devices. An access point in a closed access mode can assume a device to which it communicates is a member of the CSG, and can provide such information to a target access point of the same CSG operating in a hybrid access mode, and the hybrid access mode access point can determine to allow member level access to the device. Similarly, where the target access point operates in a closed access mode, a source access point in the same CSG can determine whether to initiate handover of the device to the target access point based at least in part on CSG membership information for the device.04-26-2012
20120100851Apparatuses, Systems, and Methods for Inbound Handover Enhancement - A wireless communications device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided. The wireless module performs wireless transmission and reception to and from a service network comprising at least two first home base stations having the same physical cell identity (PCI) or physical scrambling code (PSC), a plurality of second home base stations neighboring the first home base stations, and a macro base station. The controller module receives a message from the macro base station via the wireless module, requests the wireless module to detect a plurality of PCIs or PSCs respectively corresponding to the first home base stations and the second home base stations in response to the message, and transmits to the macro base station via the wireless module the detected PCIs or PSCs, prior to being handed over to the one of the first home base stations from the macro base station.04-26-2012
20120289233Method and Arrangement for Supporting Handover of a Mobile Terminal in Certain Scenarios - Method and arrangement in a mobile terminal in a wireless communication system, for supporting a handover from a serving cell to a target cell. The method comprises determining 11-15-2012
20120289234HANDOFF TO BASE STATION HAVING ENHANCED CAPABILITIES - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit perform a handoff to a target base station having enhanced capabilities. A dual mode manager triggers a capabilities query for information regarding enhanced capability of the target base station, wherein the enhanced capability includes transmission in accordance with a high speed data mode. A generator sends the query to a server connected to the Internet via a first base station not having enhanced capability. The dual mode manager receives from the server via the first base station information regarding the enhanced capability. A handoff to the target base station is initiated by the dual mode manager on a condition that the received information indicates that the target base station has enhanced capability. The dual mode manager deactivates a first mode of operation for communication with the first base station and activates the high speed data mode for communication with the target base station.11-15-2012
20120289231Method And Apparatus For Improved Mobile Communications In Heterogeneous Wireless Networks - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved mobile communications in heterogeneous networks. In one method, an anchor-cell transceiver node communicates with a mobile device via a primary link. The anchor-cell transceiver node conveys information for the mobile device to the mobile device by routing at least a portion of the information to the mobile device via a secondary-cell transceiver node.11-15-2012
20100167744HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS THEREOF - The invention relates to a handover method in a base station of a mobile communication system, the mobile communication system further comprising a plurality of base stations. A telecommunication link being established between a user equipment and the base station, the method comprises: receiving a first measurement report from the user equipment; selecting a first candidate base station using the evaluation of the signal quality from the first measurement report; initiating a first handover preparation by transmitting a first request to the first candidate base station; determining if the first handover preparation has failed; selecting a set of candidate base stations including at least some of the candidate base stations identified in the first measurement report; initiating a second handover preparation by transmitting a second handover request to at least one of the set of candidate base stations, if the first handover preparation has failed; selecting a target base station from the set of candidate base stations, if the second handover preparation has not failed; initiating the handover of the user equipment from the base station to the target base station.07-01-2010
20100167742GEOGRAPHY AWARE PEER-TO-PEER OVERLAY CREATION - In general, a first private access point detects a neighboring private access point. An address of the neighboring private access point is identified, and a peer-to-peer network that includes the first private access point and the neighboring private access points is formed. The peer-to-peer network is maintained between the first private access point and the neighboring private access points.07-01-2010
20130012209HANDOVER FOR CELLULAR RADIO SYSTEMS - In a cellular wireless system, power thresholds used for determining whether to add or drop servers held in a set of servers, such as an active set, for serving a user equipment SUE) are determined based on the motion of the respective UE user. A lower threshold may be used with respect to the adding or dropping of a given server to or from a set of servers for serving a fast moving UE than would be used for the same server with respect to its adding or dropping to or from a set of servers for serving a slow moving UE, while maintaining a given quality of service. As a result, the average number of servers held in sets is reduced in a typical network that comprises a plurality of UEs moving at different speeds, compared to a situation in which the threshold is set irrespective of the motion of a UE.01-10-2013
20100151861BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE BASE STATION, AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - Provided is a handover originating base station which transmits data to a handover destination base station, for performing mobile communication terminal handover in a mobile communication system. The handover originating base station is provided with a means for transmitting data whose transmission is not confirmed by a communication terminal, with information which indicates data transmitted just before.06-17-2010
20100130208Method For Handover In Wireless Communication System, Wireless Base Station, And Wireless Terminal - A first wireless base station sends a second wireless base station first forward order information provided to the first data destined for a wireless terminal; and the second wireless base station sends the wireless terminal the first data forwarded from the first wireless base station and provides second forward order information obtained through adding an offset value to the first forward order information to second data which the second wireless station has received from the upper apparatus and which is destined for the wireless terminal.05-27-2010
20100130207METHOD OF HANDLING HANDOVER SECURITY CONFIGURATION AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling handover security configuration for a mobile device of a wireless communication system includes performing an inter-radio access technology, hereinafter called RAT, handover procedure from a serving network including a service domain to a target network including a plurality of service domains when receiving a handover command, wherein the mobile device includes security configuration corresponding to the service domain of the serving network and security configuration corresponding to the plurality of service domains of the target network, and updating the security configuration corresponding to at least one of the plurality of service domains according to the handover command no later than the time a connection with the target network is successfully established during the inter-RAT handover procedure.05-27-2010
20120149375RADIO ACCESS NETWORK, BASE STATION, AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A radio access network includes a storage that stores data to be transferred from a base station to a mobile station. When an intensity of a signal received by the mobile station from the base station falls below a threshold, receiving an indication indicating the intensity from the mobile station, and when a plurality of indications are received, an amount of data transferable to the mobile station until a communication with the mobile station becomes unavailable is calculated, based on the indications and times when the indications are received, and the data is transferred to the mobile station in the calculated amount or smaller.06-14-2012
20120149374WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A wireless communication system (06-14-2012
20120149373REDIRECTING MOBILE SERVICES IN MULTIPLE OVERLAPPED WIRELESS NETWORKS - Techniques, apparatuses, and systems for redirecting mobile services include generating a message with a redirection indication and transmitting the message to one or more mobile stations. A redirection indication can include an identifier for a wireless network operator and access information for a network associated with the wireless network operator.06-14-2012
20130017833COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHODAANM Sakamoto; MitsuruAACI Osaka-shiAACO JPAAGP Sakamoto; Mitsuru Osaka-shi JPAANM Ohshima; AkiraAACI Osaka-shiAACO JPAAGP Ohshima; Akira Osaka-shi JPAANM Shimonabe; TadashiAACI Osaka-shiAACO JPAAGP Shimonabe; Tadashi Osaka-shi JPAANM Takagi; YuhsukeAACI Osaka-shiAACO JPAAGP Takagi; Yuhsuke Osaka-shi JPAANM Naito; TakashiAACI Osaka-shiAACO JPAAGP Naito; Takashi Osaka-shi JP - During a period of parallel-like radio communication with two or more first base stations, the first base station designates a second base station correlated with one of the two or more first base stations, and temporarily suspends the radio communication in accordance with a first communications standard to issue, to a mobile station, a request of measurement for the designated second base station. The first base station receives a result of the measurement for the designated second base station. The first base station notifies the mobile station of a handover from the first communications standard to a second communications standard, and also notifies the mobile station of a request for starting a coordination mode in which the two or more second base stations including the designated second base station establish communication with the mobile station in coordination with each other.01-17-2013
20130017832WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONAANM SUZUKI; TakahitoAACI ZushiAACO JPAAGP SUZUKI; Takahito Zushi JP - A wireless communication system includes: a transmitter to transmit information about cells neighboring to a cell in which a wireless communication terminal exists; a receiver to receive the information about the neighboring cells; a first managing unit to manage a count of not being selected as a transition destination cell for each of the neighboring cells; and a second managing unit to manage a rank of each of the neighboring cells as a transition destination candidate cell based on the count of each of the neighboring cells, the second managing unit selecting the transition destination cell based on the rank.01-17-2013
20130017831FEMTOCELL Architecture In Support Of Voice And Data Communications - Methods and systems for providing voice and date services in a femtocell wireless network. The proposed approach integrates IWLAN architecture into femtocell architecture by introducing a gateway to serve both IWLAN and femtocell users. The proposed approach handles the voice and data in a different way so that it enhances the data handling efficiency while re-using existing MSC investment. The proposed approach carries the data traffic from a femtocell base station to the gateway in native IP packet, instead of encapsulating them in 3G data, thus enhancing the efficiency and performance for the data traffic. The data traffic can then be sent to GGSN or directly to packet data network. The approach tunnels voice traffic to MSC through the gateway as in conventional Iu-CS approach.01-17-2013
20110136489CELL SELECTION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Mobile user equipment for use in a cellular communications environment performs an improved cell selection on transitions out of a connected mode state. The transitions might be from one connected mode state to another or from a connected mode state to idle mode. The improvement in cell selection lies in assembling the list of candidate cells prior to cell selection. In the prior art, the list of candidate cells would usually be restricted to the serving cell or active cells supporting communication between the equipment and the network prior to transition. In embodiments of the invention, the list might comprise cells which are not the serving cell or which are outside the active set, for example a network-preferred cell or cells neighbouring the serving cell or cells of the active set.06-09-2011
20110159874RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, RADIO RELAY STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The radio communication system has a radio base station, a radio relay station connectable to the radio base station, and a radio terminal configured to connect to the radio base station. The radio base station notifies the radio terminal of identification information for a predetermined number of relay stations based on the number of radio relay stations that can be simultaneously connected to the radio base station. When the radio relay station is connected to the radio base station, identification information for any one of the relay stations is assigned to the radio relay station. The radio terminal performs a cell search based on the relay station identification information.06-30-2011
20110159873MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, from a handover source radio base station to a switching center, a handover request including an NCC, a PCI and a K06-30-2011
20080254798Handover Method and System - Systems and methods are described which provide cell data between radio network controllers including monitoring at least one cell being controlled by a first radio network controller, compiling cell data based on configuration changes to the at least one cell and transferring the compiled cell data to at least a second radio network controller connected to the first controller over an inter controller link.10-16-2008
20080254796Hand Over Method For Dual Band/Dual Mode Mobile Communication Terminal - The present invention relates to a handover method for a dual band/dual mode mobile communication terminal between a synchronous mobile communication network and an asynchronous mobile communication network. The method includes the first step of the main processor setting an initial mobile communication network connection to the asynchronous mobile communication network and connecting to the asynchronous mobile communication network when power is applied; the second step of activating the synchronous RF device and setting up a connection to the synchronous mobile communication network when the intensity of a signal from the asynchronous mobile communication network is equal to or lower than a first predetermined reference value; the third step of determining whether the intensity of a signal from the asynchronous mobile communication network is equal to or lower than a second predetermined reference value previously set for the handover; the fourth step of activating the connection to the synchronous mobile communication network set up at the second step if the intensity of the signal from the asynchronous mobile communication network is determined to be equal to or lower than the second predetermined reference value at the third step; and the fifth step of releasing the connection to the asynchronous mobile communication network.10-16-2008
20080242302Radio telecommunications network management - Management of a radio telecommunications network, in which a plurality of a radio network controllers (RNCs) are served with a gateway support node having a given configuration. An added RNC connected to the radio telecommunications network is detected and then it is detected the serving gateway support node if the added RNC is a flat radio access node. If the added RNC is detected as a flat radio access node, it is verified whether the configuration allows serving the added RNC and if yes, the added RNC is connected with the serving gateway support node and correspondingly the configuration is modified. Alternatively, if the added RNC is detected as not being a flat radio access node, connecting the added RNC with the serving gateway support node is refused.10-02-2008
20090117899APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPEATER-BASED CELLULAR COVERAGE SWITCHING - An apparatus and method for Repeater-based cellular coverage switching across cellular donor sites in a wireless network is disclosed. The method involves measuring capacity load levels of cellular donor sites, determining cellular switching schemed based on the capacity loads establishing cellular switching configurations based on the cellular switching schemes, and performing cellular coverage switching to cellular donor sits.05-07-2009
20080233961Apparatus and method for performing handover in Broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for performing handover in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. A communication method includes broadcasting, by a Base Station (BS), a neighbor advertisement message including neighbor cell information through each Frequency Allocation (FA); analyzing the neighbor cell advertise message by a plurality of Media Access Control (MAC) processors of an Mobile Station (MS) to obtain FA configuration information of each neighbor cell; independently determining handover by the MAC processors of the MS; generating the start of handover by one MAC which first determines handover; and determining a handover target by the remaining MAC processors so that handover is performed to different FAs of the same BS of the MAC processor which generates the start of handover by using the FA configuration information of each neighbor cell.09-25-2008
20080233960Enabling Down Link Reception of System and Control Information From Intra-Frequency Neighbors Without Gaps in the Serving Cell in Evolved-UTRA Systems - Simplified communication between user equipment and a neighboring cell not the primary cell is achieved by restricting the transmission parameters, such as bandwidth, of the neighboring cell transmission and provision of a simplified secondary baseband processor in the user equipment.09-25-2008
20080233959Method and Arrangement for Optimizing the Operational Times and Cell Exchange Performance of Mobile Terminals - The invention at hand involves a method and an arrangement for optimizing the operational times and cell exchange performance of mobile terminals in a mobile communication network having adjacent radio cells. The mobile terminal temporarily stores network specific characteristics for adjacent radio cells which are not suitable for cell exchange when the mobile communication network is in operation and it uses said characteristics as decision criteria for cell exchange, and said information is used, in particular, to exclude said adjacent radio cells from additional radio technical measurements and identification methods. By implementing the terminal performance according to the inventive method, it is possible to significantly increase the operational times and the cell exchange performance of a mobile terminal in specific situations and to improve the service for a mobile radio customer. The inventive device can also be used for mobile terminals according to GSM or UMTS standard, and also for other radio network technology (for example, wireless LAN (W-LAN), cdma2000, WiMAX, WiBro, enhanced UTRAN, etc.).09-25-2008
20080227456Techniques for reporting and simultaneous transmission mechanism to improve reliability of signaling - Methods, apparatus and computer program products perform signal quality measurements for signals from a plurality of cells served by an apparatus, and transmit indications of the signal quality measurements to the apparatus. The signal quality measurements may include CQI measurements. Transmitting may include transmitting indications of the signal quality measurements to a source cell of the apparatus. Other methods, apparatus and computer program products perform signal quality measurements for signals from a plurality of cells served by an apparatus, determine, using at least the signal quality measurements, a frequency band to be used by each of the plurality of cells to transmit a command, and transmit an indication of the frequency band to the apparatus. Variants may include receiving over the frequency band the command from each of the plurality of cells.09-18-2008
20080227455Method and Apparatus For Optimizing Neighbor List Automatically in Asynchronous Wcdma Network - A method for automatically optimizing a neighbor list for processing handover in an asynchronous WCDMA (Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access) network includes the steps of: collecting neighbor list data, call fault data, handover statistical data, base station location data and PSC information data of each base station sub-cell (or, sector) in a nationwide network; extracting all target sub-cells (or, sectors) available for handover by analyzing the collected data; endowing a weighting factor to the extracted target sub-cells (or, sectors) according to importance and then sorting calculated results so as to determine priorities; and subsequently inputting the target sub-cell (or, sector) information to the neighbor list according to the priorities.09-18-2008
20080227454HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate handing over mobile device communications in a wireless network from a source base station to a target base station without using a random access channel (RACH). In this regard, the source base station can request shared data bandwidth resources from the target base station on behalf of the mobile device and assign the resources to the mobile device. The mobile device can calculate a timing difference between the source and target base stations and can handover communications by transmitting over the shared data bandwidth using the timing difference to generally provide correct timing for the transmission. To this end, the target base station can have transmission time intervals where it allows transmitting with an extended cyclic prefix to ensure more reliable handover for the mobile device.09-18-2008
20080227453CELL RESELECTION PROCESS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method of cell reselection in a wireless communications system where parameters are transmitted by the network in system information blocks to WTRU's on the network. Parameters are either added or subtracted from an equation representing the signal power and/or quality of a cell. Parameters may be prioritized. The results of the calculations are used to rank the servicing cell and neighboring cells. If a neighboring cell has a higher quality than the servicing cell, then the WTRU reselects the better cell. The network may transmit a blacklist of cells where the WTRU cannot camp as well as a barring timer for each cell where if the timer expires, the cell may again be considered for reselection. Information germane to the reselection decision may be transmitted and used by the network.09-18-2008
20080227452OPTIMIZED NETWORK RE-ENTRY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for supporting entry of a remote unit (09-18-2008
20080220783Method for Managing Communications and Related Core Network Node - A first group of core network (CN) nodes are arranged for transmitting a change request from a source to a target radio network controller (RNC), to a CN node selected from the set of CN nodes to which the target RNC is connected. Relating to a communication in progress with a first RNC (09-11-2008
20080220782BALANCING PAGING LOAD AND TRACKING AREA UPDATES - A method for assigning a tracking area (TA) is disclosed. A mobility state of a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is determined and the TA is assigned based on the determined mobility state. Also disclosed is a method for accessing a closed subscriber group (CSG) TA. A CSG TA identifier is received at a WTRU and is stored. A CSG TA broadcast is received and the broadcast CSG TA is accessed if an identifier of the broadcast CSG TA matches the stored CSG TA identifier. Also disclosed is a method for changing a mobility state of a WTRU. A current mobility state of the WTRU is determined and a predetermined metric of the WTRU is examined. The predetermined metric is evaluated to determine if the metric has crossed a threshold and the mobility state is changed based on the evaluated metric.09-11-2008
20080220781METHODS AND ARRANGMENT FOR IMPLEMENTING AN ACTIVE CALL HANDOVER BY EMPLOYING A SWITCHING COMPONENT - An active call handover arrangement for managing a handover between a plurality of telecommunication devices associated with a public extension number is provided. The arrangement includes a mobility server configured to manage a telecommunication session between a telecommunication device of a third-party caller and a first telecommunication device of the plurality of telecommunication devices. The arrangement also includes a switch component configured to be associated with at least one telecommunication device of the plurality of telecommunication devices. At least one telecommunication device is configured to include mobility client software. The switch component is also configured to enable a user to perform the handover between the first telecommunication device and a second telecommunication device of the plurality of telecommunication devices.09-11-2008
20080220780Method for the automatic calibration of location anchors - A target radio can be located and tracked by an array of anchor radios. The anchor radios are calibrated when each anchor radio transmits an anchor message that is received by the other anchor radios. The distance between anchor radios is known because their positions are known. The received signal strengths are dependent on distance and an attenuation value. The calibration operation uses the received signal strengths and known anchor radio locations to determine the attenuation values of the anchor radios. After calibration, a target radio transmission can be received by the anchor radios. Each anchor radio estimates the distance to the target. The distance estimates and the anchor locations can then be used to determine the target radio's location.09-11-2008
20080220779Configuration of a Home Base Station - In some aspects, a method includes determining a location of the home base station. The method also includes generating a neighbor list that includes at least some cellular base stations within an operating range of the home base station. The method also includes using the neighbor list to hand-off mobile communications from the home base station to one of the cellular base stations included in the neighbor list based on a location of the mobile device.09-11-2008
20080220778Data Sharing among Radio Access Technologies - By adapting its search procedures, a user equipment in a mobile communication system can shorten the time needed to find a cell or public land mobile network. If a first cell in a first radio access technology has been found, the equipment can exclude one or more frequencies from a search for cells in a second radio access technology. Thus, time and power are not wasted searching for cells in the second radio access technology that cannot be found.09-11-2008
20130143563Methods and Apparatuses for Improved Paging Area Identifier Selection in Wireless Networks Containing Low Power Base Stations - The present disclosure presents methods and apparatuses for improved paging area identifier selection in low power base stations. In some examples described in the present disclosure, a method is provided for updating a paging area identifier, which may include observing one or more parameters of signals received in a wireless network, updating a previously selected paging area identifier to a new paging area identifier based at least in part on the one or more parameters, and transmitting the new paging area identifier. In addition, example methods are provided for paging devices in a wireless network, which may include determining a paging area identifier related to a last known low power base station for a device, determining a plurality of low power base stations using the paging area identifier, and causing the plurality of low power base stations to transmit a paging signal for the device.06-06-2013
20130143564APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING VOICE COMMUNICATION IN MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for performing a voice communication in a mobile terminal that is in range of more than one base station. The mobile terminal determines whether a request signal for a voice communication is transmitted or received. A first signal strength, or a first electric field intensity of a first base station connected to the mobile terminal and a second signal strength, or a second electric field intensity of a second base station positioned within transmission/reception range the mobile terminal are measured when transmission or reception of a requested signal is performed. There is a comparison of electric field intensities or signal strength. Voice communication is performed through the second base station when the second electric field intensity is larger than the first electric field intensity. The first and second base stations may be one generation apart in terms of support.06-06-2013
20130143565HANDOVER - A method of handover of a User Equipment (UE) from first to second Radio Access Network (RANs), the second RAN coupled to a Mobility Controller (MC) and having an association with the first RAN, the UE capable of communication with a Session Transfer Controller (STC) via the first and second RANs, includes receiving a first message at the MC from the first RAN requesting handover of the UE to the second RAN, sending a second message from the MC to the STC subscribing the MC to status updates from the STC, said status updates relating to status of a call, receiving one of said status updates at the MC originated by the STC, dependent on a communication via the first RAN from the UE to the STC of a change in the status, and in response to receipt of said status update, updating a call status indicator of the MC.06-06-2013
20130143566BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CALL ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND CALL ADMISSION CONTROL PROGRAM OF BASE STATION - In order to reduce the occurrence of call loss in mobile stations while suppressing degradation of communication quality in a handover destination cell, a communication unit (06-06-2013
20130143567MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO CONTROLLER, BASE STATION, AND MOBILITY CONTROL METHOD - A radio controller 06-06-2013
20130143568APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - Aspects of the present disclosure are directed to a user equipment, an RNC, or an application operable in a wireless communications network and methods in which an apparatus for wireless communication is configured to transfer data for a user equipment via a first user plane connection in a first radio access network. If the data transferred via the first user plane connection satisfies a trigger condition, the apparatus is configured to initiate a handover procedure of transferring the user equipment to a second user plane connection in a second radio access network.06-06-2013
20130143569APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - Aspects of the present disclosure are directed to a user equipment, an RNC, or an application operable in a wireless communications network and methods. A network controller for wireless communication is configured to transfer data via a first user plane connection in a first radio access network and initiate a handover procedure of transferring the user equipment to a second user plane connection in a second radio access network.06-06-2013
20130143570APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - Aspects of the present disclosure are directed to a user equipment, an RNC, or an application operable in a wireless communications network and methods. A network controller for wireless communication is configured to transfer data via a first user plane connection in a first radio access network and initiate a handover procedure of transferring the user equipment to a second user plane connection in a second radio access network.06-06-2013
20130143571BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD USED IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A disclosed base station apparatus to be used in a mobile communication system includes a report signal receiving unit, receiving a report signal from one or more user equipment terminals, a radio parameter adjustment unit adjusting radio parameters based on an analysis result of each report signal, a designation unit designating a report condition to be used for each user equipment terminal to determine whether to transmit the report signal and content to be reported in the report signal, and a report unit reporting the report condition and the content to be reported to the one or more user equipment terminals. Further, in the base station apparatus, the report condition is satisfied when a transmission source of a downlink reference signal is a specific cell, and the content to be reported includes a received quality value of the downlink reference signal.06-06-2013
20130178212CREATING NEIGHBOUR CELL LISTS - A neighbour cell list is formed, for use in a basestation of a cellular communications network. For each of a plurality of neighbour cells, a value of a first component is assigned, depending on whether or not the basestation can detect signals transmitted from said neighbour cell. A value of a second component is assigned, depending on a history of successful or unsuccessful handover attempts to said neighbour cell. The values of the first and second components are combined to form a weighting parameter, for use in determining a handover priority to be given to said neighbour cell in the neighbour cell list.07-11-2013
20130178210METHOD AND ACCESS NODE FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method for information transmission, the method including: in a process of a terminal initial accessing and/or the terminal handing over, an upper level access node belonging to a hierarchical architecture access network notifying a final access node belonging to the same hierarchical architecture access network of information of a mobility management entity (MME) to which the terminal accesses. The present invention also discloses an access node. The present invention makes the final access node acquire the information of the MME to which the terminal accesses so that the final access node can perform X2 handover via the acquired information of the MME.07-11-2013
20130178211METHOD OF MDT CONTINUOUS MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING UNDER MULTIPLE PLMNS - A method of Minimization of Drive Tests (MDT) continuous measurement under multiple Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMNs) is provided. The method includes sending, by an eNB, MDT-related information to a target eNB, or, requesting, by the target eNB, for user consent information from an MME, and transmitting the user consent information among multiple PLMNs without being lost during transmission. In addition, a method for achieving MDT reporting is provided. The method includes reporting, by the UE, a new indication, or, reporting, by the UE, a PLMN identifier configuring the MDT to the eNB, and enabling the eNB to correctly determine whether the UE is requested to report the measurement record to the eNB.07-11-2013
20130178213HANDOVER METHOD, DEDICATED NETWORK USER EQUIPMENT, ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - The embodiments of the present invention disclose a handover method and correspondingly provide a dedicated network user equipment, an access network device, and a system. The method provided in an embodiment of the present invention includes: receiving, by a dedicated network user equipment, a measurement control message sent by an access network device, determining a measurement cycle according to measurement cycle related information, performing neighbor cell measurement within the measurement cycle to obtain a measurement report about quality of neighbor cell signals, sending the measurement report to the access network device, and after receiving a handover command sent by the access network device, performing, by the dedicated network user equipment, handover according to the handover command. With the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present invention, a measurement cycle can be adjusted and controlled, and a handover delay can meet the communication requirement in a dedicated network scenario.07-11-2013
20130178214METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING MESSAGE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for processing a message. The present invention relates to the field of wireless communications, and can increase the connection reestablishment success rate in a wireless communication system using an RN. The method for processing a message includes: receiving a handover request message A from an SeNB; parsing the handover request message A to obtain identity information of a reestablished cell controlled by an RN and user equipment context information prepared for the reestablished cell; and sending a first message to the RN according to the identity information of the reestablished cell, where the first message includes the user equipment context information prepared for the reestablished cell, where the user equipment context information provides a basis for the RN to prepare a connection. The present invention is mainly applicable to handover and reestablishment in a wireless communication system.07-11-2013
20130178215METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT ZONE SWITCH OPERATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A wireless access system and, more particularly, a method and apparatus for more efficiently performing zone switch are disclosed. The method of performing zone switch by an advanced mobile station (AMS) in a mixed-mode advanced base station (ABS) which operates in a mixed mode of a broadband wireless access system includes receiving a ranging response (RNG-RSP) message including system information of an AMS support zone from a legacy zone (LZone) of the ABS, and performing ranging to the AMS support zone using the system information.07-11-2013
20130171992MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication method according to the present invention is a mobile communication method in which a mobile station is handed over from a cell #B and is subordinate to a radio base station to a cell #C and is subordinate to a radio base station, and includes a step of transmitting “Measurement Configuration” for instructing to measure and report a desired radio quality to the mobile station, a step of transmitting, by the radio base station, “HO Request”, which includes identification information assigned to the cell #B, to the radio base station, a step of transmitting, by the radio base station, “HO Request Ack” including “HO Command” not including “Measurement Configuration” to the radio base station in response to the identification information assigned to the cell #B, and a step of transmitting, by the radio base station, the “HO Command” to the mobile station.07-04-2013
20120252451Tracking and paging at boundries in LTE networks - A method, in one example, comprising the steps of receiving a tracking area identifier indicating a tracking area where a user equipment (UE) is located, and updating a current tracking area of the UE based on whether the tracking area identifier indicates that the UE is currently in a previously visited tracking area.10-04-2012
20120252457PROCESSING APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR SWITCHING CONNECTION OF MOBILE STATION, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - A processing apparatus operates aiming to realize handover to each mobile station while reducing a failure rate of the handover even when PSC Confusion is generated. More specifically, when a connection of the mobile station is switched from a first base station to a second base station, the processing apparatus determines the second base station by selecting from a plurality of base stations according to connection history information indicating a success or a failure of past switching of the connection from the first base station to at least one of the plurality of base stations.10-04-2012
20120252455Fast Reselection Between Different Radio Access Technology Networks - A user equipment UE determines that a neighbor cell is higher priority than a serving cell, measures neighbor cell signal strength in n>1 iterations, and analyzes them for reselecting from the serving cell to the neighbor cell. Each measurement iteration is spaced from one another by a time interval (e.g., 1 DRX) that is specific for the neighbor cell being higher priority. In various embodiments, the UE measures while in a Cell-PCH, URA-PCH or idle state/mode and the first iteration is taken at the first available measurement opportunity after transitioning to that state/mode. The UE reselects to the neighbor cell based on the analyzed signal strengths; in one embodiment the decision to reselect is without regard to signal quality of the serving cell; and in another the decision is without regard to whether a reselection condition remains satisfied for a specified time period T10-04-2012
20120252454TAKING CONTROL OF SUBSCRIBER TERMINAL - Taking control of a subscriber terminal. An apparatus comprises a processor configured to cause the apparatus: to control a first stand-alone base station utilizing a first radio access technology RAT to form an emulated first RAT cell and to set parameters of the emulated first RAT cell such that the emulated first RAT cell becomes a tempting destination for a cell reselection by a subscriber terminal utilizing the first RAT; to control a second stand-alone base station such that a formed emulated second RAT cell becomes a preferred destination for a cell reselection; to control the first stand-alone base station so that the ongoing radio connection with the serving cell base station utilizing the first RAT is transferred to continue with the first stand-alone base station utilizing the first RAT; and to control the first stand-alone base station to perform inter RAT cell reselection with the subscriber terminal.10-04-2012
20120252452Fast Reselection Between Different Radio Access Technology Networks - A user equipment UE determines that a neighbor cell is higher priority than a serving cell, measures neighbor cell signal strength in n>1 iterations, and analyzes them for reselecting from the serving cell to the neighbor cell. Each measurement iteration is spaced from one another by a time interval (e.g., 1 DRX) that is specific for the neighbor cell being higher priority. In various embodiments, the UE measures while in a Cell-PCH, URA-PCH or idle state/mode and the first iteration is taken at the first available measurement opportunity after transitioning to that state/mode. The UE reselects to the neighbor cell based on the analyzed signal strengths; in one embodiment the decision to reselect is without regard to signal quality of the serving cell; and in another the decision is without regard to whether a reselection condition remains satisfied for a specified time period T10-04-2012
20080214194RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND TRANSPORT NETWORK CONTROL METHOD FOR PERFORMING RELOCATION - Setting unit 09-04-2008
20080214192Mobile communication system with position detection to facilitate hard handoff - A system for facilitating handoff adapted for use with a telecommunications network. The system includes position equipment for determining the location of a mobile transceiver within a region containing a first cell and a second cell. A comparison circuit compares the location with a predetermined handoff area within the region and provides a control signal in response thereto. A handoff initiation circuit initiates handoff of the mobile transceiver between the first cell and the second cell in response to the control signal. In a specific embodiment, the handoff is a hard handoff. The handoff region can be either intersystem or intrasystem.09-04-2008
20130137432NETWORK NODE CONTROL FOR FACILITATING RELOCATION - A method of controlling network nodes of a wireless communications network, a network node and a computer program product are disclosed. The method of controlling networks nodes of a wireless communications network to facilitate relocation of at least a first network node from connection with a second network node to connection with one of a plurality of neighbouring network nodes, at least one of said network nodes being operable to switch, in accordance with an associated predetermined switching pattern, between an active mode of connection in which wireless communication is supported and a dormant mode of connection in which wireless communication is not supported, comprises the steps of: determining when said first network node is configured to support wireless communication with said second network node; and providing information to adjust said associated predetermined switching pattern to improve a likelihood of supporting wireless communication between said first network node and said one of a plurality of network nodes to thereby facilitate said relocation. By adjusting the switching patterns, it is more likely that the first network node will be able to detect the presences of one of the plurality of network nodes. Improving the likelihood of detecting the presence of these network nodes may in turn improve the probability of a successful relocation being facilitated.05-30-2013
20110269468MOVE SUBSCRIBERS TO SURROUNDING RADIO NETWORK - The present invention relates to a solution for handling closed subscriber groups in a cell and in particular for supporting service continuity for a user when terminating membership of a user in the closed subscriber group in a controlled manner. The present invention is exemplified as a device and method for handling members of a closed subscriber group, i.e. CSG, comprising the steps of obtaining in a mobility management node (11-03-2011
20110269465HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for handover of User Entity (UE) by a source Base Station (BS) is provided. The method includes determining whether to handover the UE using an X2 interface, transmitting a handover request message to a target BS, the handover request message including Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) information of the target BS, and receiving a handover request acknowledgement message from the target BS, wherein the determining of whether to handover the UE using the X2 interface includes, if there is the X2 interface between the source BS and the target BS, and if the target BS does not support a CSG or the target BS supports a same CSG supported by the source BS, determining to perform the handover of the UE using the X2 interface, and obtaining the CSG information of the target BS through an X2 interface set up procedure.11-03-2011
20130115953RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO RELAY STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A relay node (RN), which is configured to be able to move, comprises a handover controller (05-09-2013
20130115952METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CELL HANDOVER IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method, apparatus and system for cell handover in the communication system supporting Carrier Aggregation (CA). The method includes: after receiving a performance measurement report for one or more neighboring cells from the served terminal, according to the performance measurement report, and basing on the CA mode for one or more candidate BSs corresponding to the one or more neighboring cells, a source Base Station (BS) in a communications system selects an algorithm suitable for the CA mode to calculate the priority levels of the one or more candidate BSs; from the one or more candidate BSs, selecting the BS having the highest priority as a target BS; and selecting one more cells to access from all cells being subject to the target BS in the one or more neighboring cells.05-09-2013
20130115951METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING USER EQUIPMENT'S RESIDING IN A CELL - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for controlling user equipment's residing in a cell. With the embodiments, a base station of a virtual cell transmits a signal including common channel information, a frequency of the signal of the virtual cell is the same as a frequency of a signal transmitted by a base station of a source cell, the common channel information includes a pilot, a location area code and an inter-frequency reselection threshold, or includes a pilot and a location area code, and the content of the common channel information guides user equipment to reside in a target cell through reselection or through location update. Moreover, according to the embodiments, the co-channel interference caused by the signal onto the source cell is small, and the interference onto normal services of the source cell is reduced. Massive configuration in the source cell is also avoided.05-09-2013
20130115949Methods and Network Nodes for Detecting Short Stay Handover - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a second network node (05-09-2013
20130095834METHOD FOR RE-BALANCING LOAD, METHOD FOR MIGRATING LOAD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM USING THE SAME - The embodiment of the invention discloses a method for re-balancing a load, a method for migrating a load, a device and a system using the same. The method for re-balancing a load comprises: determining a type of a UE after receiving an access request from the UE by a first network device; determining whether the UE is to be migrated according to the type of the UE; and if yes, migrating the UE to a second network device whose type corresponds to the type of the UE. According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the CN nodes may be balanced according to the type of the UE.04-18-2013
20130115950AREA DETECTION APPARATUS, AREA DETECTION METHOD AND AREA DETECTION RECORDING MEDIUM - An area detection apparatus includes an acquirer configured to acquire received power values in a plurality of areas from neighboring base stations, an identifier configured to identify an area including a handover point for a mobile station on the basis of the received power values, a calculator configured to calculate communication qualities of the neighboring base stations in the area including the handover point, and a determiner configured to determine whether or not the area including the handover point is an area incapable of communication with the neighboring base stations with a predetermined communication quality on the basis of the communication qualities of the neighboring base stations.05-09-2013
20130102315MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication system according to the present invention is configured to be capable of switching a mobile station UE from a first communication state performing first AV communication via E-UTRAN to a second communication state performing second AV communication via UTRAN/GERAN, by performing a SRVCC procedure, codec information to be used in the second AV communication is exchanged between the mobile station UE and a MSC server/MGW in the first communication state before the SRVCC procedure is started, and the mobile station UE is configured to, in the SRVCC procedure, send the MSC server/MGW a command to switch to the exchanged codec information “Pseudo 3G H324M negotiation”.04-25-2013
20130102313SWITCHING BETWEEN RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES AT A MULTI-MODE ACCESS POINT - A multi-mode access point supports different radio access technologies (e.g., Wi-Fi and cellular) for serving multi-mode access terminals. To provide improved service for such an access terminal, the access point may redirect the access terminal from a first type of radio access technology to a second type of radio access technology under certain circumstances. A decision to invoke such a redirection may be based on, for example, at least one of: traffic conditions on the first type of radio access technology, traffic conditions on the second type of radio access technology, and whether a backhaul for the access point is currently a bottleneck for access point communication.04-25-2013
20130102312Handover For an Intermediate Node in a Wireless Communication Network - The disclosure relates to an intermediate node arranged to relay information between a donor node and at least one served node, and comprises a served antenna arrangement that communicates by means of at least a first and second electrically steerable antenna radiation lobe. During a first mode of operation, all antenna radiation lobes are directed towards a first donor node. During a second mode of operation, the antenna radiation lobes are directed such that the intermediate node is in contact with both the first donor node and the second donor node. During a third mode of operation, all antenna radiation lobes are directed towards the second donor node. A first polarization is associated with each lobe directed towards the second donor node during the second mode of operation and a second polarization is associated with each lobe directed towards the first donor node during the second mode of operation.04-25-2013
20130130691Congestion Control Method for Femtocell - A congestion control method for a femtocell is provided. When the femtocell is not congested, the femtocell is prompted to enter an access permitted mode. When the femtocell enters the access permitted mode, the femtocell sends a system information modification notification. When the femtocell enters the access permitted mode, the femtocell repeatedly adjusts at least one cell selection parameter or at least one cell reselection parameter to gradually increase a coverage of the femtocell.05-23-2013
20130130689METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING POWER CONSERVATION AND NETWORK OPTIMIZATIONS WHEN ACCESS TERMINALS EXHIBIT LITTLE OR NO MOBILITY - Access terminals are adapted to facilitate use of modified cell reselection parameters and/or procedures for access terminals exhibiting low or no mobility. An access terminal may employ one or more mobile thresholds to determine whether to perform cell reselection when the access terminal is mobile, and one or more stationary threshold to determine whether to perform cell reselection when the access terminal is stationary or substantially stationary. Methods operational on access terminals include determining the access terminal to be stationary or substantially stationary, and employing one or more stationary thresholds to determine whether to perform a cell reselection when the access terminal is determined to be at least substantially stationary. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also included.05-23-2013
20130130687WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE CAPABLE OF EFFICIENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENTS - A wireless communication device is disclosed that is capable of performing efficient measurements of secondary radio access technologies (RATs). The device includes multiple receiver chains. While operating in a first RAT, the device receives a measurement gap in order to perform measurements. Even though the measurement gap may be too small to adequately measure the other RAT, the device controls one of the receiver chains to measure the other RAT during a time period that overlaps with the measurement gap. In addition, when preparing for an inter-RAT handoff, the device controls one of the receiver chains to perform measurements regardless of whether a measurement gap has been received. In this manner, measurements of alternative RATs are efficiently performed, and handoff latency is significantly reduced.05-23-2013
20130143562Methods and Apparatuses for Improved Paging Area Identifier Selection in Wireless Networks Containing Low Power Base Stations - The present disclosure presents methods and apparatuses for improved paging area identifier selection in femto nodes and other low power base stations. In some examples described in the present disclosure, a method is provided for selecting a paging area identifier at a low power base station, which includes determining whether a neighboring high power base station is detectable. Additionally, the method can include observing, where the neighboring high power base station is detectable, a broadcasted paging area identifier of the neighboring high power base station. Furthermore, example methods may include selecting a paging area identifier of the low power base station to be the broadcasted paging area identifier and transmitting the paging area identifier.06-06-2013
20130095831METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND DEVICES FOR DETERMINING A CLOSEST BASE STATION TO A MULTI-MODE MOBILE DEVICE - Embodiments provide methods, systems, and/or devices to identify and/or determine a closest base station to a multi-mode mobile device among the multiple wireless communications technologies, such as different Radio Access Technologies (RATs). Having identified a closest base station to the multi-mode mobile device among the multiple wireless communications technologies, the mobile device's location may be estimated using location information regarding the closest identified base station. In some cases, a handover or other procedure may be performed with respect to the mobile device and the closest identified base station. The multiple wireless communications technologies may include, but are not limited to, WiMAX, CDMA 1x, LTE, and/or EVDO.04-18-2013
20130157663INTELLIGENT HANDOFFS FOR ENHANCING OR AVOIDING DROPPED AND INTERRUPTED COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - Systems and methods for intelligently enhancing communication sessions or avoiding dropped and interrupted communication sessions between or among communication devices. Characteristics of a communication link are monitored and are compared to intelligent communication session data to predictively determine whether a handoff may be needed or whether multi-streaming should be invoked or terminated. Intelligent communication session data may be monitored, recorded and/or stored by a handoff service, a bridging service and/or a multi-streaming service, as well as applications executed on communication devices or other network devices. Intelligent communication session data may be any data relating to a communication session, including detected signal strengths, available networks, protocol and buffer statistics and analysis, environmental and/or geographical factors, the performance of access points and other network components, past interactions between or among communication devices, and access points and other network components, context of conversations during voice calls.06-20-2013
20130157662MULTI-SIM MULTI-STANDBY COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND SYNCHRONIZATION DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - A multi-SIM multi-standby communication terminal, and a synchronization device and method thereof are provided. The synchronization method includes: searching, by the first card, for a network and camping on a first cell after the communication terminal is powered on; controlling the second card to camp on the first cell; determining, by the first card, if there is a second cell qualified for reselection based on the result of neighbouring cells measurement, and if the determination result is YES, the first card reselecting the second cell; and controlling the second card to reselect the second cell after the first card camps on the second cell. This disclosure has the following advantages: the efficiency of paging information reception and neighbouring cells measurement is increased, power consumption is reduced, the time for camping on and cell reselection is reduced, and the implementation of the physical layer is simplified.06-20-2013
20110212726METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR DETERMINING SOFT HANDOVER DIVERSITY SET THRESHOLDS - A method and a terminal for determining soft handover diversity thresholds are disclosed in the present invention. In the above method, at first, a terminal determines a dynamical addition threshold of a diversity corresponding to the terminal according to the first predetermined information, wherein the first predetermined information comprises: carrier-to-interference noise ratios CINRs of all the base stations in the diversity, and parameters carried in downlink channel description messages that are received from base stations by the terminal; then, the terminal determines a dynamical deletion threshold for each base station in the diversity according to the second predetermined information respectively, wherein, for each base station, the second predetermined information comprises: CINRs for base stations in the diversity whose CINRs are greater than the CINR of the base station, and parameters carried in downlink channel description messages. According to the technical solution disclosed in the present invention, a terminal can perform handover according to the current network condition, thereby the system stabilization can be ensured and the system efficiency can be improved.09-01-2011
20080200173Method and arrangement for controlling cell change and a terminal of a cellular system - The invention relates to an improved method and arrangement for controlling a cell change performed by a terminal of a cellular radio system. In particular the invention relates to a cell change in a situation where the terminal is connected to a special service provided by its current cell, e.g. to the GPRS service (General Packet Radio Service). An essential idea of the invention is that in conjunction with a cell change order a base station sends to the terminal information about whether the terminal is allowed not to carry out the cell change order if the terminal does not know the timing information of the new cell assigned to it. This information is advantageously sent in a signalling message of a certain service, such as the GPRS service. It is an advantage of the invention that a terminal connected to a certain service will not make unnecessary cell change attempts which are doomed to fail. The invention helps direct the cell change in such a manner that the load caused by possible repeated cell change attempts on the terminal and radio signalling is low.08-21-2008
20080200172METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSFERRING AN ONGOING COMMUNICATION IN WHICH A MOBILE TERMINAL IS INVOLVED BETWEEN A FIRST AND A SECOND BASE STATIONS AND WHEREIN ONE OF THE BASE STATIONS IS LOCATED IN A MOVING CONVEYANCE - The present invention concerns a method and a system for transferring an ongoing communication in which a mobile terminal is involved between a first and a second base stations of a wireless cellular telecommunication network, one of the base stations being located in a moving conveyance. The first base station: 08-21-2008
20110223919Network Gateway Configured to Provide a Handover, Converting and Routing Function - Methods are provided for handing over a connection from a source base station to a target base station. The methods include receiving, at a gateway, a handover required message transmitted from the source base station, the handover required message indicating that a user equipment-connection serviced by the source base station should be handed over to a target base station; generating, at the gateway, a handover request message in response to receiving the handover required message; and transmitting, from the gateway, to the target base station the handover request message. The gateway acts as a proxy of a core network control node for a plurality of base stations that are connected to the gateway. Related devices are also provided herein.09-15-2011
20110223917METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR INFORMING A SERVING CELL HANDOVER - The present disclosure provides a method, an apparatus and a system for informing a serving cell handover, which relate to radio communication technology, and can greatly reduce delay of the handover of the HS-DSCH serving cell, decrease the drop call rate, and enhance user's experience. The method for informing a serving cell handover includes: a radio network controller (RNC) sets up a radio link with a candidate cell, and sets configuration for the candidate cell during the process of setting up the radio link; the RNC sends configuration information of the candidate cell to user equipment (UE); and after acquiring an optimum cell, the RNC informs, through an Iub interface signaling message, a target base station of sending a serving cell handover instruction to the UE. The serving cell handover instruction instructs the UE to hand over to the optimum cell according to the configuration information. The present disclosure is suitable for occasions where the serving cell hands over in the radio network.09-15-2011
20110223915APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOWING FEMTO BASE STATION TO EFFICIENTLY PERFORM BEACONING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for allowing a femto base station to efficiently perform beaconing in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes obtaining a System Information Block (SIB) message of a neighbor macro base station transmitted to a terminal by the neighbor macro base station. Information of the femto base station is added to the obtained SIB message of the macro base station and the SIB message is updated. The updated SIB message is transmitted to the terminal.09-15-2011
20130150040POWER MANAGEMENT & CONTROL SYNCHRONIZATION WITHIN IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING MODAL ANTENNAS AND RELATED METHODS - A means of power management and control via a reverse link of a CDMA or LTE network is disclosed. The protocol is set to superimpose itself in an agnostic way to the power management as one more layer of freedom is added. The adjustment depending on the power control is then derived by mismatch if too much power or antenna tuning to enhance the power. This is also following a table in the device that will adjust ECC in case of a MIMO transmission such as LTE as well as SAR. This will generate also a mean of a soft-handoff and load control on the base station.06-13-2013
20130150042OPERATING METHOD OF CSG FEMTO BASE STATION, HANDOVER METHOD OF HANDOVER TO CSG FEMTO BASE STATION AND MANAGING METHOD OF MANAGING INFORMATION OF NEIGHBORING CSG FEMTO CELL - Disclosed is an operating method of a femto base station which includes broadcasting a plurality of public land mobile network (PLMN) identities; broadcasting a plurality of closed subscriber group (CSG) identities correlated with the plurality of PLMN identities; and establishing wireless communication with user equipment based on the broadcasted PLMN and CSG identities.06-13-2013
20110244860Method of Changing Primary Component Carrier and Related Communication Device - A method of changing a primary component carrier (PCC) for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a handover command from a network of the wireless communication system to change a first uplink primary component carrier of a first plurality of uplink component carriers or a first downlink primary component carrier of a first plurality of downlink component carriers, and performing a random access channel (RACH) procedure on at least one of uplink component carriers according to the handover command.10-06-2011
20110244859COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, TERMINAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a communication control apparatus to control handover with terminal equipment including a position information acquisition unit to acquire position information containing a cell ID specifying a cell to which the terminal equipment is connected, a storage unit to store a series of the position information acquired by the position information acquisition unit as position information history, a determination unit to determine whether the terminal equipment should have been connected to each cell specified by each cell ID contained in the position information history on a movement route of the terminal equipment, and a data generation unit to generate recommended handover order data indicating connection order of cells to be recommended for the terminal equipment by removing a cell ID specifying a cell determined to which the terminal equipment should not have been connected by the determination unit from the position information history.10-06-2011
20110244858Method and Apparatus for Cell Reselections - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a user equipment initiates autonomous cell reselection from a source cell to a target cell. Subsequent to the reselection, the user equipment transmits information relating to the source cell to the target cell. The network is in some embodiments configured to use the information for self-organizing network purposes by connecting source-target cell pairs as neighbours.10-06-2011
20130150050COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND FEMTO BASE STATION THEREIN, METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR CONTROLLING THE SAMES, AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING INFORMATION TO FEMTO BASE STATION - In order to change control over a user equipment within a femtocell in accordance with a change in camping of the user equipment, a communication system includes a femto base station (06-13-2013
20110275377METHOD, NETWORK SYSTEM AND DESTINATION NETWORK FOR TRANSMITTING QoS DURING A HANDOVER PROCESS BETWEEN SYSTEMS - A method for transmitting quality of service (QoS) during a handover process between systems and a network system and a destination network thereof are provided, which enable the QoS to be transmitted to a second access network during a handover process of a user equipment (UE) between systems. The method comprises: a second network mobility management network element acquires QoS of a UE during a handover process of the UE from a first network to a second network; and the second network mobility management network element transmits the acquired QoS to the second network access network and/or a user plane network element.11-10-2011
20110275376METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE DISTRIBUTED MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS, CORRESPONDING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method of arranging exchange of signals between user terminals in a cellular communication system and at least one base station including a central unit and a plurality of remote units. The method includes exchanging signals with at least one user terminal simultaneously via at least two remote units by applying at the at least two remote units, separate distributing weighting functions to the signals exchanged with the at least one user terminal.11-10-2011
20110275375MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station (UE) according to the present invention includes: a reception unit (11-10-2011
20110275374HANDOVER DURING CARRIER AGGREGATION OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods for performing handovers and addition of carriers during carrier aggregation operation are described. A mobile station can indicate failure to perform downlink synchronization to some but not all cells of a target eNB, in response to a handover command. The mobile station can activate carriers based on various combinations of transmission of random access preambles, reception of random access response messages and transmission of handover complete messages. A base station can activate carriers based on various combinations of reception of random access preambles, transmission of random access response messages and reception of handover complete messages.11-10-2011
20130150038SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HANDOFF OF A MOBILE TELEPHONE CALL IN A VOIP ENVIRONMENT - When a mobile telephony device is conducting a voice over Internet protocol (VOIP) telephone call via a data network, and the mobile telephone device transitions from a first wireless data connection to a second wireless data connection, signaling between the mobile telephone device and a media relay inform the media relay how to address data packets bearing the media of the call after the transition has occurred. In some embodiments, the mobile telephone device establishes multiple simultaneous wireless data connections, and the mobile telephony device switches the media of the call between the wireless data connections depending on the quality of the wireless data connections.06-13-2013
20130150041METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER AND SESSION CONTINUITY USING PRE-REGISTRATION TUNNELING PROCEDURE - A method and apparatus for session continuity using pre-registration tunneling procedure are disclosed. For session continuity, a tunnel is established between a multi-mode wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a core network of a target system via a source system while the WTRU is still connected with the source system. An access procedure is performed toward the target system using the tunnel. A handover is the performed from the source system to the target system once the access procedure is complete. The access procedure includes session initiation protocol (SIP) registration, authentication of the WTRU at the target system, and internet protocol (IP) configuration. The handover may be from a third generation partnership project (3GPP) system to a non-3GPP system, or vice versa.06-13-2013
20130150045PROVIDING FOR MOBILITY FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices for facilitating mobility between flexible bandwidth systems and other bandwidth systems are provided. These tools and techniques that provide mobility between different bandwidth systems may facilitate supporting circuit-switched (CS) services, such as CS voice services. Some embodiments provide for determining flexible bandwidth capable devices, such as user equipment. Some embodiments involve core network redirection where a core network may direct the handling of circuit-switched services when a flexible bandwidth system does not support the CS services. Some examples provide for radio access network determined handling of CS services when a flexible bandwidth system may not support the CS services. Some embodiments provide for transitioning to a flexible bandwidth system. Some embodiments provide for transitioning from flexible bandwidth systems to non-flexible bandwidth systems that have no support for some or all CS services, other flexible bandwidth systems, and/or systems that natively support CS voice services.06-13-2013
20130150046USING IDENTIFIER MAPPING TO RESOLVE ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER AMBIGUITY - Ambiguity (e.g., confusion) associated with access point identifiers may be resolved by querying candidate target access points and/or by using historical records indicative of one or more access points that the access point has previously accessed. For example, messages may be sent to access points that are assigned the same identifier to cause the access points to monitor for a signal from an access terminal that received the identifier from a target access point. The target access point may then be identified based on any responses that indicate that a signal was received from the access terminal. In some aspects the access points subject to being queried may be selected using a tiered priority. In addition, it may be determined based on prior handoffs of a given access terminal that when that access terminal reports a given identifier, the access terminal usually ends up being handed-off to a particular access point. Accordingly, a mapping may be maintained for that access terminal that maps the identifier to that access point so that the mapping may be used to resolve any future confusion associated with the use of that identifier by that access terminal.06-13-2013
20130150047HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD AND DEVICE - A handover processing method includes obtaining, by a relay station, information, where the information is used for determining whether a mobility management entity (MME) of a user equipment is in a mobility management entity pool (MME pool) to which a neighboring eNB belongs; and determining, by the relay station, that an X2 interface between a serving eNB of the relay station and the neighboring eNB cannot be used for handover if the MME of the user equipment is not in the MME pool to which the neighboring eNB belongs. The foregoing solutions enable the relay station to initiate a correct handover procedure.06-13-2013
20130150048COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SINGLE-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION AND COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A communication system and method for single-point transmission and reception and coordinated multi-point transmission and reception are provided. The system and method include determining information associated with a channel status of a target terminal. The system and method also include selecting, with respect to the target terminal, one of single-point transmission and reception and coordinated multi-point transmission and reception based on the information associated with the channel status of the target terminal.06-13-2013
20130150049DATA PROCESSING IN INTRA-SITE HANDOVER - The technology involves data processing during intra-site handover procedures. At least two directional antennas of a base station receive data carrying signals originating from a mobile units positioned in an intra-site handover area defined by the overlapping radio coverage of the antennas. The directional antennas performs an initial data signal detection of the received data signals resulting in detected data, which typically results in a loss of radio performance of the antenna. The detected data from the directional antennas is then processed to generate processed data. The performance loss is compensated by providing differential antenna gain of the directional antennas within the handover area.06-13-2013
20130150044METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR ENERGY SAVING COMPENSATION - The present invention relates to the technical field of wireless communications, is used for optimizing an energy saving mechanism, and provides a method for energy saving compensation, which method comprises: expanding, by a base station, a signal coverage area to form a new cell, when the energy saving activation requirements are met, so as to allow an energy-saving cell managed by the base station to switch users to the new cell and to activate the energy saving state; and when energy saving deactivation requirements are met, and if the energy-saving cell managed by the base station deactivates the energy saving state, then switching, by the base station, the users to the energy-saving cell and reducing the signal coverage area. The present invention optimizes currently available energy saving mechanisms and provides a solution capable of compensating the service loss of energy-saving cells.06-13-2013
20130150039HANDOVER RESTRICTION - This disclosure is directed to a source radio access node and a method in the source radio access node for executing a handover of a radio terminal 06-13-2013
20130137435Method and system for communication implementation for user equipment - The disclosure provides a method and system for communication implementation for a user equipment, which include: a user equipment reports the state information of other sub-devices except the sub-device adopting Long Term Evolution (LTE) technology to the network (05-30-2013
20130137434SELF-CONFIGURATION OF DONOR/RELAY NODE RELATIONSHIP - The present invention relates to a method for transferring RAN configuration data between radio access nodes. In accordance with an embodiment of the invention, the method comprises the steps of, by a mobility management node (MMEA): receiving a first RAN configuration transfer message (05-30-2013
20130137433COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method performed by a EUTRAN base station, the method including generating a request for resource status information. The request defines a periodicity when update messages including said resource status information should be sent. The method further including sending the generated request to a neighboring EUTRAN base station, receiving one or more resource status update messages from the neighboring base station in response to the requested resource status information in accordance with said defined periodicity, and performing load balancing operations in dependence upon the received one or more resource status update messages.05-30-2013
20100285805MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a multi-carrier communication method capable of preventing lowering of a throughput of another mobile device accompanying allocation of a sub-carrier for a new mobile station device. This multi-carrier communication method can acquire reception quality information for one of the sub-carriers already allocated in an MS (11-11-2010
20100285802COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A mobile communications system is proposed in which mobile communications devices are arranged to carry out signal measurements on the signals received from neighbouring cells. The bandwidth over which these signal measurements are carried out is determined in dependence upon the bandwidths of the neighbouring cells and is signalled to the mobile communication device by a serving base station.11-11-2010
20100291930METHOD FOR HAND-OVER OF TERMINAL, NETWORK ELEMENT, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention provides a method for hand-over of a terminal from a first base station to a second base station, radio network element, terminal, base station and a communication system. The method for hand-over of a terminal from a first base station to a second base station, wherein said first base station is EV-DO enabled in an access network and said second base station is not EV-DO enabled, said method comprising: transmitting an EV-DO pilot signal from said second base station to said terminal; sending a route update message including an EV-DO pilot strength from said terminal if said EV-DO pilot strength is above a predetermined threshold; calculating a CDMA pilot strength based on said EV-DO pilot strength; and performing the hand-over of said terminal to said second base station when CDMA pilot strength is above the hand-over threshold.11-18-2010
20100317348METHOD FOR ACCESSING A SERVICE UNAVAILABLE THROUGH A NETWORK CELL - A method performed by user equipment (UE) includes receiving a request to access a service unavailable through a first network cell associated with the UE and informing a second network cell that the UE is requesting to obtain the service unavailable through the first network cell. The request may be received from a user of the UE or may be a paging message.12-16-2010
20100317347METHOD FOR ACCESSING A SERVICE UNAVAILABLE THROUGH A NETWORK CELL - A method in user equipment (UE) associated with a first network cell in a wireless telecommunications system includes performing idle mode measurements of one or more network cells other than the first network cell when the UE is operating in an idle mode, receiving a request to access a first service unavailable through the first network cell, communicating with an access device associated with the first network cell based on results of the idle mode measurements, receiving from the access device an identification of a second network cell, and accessing the first service through the second network cell.12-16-2010
20100317346METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MOBILE HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus to manage mobile handover are disclosed. An example mobile station includes hardware and software stored on a tangible computer readable medium that, during operation, cause the mobile station to receive from a network controller a response to a network registration request, wherein the response includes an indicator to indicate a type of cell that may be reported by the mobile station during a handover procedure and send a handover message indicating cells permitted by the indicator.12-16-2010
20100317345INTER BASE STATION HANDOVER METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DRX CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - Disclosed is a DRX control method and system in which a source base station forwards Dormancy Context, which is information for controlling the activity level of a mobile station that performs inter base station handover, to a target base station and, immediately after the mobile station completes handover, the target base station performs DRX control of the mobile station using the Dormancy Context.12-16-2010
20100317344SELECTING AN ACCESS METHOD WHILE PERFORMING HANDOVERS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of managing a handover of a connection of a mobile device between a first access node and a second access node in a communications system, the method comprising: sending information from the communications system to the mobile device; selecting one of a plurality of access methods for accessing the second access node based on said information; and accessing the second access node using the selected access method.12-16-2010
20120282930COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method performed by a EUTRAN base station, the method including generating a request for resource status information. The request defines a periodicity when update messages including said resource status information should be sent. The method further including sending the generated request to a neighboring EUTRAN base station, receiving one or more resource status update messages from the neighboring base station in response to the requested resource status information in accordance with said defined periodicity, and performing load balancing operations in dependence upon the received one or more resource status update messages.11-08-2012
20120282929Apparatuses and Methods for Reducing a Load on a Serving Gateway in a Communications Network Systems - The exemplary embodiments of the present invention relate to a proxy entity for reducing a load on a serving gateway. This is achieved by the proxy entity comprising a cross connecting circuit configured to receive from a MME, a cross connect set up request message to establish a tunnel between the proxy entity and the serving radio base station. The circuit is configured to establish the tunnel towards the serving radio base station. A receiver of the proxy entity is configured to receive, from the MME, a request to handover the UE from the serving to a target radio base station. The cross connecting circuit is further configured to establish a cross connect tunnel towards the target radio base station using an identifier of the established tunnel and an address of the target radio base station. The exemplary embodiments of the invention also relate to a MME.11-08-2012
20130157664Broadband Wireless Mobile Communications System With Distributed Antenna System Using Interleaving Intra-Cell Handovers - A broadband wireless mobile communication system for high a speed mobile transportation corridor comprises a base stations utilizing two or more sectors, a distributed antenna system connected to the base station and including remote antenna units distributed along the corridor and sectors of the respective base station, with sectors of the base station interleaved among the remote antenna units such that no two adjacent antennas use signals from the same sector. The system desirably employs a radio over fiber distributed antenna system which desirably includes an autonomous sensing remote antenna unit structured so as toggle between standby and active modes in response to locally sensed presence of a mobile transceiver along the corridor. A method of operating broadband wireless mobile communication system for high a speed mobile transportation corridor is also disclosed.06-20-2013
20130157665TERMINAL AND QUALITY TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided is a terminal that achieves appropriate handover control even in a case where a cell group in which downstream communication is performed by coordination between a plurality of cells is included in a communication system. According to the terminal (06-20-2013
20130183970Method of notifying switching information and base station - The present invention provides a method of notifying switching information and a base station. The method comprises: a source base station switching a user equipment (UE) to a target Pcell of a target base station; and the source base station notifying the target base station of signal quality of the target Pcell. The present invention ensures that the target base station can efficiently select secondary service cells according to the transmitted information, and reduces time delay.07-18-2013
20130183971Systems And/Or Methods For Providing Relay Mobility - Systems or methods for managing a handover (e.g. over a Un or Uu connection or interface) of a relay from an eNB such as a source eNB to another eNB such as a target eNB may be provided where the source eNB or DeNB may provide a backhaul link to the relay and the relay may provide an access link to a user equipment (UE). To manage the handover, access information may be received and a determination may be made regarding whether one or more target eNBs may be capable of handling the relay based on the access information. Additionally, the relay that may be handed over may be configured to use radio access network (RAN) sharing, a mobility management entity (MME) may be selected, and/or a EUTRAN radio access bearer (E-RAB) may be modified.07-18-2013
20130183973CELL RESELECTION BASED ON MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE (MBMS) METRICS - A method for cell reselection by a wireless communication device is described. The method includes camping on a serving cell in idle mode. A neighbor cell is detected. A serving cell rank is computed for the serving cell. A neighbor cell rank is computed for the neighbor cell based on multimedia broadcast multicast service metrics. Cell reselection is determined based on the serving cell rank and the neighbor cell rank.07-18-2013
20130183974Method of Enhanced Connection Recovery and Cell Selection - An enhanced connection recovery upon lost RRC connection due to radio link failure (RLF) or handover failure (HOF) is proposed. A UE first establishes an RRC connection in a source cell in a mobile communication network. Later on, the UE detects a failure event and starts an RRC reestablishment procedure in a target cell to restore the RRC connection. In a first novel aspect, a fast RLF process is applied to reduce the outage time in the serving cell. In a second novel aspect, an enhanced cell selection mechanism based on cell prioritization information is applied to reduce the outage time in the target cell. In one embodiment, multi-RAT registration is used to steer cell selection.07-18-2013
20130183975DYNAMIC ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access network selection method and apparatus is provided for selecting an access network dynamically in a wireless communication system. The access network selection method of a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting attach to at least two access networks simultaneously in a same area according to the present disclosure includes detecting an event triggering access network reselection of the terminal; selecting a target access network for the terminal to move; generating a fake measurement report message including a radio channel measurement result of a source access network is weaker than a radio channel measurement result of the target access network; and performing handover to the target access network by transmitting the fake measurement report message.07-18-2013
20130183976Method, Apparatus, and System for Accessing to a Mobile Communication Network - A method for accessing to a mobile communication network, comprising: acquiring a session matching level for each cell, which is calculated based on a session type of a session initiated by a user terminal as needed, a session data rate available to the user terminal of each cell and load balance parameters of each cell; accessing to a cell selected according to the session matching level for each cell. Further, it also provides another method for accessing to a mobile communication network, and corresponding user terminal, network-side device and communication system.07-18-2013
20130122908METHOD FOR IMPROVING HANDOVER SUCCESS RATE OF GROUP MOBILE TERMINALS, MOBILE PROXY, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A method for improving a handover success rate of a group of mobile terminals include obtaining a minimum backoff time value according to obtained access parameters, receiving a message from a mobile terminal after entering a new cell, and sending the message to a base station if the message is a handover request message. If the message is not a handover request message, the method includes sending the received message to the base station upon expiry of a predetermine time after the message is received. The predetermined time is greater than or equal to the minimum backoff time value, and the minimum backoff time value is a minimum time value of the predetermined time when the received message from the mobile terminal is not the handover request message.05-16-2013
20110312327RADIO BASE STATION AND INTERFERENCE EQUALIZATION METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system, an interference equalization method is installed in a radio base station for managing a cell configured of sectors, thus equalizing interference between sectors in uplink communication and improving sector-user throughputs. In the situation that congestion occurs in a second sector adjacent to a first sector, a handover from the second sector to the first sector is accelerated when uplink interference of the first sector is equal to or above a first threshold while the usage rate of resource blocks in the first sector is equal to or below a second threshold. This accelerates a handover from the second sector undergoing congestion to the first sector having available resource blocks, thus equalizing uplink interference between these sectors.12-22-2011
20110312326METHOD FOR SWITCHING OPERATING CARRIER AT A USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The method for switching operating carrier at a user equipment is disclosed. In aspect of the present invention, the user equipment receive target carrier information indicating a target carrier of the UE and target carrier transition time information indicating a time difference between receiving timing of transition indication and transition completion timing from an base station. And the UE may switch from a current operating carrier to the indicated target carrier based on the received the target carrier transition time information and the target carrier information. In case that the target carrier information and the target carrier transition time information is transmitted via a high layer signaling, the UE may transmit ACK/NACK confirm signal indicating whether the target carrier transition time information and the target carrier information is received without error via on the target carrier and the current operating carrier to the base station.12-22-2011
20130189988DETECTION OF EARLY INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) HANDOVER TRIGGERING - A device detects poor coverage associated with a source radio access technology (RAT) with which the device is connected, and connects to a target RAT. The device also measures the source RAT for a time period after connecting to the target RAT, and sends, based on the measurements, one or more measurement reports to the target RAT, where the target RAT forwards the one or more measurement reports to the source RAT. Alternatively, or additionally, the target RAT may detect that the handover was triggered too early and may inform the source RAT or command the UE to return to the source RAT. The device further stops the measuring and the sending when the time period expires. In this way, IRAT handover parameters may be automatically or manually tuned to minimize the number of handovers triggered too early, which may result in a more efficient cell configuration.07-25-2013
20130189989REDIRECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TERMINAL - In a redirection method for a terminal according to the present invention, an LTE base station sends a redirection message to the dual-mode terminal, where the redirection message contains a redirection target carrier configured by the LTE base station; the dual-mode terminal performs session negotiation with a CDMA access network, and knows a camping carrier specified by the CDMA access network, where both the redirection target carrier and the camping carrier are the preset carrier on which the dual-mode terminal fixedly camps in the CDMA network; when the dual-mode terminal is redirected from an LTE network to the CDMA network, the dual-mode terminal initiates an access process on the redirection target carrier in the CDMA network. The technical solution provided by the present invention reduces service interruption time when the dual-mode terminal is redirected from the LTE network to the CDMA network, thereby improving user experience.07-25-2013
20130189990METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WHICH A TERMINAL TRANSMITS A CHANNEL ESTIMATION RESULT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method in which a terminal transmits a channel estimation result in a mobile communication system, comprising: a step in which a receiving unit receives information required for channel estimation from a serving base station; a step in which a control unit estimates a channel on the basis of the information and generates information relating to channel estimation; and a step in which a transmitting unit transmits the information relating to channel estimation to the serving base station and at least one of a plurality of neighbor base stations.07-25-2013
20130189984METHOD, SYSTEM AND ACCESS DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS OF TERMINAL - The present invention discloses a method for access control of a terminal, which is applied to the access control of the terminal in a terminal handover process. The method comprises: a source access network element notifying a target access network element of closed subscriber group configuration information of a source cell via a direct interface, and the target access network element determining whether to allow the terminal to access to a target cell based on closed subscriber group configuration information of the target cell and the closed subscriber group configuration information of the source cell. The present invention further discloses a method for access control of a terminal and an access equipment. The present invention provides a feasible scheme for the access control process when the terminal performs handover via a direct interface.07-25-2013
20130189985MOBILITY DETECTION AND SYSTEM ACQUISITION IN DUAL STANDBY DUAL SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULES (DSDS) - Aspects of the present disclosure relate to wireless communications and techniques for determining a power save duration for an out of service subscription based, at least in part, on a detected mobility status change of a mobile device. Aspects generally include a mobile device, that shares a single radio resource for establishing connections with a first and second subscription, using a detected mobility status change to determine a power saving duration for an out of service subscription.07-25-2013
20130189986METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING NEIGHBOR CELL INFORMATION - A method and system for managing neighbor cell information are disclosed in the present invention. A user equipment is reselected into a current Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) cell from a former resident cell belonging to other system, and finds out that the former resident cell is not in a neighbor cell list of the current UTRA cell and the user equipment itself supports a neighbor cell relation maintenance function, and/or after receiving an indication notified by a network side that the user equipment can report neighbor cell relation, the user equipment reports an air interface signaling message carrying cell information of the former resident cell to a Radio Network Controller (RNC); the RNC receives and decodes the air interface signaling message, acquires the cell information of the former resident cell, and updates inter-system neighbor cell information according to the cell information of the former resident cell.07-25-2013
20130189987USER EQUIPMENT CENTRIC MECHANISM FOR ENABLING 2G/3G PREFERRED CAMPING - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus receives, at a user equipment, broadcast system information including one or more reselection priorities defined by a network operator for UE operation, each of the reselection priorities identifies a priority for one or more of a RAT and a RAN. The apparatus determines the availability of a first radio access network (RAN) operated using a first radio access technology (RAT) while camped in idle mode on a second RAN using a second RAT. The apparatus initiates a reselection procedure targeting the first RAN regardless of the reselection priorities.07-25-2013
20130189991Method for Self-Optimized Interworking Between Radio Access Networks - Method for self-optimized interworking between a first radio access network of a first type of radio access technology and a second radio access network of a second type of radio access technology. The first radio access network includes a first base station. The second radio access network includes a second base station. Measuring signals indicative for availability characteristics of the second base station, transmitting the signals indicative for the availability characteristics of the second base station from the user equipment to the first base station, generating a map of the coverage of the first and second radio access networks based on the signals indicative for the availability characteristics of the first and second base stations, wherein the map includes the information about the availability characteristics of the first and second base stations for interworking, and self-optimized interworking between the first and second base stations based on the map of coverage.07-25-2013
20120289232SERVICE DEPENDENT INACTIVITY TIMER11-15-2012
20120003979RADIO WAVE STATE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM, RADIO WAVE STATE MEASUREMENT METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING RADIO WAVE STATE MEASUREMENT PROGRAM - A propagation state measurement system includes a parameter update information reception means (01-05-2012
20120003976COMMUNICATION NETWORK SELECTION - A mobile telecommunications device includes cellular communication means for communicating with a cellular telecommunications network base station, wireless communication means for communicating with a wireless access point, and control means for selectively enabling the wireless communication means in response to a trigger. The trigger may be the launch of a web browser of a request for a download of data.01-05-2012
20090005045Mobile device handover supporting method, radio network control device, radio base station and computer program - The present invention relates to a device that includes 01-01-2009
20120009926SECONDARY RADIO-NODES FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS AND RELATED METHODS - A mobile communications network may include a primary and secondary radio-nodes, and the secondary radio-node may include a radio-node transmitter and a radio-node receiver. A method of operating the secondary radio-node may include monitoring through the radio-node receiver of the secondary radio-node to detect user terminal signals transmitted to the primary radio-node while maintaining the secondary radio-node in a sleep mode. Responsive to detecting user terminal signals during monitoring in the sleep-mode, operation of the secondary radio-node may be changed from the sleep mode to an active mode.01-12-2012
20120021746METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING A RADIO NETWORK PROBLEM - A method and an apparatus for detecting a radio network problem are disclosed. The method includes: when a radio link failure (RLF) problem occurs on a user equipment (UE) in a previous cell, a first base station controlling a new cell that a radio resource control (RRC) connection established with the UE receives problem information about the RLF problem sent by the UE, after the RRC connection is established, and the first base station sends the problem information to a second base station controlling the previous cell. In this way, the network side can automatically identify and detect the radio network problem which occurs on the UE, so that the network can perform self-adjustment and optimization, therefore improving the network performance and satisfying use requirements of users.01-26-2012
20120021745METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL HANDOFF - A method for handoff between cells in a communication system includes the network sends a cell individual offset preset for a cell in the active set relative to each of its neighboring cells respectively to a terminal; after measuring the cell in the active set and its neighboring cells, the terminal evaluates the measurement in accordance with the measurement result and the cell individual offset for the cell in the active set relative to its each neighboring cell; the terminal then submits a measurement report to the network in accordance with the measurement evaluation result; the network instructs the terminal to perform a handoff between cells in accordance with the measurement report.01-26-2012
20120021744Measurement and Handover of Dual USIM Mobile Terminal - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for efficient measurement and handover of a mobile terminal with multiple USIMs. According to one aspect, a source Node B may initiate calls with first and second subscriber identities associated with a UE that supports multiple subscriber identities and transmit a request for a measurement report to the UE, the request specifying the first subscriber identity. The subscriber identities may be associated with a UE by association with an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI). The source Node B may determine to handover the calls for the first and second subscriber identities to a target Node B based on the measurement report. The source Node B may transmit handover commands to instruct the UE to handover calls for the first and second subscriber identities to the target Node B.01-26-2012
20130196664USER EQUIPMENT AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE SELECTION OF HANDOVER PARAMETERS IN WIRELESS-ACCESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of user equipment (UE) and method for adaptively selecting an A3offset-TTT pair for handover in a wireless access network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the UE may select an A3offset value based on target cell Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) and select a time-to-trigger (TTT) based on serving cell RSRP. A measurement report may be transmitted to an eNodeB for handover when the target cell RSRP exceeds the serving cell RSRP by at least the A3offset value for the TTT. The A3offset value may be selected to be inversely related to the target cell RSRP and the TTT may be selected to be directly related to the serving cell RSRP.08-01-2013
20130196665Method of Handling Multicall Functionality and Related Communication Device - A method of handling multicall functionality for mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving an information element (IE) from a first network through a handover procedure, wherein the IE contains multicall capability of a core network; and initiating the multicall functionality according to the IE when handing over to the second network.08-01-2013
20130196666METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER PREPARATION - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for handover preparation. The method includes: receiving, by a DeNB, a first handover request message sent by an RN; obtaining, by the DeNB, the first target cell identifier, and instructing a base station to which the first target cell belongs to perform handover preparation in the first target cell; receiving, by the DeNB, a second handover request message sent by the RN; and when a base station to which the second target cell belongs is different from the base station to which the first target cell belongs, instructing, by the DeNB, the base station to which the second target cell belongs to perform handover preparation in the second target cell. Embodiments of the present invention further disclose corresponding apparatuses.08-01-2013
20130196667HANDOVER METHOD AND SYSTEM IN RELAY NETWORK, RELAY NODE, CONTROL BASE STATION AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a handover method and system in a relay network, a relay node, a control base station and a base station. The method includes: receiving, by a relay node, a first area identifier that identifies the relay node; sending a system information broadcast message carrying the first area identifier to a terminal in a coverage area; receiving a handover request message forwarded by a control base station; and performing, according to the handover request message, a control operation of accessing the relay node on the terminal. The first area identifier that identifies the relay node is allocated to the relay node, so that the terminal in the relay network can be normally handed over from the base station to the relay node.08-01-2013
20130203416Handover Preparations - A technique including transmitting via a wireless interface a handover request message relating to handover of a communication device from an intermediate access node to a new access node, wherein the handover request message identifies a plurality of access nodes as candidates for the new access node.08-08-2013
20130203417METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MOBILITY IN A MULTI-RADIO DEVICE - Methods, apparatus, and computer program products for managing mobility in a multi-radio device are provided. One example method generally includes detecting that a first channel is not usable for communicating via a first radio access technology (RAT); receiving a message to redirect from a second channel to the first channel; determining the first channel is in a set of one or more blocked channels not usable for the first RAT; and in response to the determination, taking one or more actions. Another example method generally includes detecting that a first channel is not usable for communicating via a first RAT and providing an indication to a network that a user equipment (UE) no longer supports the first channel.08-08-2013
20130203418IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE REPORT CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS OF NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An in-device coexistence interference report control method of a network for terminal to inform the network of interference among heterogeneous radio communication modules coexisting in the terminal is provided. The method includes determining, at a terminal when a terminal capability enquiry message is received from a base station, whether the base station supports an In-Device Coexistence (IDC) interference report, transmitting, when the IDC interference report is supported, a terminal capacity information message to the base station, receiving a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message including information on whether terminal's IDC interference indicator transmission is permitted from the base station; and transmitting an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station in response to the RRC connection reconfiguration message. The in-device coexistence interference indication control method is advantageous in preventing the UE from transmitting useless in-device coexistence interference indication messages, resulting in reduction of unnecessary signaling.08-08-2013
20120071164MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CORE NETWORK NODE SELECTION METHOD, AND BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION USED THEREFOR - A mobile communication system in which a plurality of base stations and a plurality of core network nodes are distributed in a plurality of areas, wherein a source base station or a mobile station in a handover procedure of the mobile station transmits information for selecting a core network node to a target base station.03-22-2012
20100015981CELLULAR RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND HANDOVER METHOD - A cellular radio communication system according to a first aspect of the present invention includes a plurality of base stations to send control information to a mobile station belonging to a cell controlled by each of the plurality of base stations for enabling handover to a cell adjacent to a cell controlled by each of the plurality of base stations. Further, the control information sent from at least some of the plurality of base stations concerns a smaller number of cells than a total number of adjacent cells to the cell controlled by each of the plurality of base stations.01-21-2010
20130095832METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING CELLS IN AN IDLE OR SLEEP MODE - Methods and apparatuses are provided for communicating with multiple base stations in idle or sleep mode communications. During such modes, antennas or related resources of a device can be assigned for receiving signals from a source base station, such as paging or similar signals, or for measuring other base stations. The resource assignment can be determined based on the mode or a related time interval, one or more additional factors, such as a signal quality at the source base station, and/or the like.04-18-2013
20130095833DEACTIVATING PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT - A method is provided of deactivating PDP Context upon transfer of a connection with a user terminal between a femtocell base station and a macrocell base station, the method comprising: the femto base station receiving a message including a first identifier of a PDP Context, altering the identifier of a PDP Context to a second identifier, and forwarding the altered message to the core network, the core network receiving a message including an identifier determines that the received identifier does not match the identifier that it expects and so deactivates the PDP Context.04-18-2013
20120083275RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method used in a radio communication system including a first radio base station, a second radio base station that communicates with the first radio base station, a relay station which communicates with the second radio base station via the first radio base station, and a mobile station, the method transmits a request, by the second radio base station, for requesting the first radio base station to communicate with the relay station for the second radio base station and communicating, by the requested first radio base station, with the relay station for the second radio base station and transmits a communication result to the second radio base station.04-05-2012
20120094673SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUSES FOR FACILITATING HANDOVER TO CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - Methods, apparatuses, and systems are provided for facilitating handover to closed subscriber group cells. A method may include reading, when operating in idle mode, one or more information blocks broadcast by a closed subscriber group cell. The method may further include extracting one or more routing parameters and/or closed subscriber group identifier for the closed subscriber group cell from the one or more read information blocks. The method may additionally include storing a mapping of the one or more routing parameters and/or closed subscriber group identifier to a physical layer identifier and to a carrier frequency for the closed subscriber group cell. Corresponding apparatuses and systems are also provided.04-19-2012
20120094671METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RELOCATION - Provided in the present invention are a method and a system for implementing a relocation between networks, wherein the method comprises the following steps of: a source wireless access controller sending relocation request message to a target wireless access controller through an Iur-g interface, wherein the relocation request message carries capability of a user equipment (UE) as well as an port number of the Iur-g interface for bearing user plane data which is assigned to the UE by the source wireless access controller; after receiving the request message, the target wireless access controller assigning wireless resources to the UE, checking that the port number of user plane corresponding to the Iur-g interface is available, and sending relocation request acknowledge message to the source wireless access controller; after receiving the relocation request acknowledge message, the source wireless access controller informing the UE to relocate.04-19-2012
20120094670Method and Arrangement in Wireless Communications Network - A method in a wireless terminal (04-19-2012
20130210435METHODS AND DEVICES FOR ADJUSTING RESOURCE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES IN HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS BASED ON CELL INFORMATION - Devices and methods for adjusting resource management procedures in a mobile device communicating with a node operating in a cell in a heterogeneous communication network are disclosed. In one aspect, a method includes receiving a signal, including a reference signal, transmitted from the node during a predetermined time period, measuring signal reception information, including reference signal power values, at predetermined time intervals during the predetermined time period, measuring speeds of movement of the mobile device at the predetermined time intervals, determining a reference signal power variation value based on the variability of the measured reference signal power values, comparing the determined reference signal power variation value with a predetermined power threshold value for a given measured speed, determining cell information based on the comparison, determining an adjustment to a resource management procedure based on the determined cell information, and adjusting the resource management procedure based on the determined adjustment.08-15-2013
20130210436METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT FOR HANDOVERS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method comprises receiving a relocation required message for a user equipment from a source Radio Access Network (RAN); multicasting a relocation request to multiple local RANs; receiving a first relocation acknowledgement from a first local RAN of the multiple local RANs to which a user equipment may be handed into; and forwarding the first relocation acknowledgement to the source RAN.08-15-2013
20130210437METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING IMPROVED MOBILITY PROCEDURE - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in order to provide measurement reports on a more timely basis. Additionally, the method, apparatus and computer program product may provide measurement reports without first having initiated a cell reselection process. As such, the network entity, such as a radio network controller (RNC), may provide increased control in regards to the mobility procedure, such as cell redirection or handover, based at least in part upon the measurement result. From the perspective of a mobile terminal, one method includes receiving instructions to perform a cell update procedure based upon a new measurement. In response to obtaining the new measurement, the method also includes causing the cell update procedure to be triggered. In this regard, the cell update procedure includes provision of a cell update message that includes measurement results.08-15-2013
20130210439SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM INFORMATION OF LTE-BASED FEMTOCELL - Provided are a mobile communication system comprising a femto base station for transmitting system information, and a terminal for receiving the system information from the femto base station. The terminal receives the system information from the femto base station, and during other times, receives data from a serving macro base station.08-15-2013
20130210440MOBILE TERMINAL, MOTION/STILLNESS DETERMINATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A mobile terminal determines whether the mobile terminal is moving or stationary. The mobile terminal includes a motion acceleration detection unit that detects motion acceleration based on acceleration information of the mobile terminal, a serving cell information retrieving unit that retrieves information representing a serving cell, a serving cell information switching determination unit that determines whether the serving cell is switched, based on the information representing the serving cell, and a motion/stillness determination unit that determines, when the serving cell is determined to be switched, whether the mobile terminal is moved, based on whether the motion acceleration is detected.08-15-2013